gnucash-docs maint: Multiple changes pushed
Frank H.Ellenberger
fell at code.gnucash.org
Wed Apr 28 11:50:24 EDT 2021
Updated via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/c7b71d35 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/bb92b32d (commit)
from https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/bb09fb04 (commit)
commit c7b71d358593384755038d297155818c08d424ce
Merge: bb09fb0 bb92b32
Author: Frank H. Ellenberger <frank.h.ellenberger at gmail.com>
Date: Tue Apr 27 20:29:48 2021 +0200
Merge PR #144 into maint
commit bb92b32daca2173d2697c808354fdae5751512cb
Author: Christian Wehling <christian.wehling at web.de>
Date: Thu Apr 8 21:52:07 2021 +0200
Transfer all missing help files to help/de.
A note that the German translation is not yet complete is added to all
files at the beginning of the section.
diff --git a/help/de/CMakeLists.txt b/help/de/CMakeLists.txt
index c1adbc0..0e7be51 100644
--- a/help/de/CMakeLists.txt
+++ b/help/de/CMakeLists.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,13 @@
set (entities
Help_ch_Intro.xml
Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
+ Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml
+ Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml
+ Help_ch_Transactions.xml
+ Help_ch_Business.xml
+ Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml
+ Help_ch_Reports.xml
+ Help_ch_Customize.xml
Help_fdl-appendix.xml
Help_legal.xml
Help_chartofaccts.xml
diff --git a/help/de/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml b/help/de/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5413d5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/help/de/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,1557 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter SYSTEM "gnc-docbookx.dtd">
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 2.0.x
+ Last modified: December 7th 2009
+ modified: March 28th 2007
+ modified: August 12th 2006
+ modified: February 28th 2005
+
+ Maintainers:
+ Alex Aycinena <alex.aycinena at gmail.com>
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
+
+ Author:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="setup-accounts"
+ xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude">
+ <title>Setting Up, Editing & Working with Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>&untranslated-de;
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This section describes the process of setting up, editing and working with &app; Accounts. In &app;
+ an Account is used as the basic tool to organize the recording of where money comes from and
+ goes to. &app; also extends the concept of real world accounts such as a bank account or loan
+ account to grouping income and expense accounts. This allows you to quickly see where you spent
+ your money and what your major income and expenses are. &app; sets Account Types (as described
+ in the next section) to help in organizing and grouping accounts. Account Types can be used to
+ create a Chart of Accounts.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect1 id="acct-types">
+ <title>Types of &app; Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>&app; supports a number of different account types. It is recommended to choose an appropriate
+ account type based on the list of account types described below.
+ </para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>The Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable types are used internally by &app;’s business
+ features. Transactions involving these accounts should not be added, changed or deleted in
+ any way other than by using
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>post/unpost bill/invoice/voucher or
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>process payment
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="TypeAccounts">
+ <title>Types of &app; Accounts.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Account Type
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Accounts Payable
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Accounts Payable are used by businesses to record amounts that must be paid. Example: The business
+ has bought something, but the business has not paid the bill until later.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Previous versions of this help defined A/P and A/R the other way round.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Accounts Receivable
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Accounts Receivable records amounts for which money has not yet been received. Example: A business
+ has sold something and issued a bill, but the client has not payed until later.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Previous versions of this help defined A/P and A/R the other way round.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Asset
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Asset accounts are used for tracking things that are of value and can be used or sold to pay debts.
+ (Normally a placeholder account)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Bank
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The Bank account type denotes savings or checking accounts held at a bank or other financial
+ institution. Some of these accounts may bear interest. This is also the appropriate
+ account type for check (debit) cards, which directly withdraw payments from a
+ checking account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Cash
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The Cash account type is used to denote the cash that you store in your wallet, shoe box, piggyback,
+ or mattress.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Credit Card
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The Credit Card account type is used to denote credit card accounts, both for cards that allow
+ floating lines of credit (e.g. VISA, MasterCard, or Discover) and with cards that do
+ not permit continuing balances (e.g. American Express)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Currency
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Currency Accounts were used for trading currencies, but have been replaced by the Currency Transfer
+ pane on the Transfer Funds Window (<xref linkend="trans-win-enter"></xref>).
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Equity
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Equity accounts are used to store the opening balances when you first start using &app; or start a
+ new accounting period.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Expense
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Any expense such as food, clothing, taxes, etc. This type is called a category in Quicken.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Income
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Any income received from sources such as salary, interest, dividends, etc. This type is called a
+ category in Quicken.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Liability
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Liability accounts are used for tracking debts or financial obligations. (Normally a placeholder
+ account)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Mutual Fund
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>A professionally managed portfolio of stocks and bonds or other investments divided up into shares.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Stock
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>A share of ownership in a corporation, which entitles its owner to all the risks and rewards that go
+ with it.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold">New Account Hierarchy Setup</emphasis> assistant described in the first
+ section of this help is a convenient way of setting up a set of accounts to use as a framework
+ of account types.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>When new accounts are created the available choices of account types are grayed out according to
+ what type the parent account is. The following list contains the possible choices.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Accounts Payable: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Accounts Receivable: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Asset: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Bank: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Cash: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Credit Card: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Currency: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Equity: Only Equity accounts can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Expense: Only Expense or Income accounts can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Income: Only Expense or Income accounts can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Liability: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Mutual Fund: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Stock: All accounts except Equity, Expense and Income can be child accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="chart-create">
+ <title>Creating a Chart of Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>The Chart of Accounts is like a table of contents for your finances. The best way to conceptualize a
+ chart of accounts is as a tree. The main branches represent entire categories or groups, while
+ the leaves of the tree denote individual bank accounts or expense categories. When a summary
+ report is requested, typically only the main branches are shown in the report, rather than the
+ individual accounts. For example, a chart of accounts might look like the following:
+ </para>
+
+ <xi:include href="Help_chtacctseg.xml" />
+
+ <note id="accts-code">
+ <title>Accounts codes</title>
+
+ <para>Note that accounts not only have names; they may have codes, to order the accounts. When a report is
+ generated, the sort order is determined by the numbering. It’s customary to have the
+ leaf accounts end in non-zero digits, while parent nodes have increasing numbers of zeros.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>&app; does not prevent duplicate numbering, although we would encourage you to avoid this. Account
+ codes are treated as numbers in base-36, thus, if you run out of numbers, you can use the
+ letters, a through z.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="chart-edit">
+ <title>Editing a Chart of Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>Editing the Chart of Accounts is done within the <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel> pane of the
+ <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> dialog. It is possible to move an account to any part of the
+ Chart of Accounts. It is recommended to keep accounts generally under the related types of
+ accounts as described in <xref linkend="acct-types" />. This helps to preserve the Chart of
+ Accounts structure.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To move the selected account to a different parent account just select the account in the
+ <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel> pane. If <guilabel>New top level account</guilabel> is
+ selected then the account will be moved to the top level.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="acct-create">
+ <title>Creating a New Account</title>
+
+ <para>To create a new account go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ or click the <guibutton>New</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> icon in the Account Tree
+ Window. The <guilabel>New Account</guilabel> dialog will be opened.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>New Account</guilabel> properties dialog consists of two tabs, the
+ <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab and the <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> tab.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Creating a New Account involves planning in advance several details that are used in the
+ <guilabel>New Account</guilabel> dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>What type of account is needed.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Where it fits in the structure of the Chart of Accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If there is an Opening Balance.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If there is a Commodity (security/currency) needed for the account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If online updating of the commodity price is needed.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>These details are described below.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="gen-info">
+ <title>General Information Tab</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab is used to access the basic information about the account. It
+ provides a way of connecting the account to stock information if it is one of the currency,
+ mutual fund or stock account types. It can also be flagged as a
+ <link linkend="accts-placeholder">Placeholder</link> account. It displays if it is flagged
+ as a <guilabel>Tax Related</guilabel> account (which is set through the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ dialog).
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are seven fields in the <guilabel>Identification</guilabel> section of this tab.
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Name:</guilabel> The name for the account such as First Bank Checking.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Code:</guilabel> The optional number code as described in
+ <xref linkend="accts-code" />.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description:</guilabel> Optional description for the account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Security/Currency:</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Type</guilabel> field in the <guilabel>Select Security</guilabel> is determined by the
+ selection of <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> panel in the <guilabel>New
+ Account</guilabel> screen.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>For accounts other than <emphasis>Stock</emphasis> or <emphasis>Mutual Fund</emphasis> this should
+ be the default currency, USD (US Dollar) or your local currency symbol. If this
+ account is for a foreign currency then use the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton>
+ button to choose a different currency from the currencies pull-down list.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>For Accounts containing a <emphasis>Stock</emphasis> and <emphasis>Mutual Fund</emphasis>; first
+ select <guilabel>stock</guilabel> or <guilabel>mutual fund</guilabel> in the
+ <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> panel, then the <guilabel>Parent
+ Account</guilabel>, then use the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button, to choose
+ the <guilabel>Type</guilabel> (usually the exchange the security is traded on) and
+ security from the <guilabel>Select Security</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If the required security/fund is not on the list, and you have the correct <guilabel>Type</guilabel>
+ you will need to create the security/fund. To create a commodity for mutual fund and
+ stock accounts select the <guibutton>New...</guibutton> button in the
+ <guilabel>Select Security</guilabel> screen, to bring up the <guilabel>New
+ Security:</guilabel> screen. The options are described in detail in the Security
+ Editor <xref linkend="tool-security-edit"></xref> section. Fill in a
+ <guilabel>name</guilabel>, <guilabel>symbol</guilabel> and <guilabel>type</guilabel>
+ and <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to create the security. After the security is
+ created select the <guilabel>Type:</guilabel> (usually the exchange the security is
+ traded on) and the name in the <guilabel>Currency/security:</guilabel> drop down
+ list and <guibutton>Close</guibutton> the screen.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Smallest Fraction:</guilabel> The smallest fraction that will be tracked.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Color:</guilabel> The color to assign to the account’s register tab. Click
+ on the color button to open the <guilabel>Pick a Color</guilabel> screen. To reset the
+ account color click the <guibutton>Default</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notes:</guilabel> This is a free form text box that can be used for any additional notes
+ about the account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>Below the panes are 3 check-boxes: one to show if the account is <guilabel>Tax Related</guilabel>,
+ one to mark the account as a <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel>, and one to mark an account
+ <guilabel>Hidden</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Tax Related</guilabel> check-box means that an account has been flagged to be included
+ in the Tax Schedule Report. This flag is only displayed on the <guilabel>Edit
+ Account</guilabel> dialog and is set in the <guilabel>Income Tax Information</guilabel>
+ dialog (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ ). For related reports see the examples like <guilabel>Tax Schedule Report and TXF
+ Export</guilabel> in (<xref linkend="report-regional"/>).
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> check-box sets an account to read-only status and prevents the
+ addition of transaction data to the account.
+ </para>
+
+ <note id="accts-placeholder">
+ <para>Setting an account to <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> will also hide that account in the pop-up
+ account list in a register. Sub-accounts to the placeholder account will still display in
+ the pop-up, however.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Hidden</guilabel> check box hides an account (and any sub-accounts) in the account
+ tree. To reset this option, you will first need to open the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Filter By...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ dialog for the account tree and check the <guilabel>Show hidden accounts</guilabel> option.
+ Doing so will allow you to select the account and reopen this dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <note id="accts-hidden">
+ <para>Hidden accounts still appear in the pop-up account list in a register. To remove an account from
+ this pop-up account list as well, check the <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> check box.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>Below these checkboxes is a pane that contains a list of <guilabel>Account Types</guilabel>. Select
+ a type from the descriptions in <xref linkend="acct-types" />.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The next pane contains an account tree to choose a <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel>. To create a
+ new account tree select <guilabel>New top level account</guilabel>.
+ <note>
+ <para>The available choices in the <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> pane depends on the selected account
+ in the <guilabel>Parent Account</guilabel> pane. For example if the <guilabel>Parent
+ Account</guilabel> is <emphasis>Assets</emphasis> you will see only
+ <emphasis>Equity</emphasis> in the <guilabel>Account Type</guilabel> pane. This is to
+ help maintain a proper account structure for the Chart of Accounts.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="Online-price-setup">
+ <title>Steps to enable Online price updating</title>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>&app; relies on an external tool to retrieve online quotes. This tool is a Perl module named
+ <quote>Finance::Quote</quote> and has to be installed on your computer independently
+ from &app;. The first step in enabling online price updating should thus be to ensure
+ <application>Finance::Quote</application> is properly installed.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To determine if the Perl module <application>Finance::Quote</application> is already installed on
+ your system, type <quote>perldoc Finance::Quote</quote> in a terminal window and check
+ to see if there is any documentation available. If you see the documentation, then the
+ module is installed, if you do not see the documentation, then it has not been
+ installed.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Installing <application>Finance::Quote</application> differs from one operating system to another.
+ For the various supported systems, you can follow these guidelines:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><systemitem class="osname">Linux</systemitem>: Most linux distributions (like Fedora, openSuse,
+ Mandriva, Ubuntu, and so on) have a package in their software repositories for the
+ <application>Finance::Quote</application> perl module. So in most cases, you can
+ simply use your preferred package manager (yum, apt, rpm, synaptics, yast,...) to
+ install the module. The name of the package may vary from one distribution to
+ another. It’s often called something like <quote>perl-Finance-Quote</quote>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><systemitem class="osname">Windows</systemitem>: <application>Finance::Quote</application> on
+ Windows requires perl to be installed already. If you haven’t done so, you
+ should first install ActivePerl, or more recently, Strawberry Perl.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Windows installer from the &app; home page comes with a small helper program to install
+ <application>Finance::Quote</application> for you. You can find it in the Start
+ Menu under the &app; group and is called <quote>Install Online Price
+ Retrieval</quote>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><systemitem class="osname">MacOS</systemitem>: If you have installed &app; from the installer found
+ on the &app; home page, <application>Finance::Quote</application> is already
+ installed for you.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If none of the above applies to your setup, you can try these alternative, more generic
+ instructions:
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Close any &app; applications you have running.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Locate the folder where &app; is installed by searching for <quote>gnc-fq-update</quote> (without
+ the quotes).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Change to that directory, open a root shell and run the command <command>gnc-fq-update</command>.
+ This will launch a Perl CPAN update session that will go out onto the Internet
+ and install the <application>Finance::Quote</application> module and its
+ dependencies on your system. The gnc-fq-update program is interactive,
+ however, with most systems you should be able to answer <quote>no</quote> to
+ the first question: <quote>Are you ready for manual configuration?
+ [yes]</quote> and the update will continue automatically from that point.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>After installation is complete, you should run the <quote>gnc-fq-check</quote> test program, in the
+ same directory, distributed with &app; to test if
+ <application>Finance::Quote</application> is installed and working properly.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you feel uncomfortable about performing any of these steps, please either email the &app;-user
+ mailing list (<email>gnucash-user at gnucash.org</email>) for help or come to the &app;
+ IRC channel on irc.gnome.org. More information is available on the &app; Wiki FAQ
+ for example <ulink url="&url-wiki-faq-quot;" /> You can also leave out this step and
+ manually update your stock prices.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Create the Account for the mutual fund or stock with it listed in the
+ <guilabel>Security/Currency</guilabel> field, as described above.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>When creating these accounts it is a good time to create income accounts to track dividends, capital
+ gains (long and short) and expense account(s) for tracking commissions and losses
+ (if you track losses as expenses).
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Create the mutual fund or stock with either the <guilabel>Security Editor</guilabel> for existing
+ stock/funds or the <guilabel>New Security/Currency</guilabel> dialog for a new
+ stock/fund.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Select <guilabel>Get Online Quotes</guilabel>, <guilabel>Type of Quote Source</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Timezone.</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Online currency quotes require that the check-box for Online quotes and the timezone be selected in
+ the Security screen and the Security Editor check-box for "get quote" box is checked
+ for those currencies that are to be downloaded.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Get Online Quotes</guilabel> This check-box is to enable this security/fund to have quotes
+ downloaded from an online source.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Type of Quote Source</guilabel> use the radio buttons to select the type of source for the
+ Online quotes. <guilabel>Multiple:</guilabel> quote sources like
+ <quote>Europe</quote> should be used if fail-over to multiple sites are desirable.
+ <guilabel>Single:</guilabel> selections will only return information from the
+ specified source.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>After selecting the type of source for price quotes, select a quote source from the pull-down menu.
+ For details on currently supported sources see <xref linkend="fq-sources"></xref>.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Note that Yahoo will provide price quotes for many mutual funds including Fidelity, T.Rowe Price and
+ Vanguard, and that the quoted prices at Yahoo should be identical to those that
+ may be found at the source sites.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>If you are outside the US and use one of the different Yahoo sources or multiple sources containing
+ Yahoo, you should append the market code for the security such as PA for Paris, BE
+ for Berlin, etc. Example: 12150.PA (a Peugeot security in the Paris market).
+ <xref linkend="gnc-tbl-fq-yahoo-exchange-codes"></xref> below lists suffixes for
+ various markets around the world.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Pseudo-symbols for TIAA-CREF funds are listed in table <xref linkend="PsSymbs-TIAA-CREF"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Timezone for these quotes:</guilabel> Select the timezone for the source of the online
+ quotes you are receiving. For example, Yahoo normally quotes Eastern timezone, so
+ choose America/New York if you use that quote source.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select a commodity to the Price Editor.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select <guibutton>Get Quotes</guibutton> in the Price Editor.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Check the latest price for the selected security.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>If you wish to update price quotes from the command line, you can do so by the following command:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><userinput>gnucash --add-price-quotes <gnucash-file-name></userinput>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The command <userinput>gnucash --add-price-quotes <gnucash-file-name></userinput> can be used
+ to fetch the current prices of your stocks. The file specified
+ <quote><gnucash-file-name></quote> will depend on the name and location of your data
+ file. This can be determined by the name displayed in the top frame of the &app; window,
+ before the <quote>-</quote>. The file name can also be found under <guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ in the list of recently opened file; the first item, numbered 1, is the name of the
+ currently open file.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This can be automated in Mac OSX by creating a crontab entry. For example, to update your file every
+ Friday evening (18:00) after markets close (modify the time accordingly for your time
+ zone), you could add the following to your personal crontab:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><userinput>0 18 * * 5 /path/to/gnucash --add-price-quotes /path/to/gnucash-filename > /dev/null
+ 2>&1'</userinput>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>For Linux, which needs dbus, usually started by the desktop manager, to communicate with dconf or
+ gconf:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><userinput>0 18 * * 5 env `dbus-launch` sh -c 'trap "kill $DBUS_SESSION_BUS_PID" EXIT;
+ /path/to/gnucash --add-price-quotes /path/to/gnucash-filename > /dev/null
+ 2>&1'</userinput>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Remember that Mutual Fund <quote>prices</quote> are really <quote>Net Asset Value</quote> and
+ require several hours after the exchange closes before being available. If NAVs are
+ downloaded before the current days NAVs are determined, yesterday’s NAVs are
+ retrieved.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="open-balance">
+ <title>Opening Balance tab</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> tab is visible only when creating a new account, and is
+ disabled for <guilabel>Stock</guilabel> and<guilabel> Mutual Fund </guilabel>accounts. In
+ the latter case, opening balances must be created by hand. Please see Section 8.5.1 in the
+ <emphasis role="italic">Tutorial and Concepts Guide</emphasis> for instructions if you need
+ to create an opening balance in a <guilabel>Stock</guilabel> or <guilabel>Mutual
+ Fund</guilabel> account. It is used to record the beginning balance for an account. This
+ allows it to be used for two different scenarios. If using &app; for the first time to
+ record transactions, it can be used as a beginning balance. If the accounts in use are
+ closed at the end of a period and new accounts are created, it is used to close and carry
+ balances forward.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are three panes in this tab. The top pane contains the <guilabel>Balance
+ Information</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Balance:</guilabel> The balance to start the account with.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date:</guilabel> The date the opening balance should be recorded.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next pane is the <guilabel>Transfer Type</guilabel> pane.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use Opening Balances Equity account:</guilabel> This transfers the opening balance for the
+ account from a standard Equity account called Opening Balances.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Select Transfer Account:</guilabel> This enables the pane below so a different account can
+ be used to transfer the opening balance.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The last pane is the <guilabel>Transfer Account</guilabel> pane. Select the account to use for
+ opening balances from the list of accounts in this pane.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="acct-edit">
+ <title>Editing an Account</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> dialog consists of just the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab.
+ This tab has the same information that was described in <xref linkend="acct-create"></xref>.
+ To access the <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> dialog go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Edit Account</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ (menu shortcut
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>E</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ ) or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> icon in the Account
+ Tree Window.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="chart-renumber">
+ <title>Renumbering Subaccounts</title>
+
+ <para>Use <guilabel>Renumber Subaccounts</guilabel> to rewrite the account codes for all children of the
+ current account. For example, you have the following account structure:
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="table-renumber1">
+ <title>Starting account numbers.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Code
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Colors
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Red
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Orange
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Yellow.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Blue
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Violet
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <para>You now need to add the <quote>Green</quote> account, but you want it to sort between the Yellow and
+ Blue accounts. Instead of having to manually renumber all the accounts starting with Blue, you
+ can use the <guilabel>Renumber subaccount</guilabel> command on the Colors account. In the
+ pop-up dialog the prefix value should default to <quote>10</quote>, the account code for the
+ colors account. If you set an interval value of <quote>5</quote> and click
+ <guilabel>Renumber</guilabel> you will end up with the following account structure:
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="table-renumber2">
+ <title>Renumbered account numbers</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Code
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Colors
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-05
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Red
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-10
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Orange
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-15
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Yellow.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-20
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Blue
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-25
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Violet
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <para>Now you have room in the account code numbering space to add the Green account with an account code
+ to force the proper ordering.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="table-renumber3">
+ <title>Final account numbers.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Code
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Colors
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-05
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Red
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-10
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Orange
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-15
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Yellow.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-18
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Green
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-20
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Blue
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>10-25
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Violet
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="acct-delete">
+ <title>Deleting an Account</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+
+ <para>Deleting an Account means removing all transaction information and information about this account
+ from the file. This cannot be undone. You will be prompted to verify that you wish to remove
+ the account. If the account still contains transaction information you will be warned that
+ this account contains transactions.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A side effect of removing an account that contains transactions is that you will end up with
+ unbalanced accounts. This will be indicated in the account by a gray check-box next to the
+ debit and credit amounts. You can automatically repair these unbalanced accounts by using the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Check & Repair</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu. This will automatically assign the unbalanced amounts to a new account named
+ <emphasis role="bold">Imbalance. </emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="acct-reconcile">
+ <title>Reconciling an Account to a Statement</title>
+
+ <para>Reconciliation of Accounts in &app; with statements from a bank or other institution is a way of
+ double checking the accuracy of your (and your banks) transactions and the balance of your
+ accounts. It also is useful to track uncleared checks and other outstanding transactions.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The reconciling process in &app; involves two dialogs: the <xref linkend="tool-reconcile" /> dialog
+ followed by the <xref linkend="rec-win" /> window. They provide access to various &app;
+ functions to make it easy to enter and update account information during the reconciliation.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The Reconcile window is accessed from the account tree window or the account register window by
+ going to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reconcile...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ or using the menu shortcut
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>A</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ , <keycap>R</keycap>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Summary Bar</emphasis> at the bottom of the Account Register Window indicates the
+ amounts of <guilabel>Present</guilabel> (Balance), <guilabel>Future</guilabel> (Balance),
+ <guilabel>Cleared</guilabel> (Transactions), <guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel> (Transactions)
+ and <guilabel>Projected Minimum</guilabel>. Online account information can be used to mark
+ which transactions the bank has processed by changing the <guilabel>R</guilabel>
+ (reconciliation status) column in the register from <guilabel>n</guilabel> (new) to
+ <guilabel>c</guilabel> (cleared). The bank statement is then used with the
+ <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window to reconcile the account which changes the
+ <guilabel>R</guilabel> field to <guilabel>y</guilabel> (reconciled).
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-reconcile">
+ <title>Reconciling Information</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile Information</guilabel> dialog is used to indicate the closing
+ <guilabel>Statement Date</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel> (fixed
+ from last reconciliation) and <guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel> from the statement. The
+ <guilabel>Include Sub-accounts</guilabel> check-box is used if one or more subaccounts are
+ used to track the account you are reconciling. The <guibutton>Enter Interest
+ Payment</guibutton> button is used to add a transfer to the accounts for an interest
+ payment. If selected a dialog will be displayed to add the <xref linkend="tool-ent-int" />
+ to the account.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Enter Interest Payment</guibutton> button is shown only if you are reconciling an
+ account of <emphasis>Bank</emphasis> type.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>When you have entered all relevant data, press <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> to proceed to the
+ <xref linkend="rec-win" /> dialog or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to discard the
+ reconciliation process.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="tool-ent-int">
+ <title>Interest Payment</title>
+
+ <para>There are three panes in the <guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> dialog. At the bottom is a button
+ called <guibutton>No Auto Interest Payments for this Account</guibutton> which will cancel
+ the dialog. The top pane contains the <guilabel>Payment Information</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Amount:</guilabel> Enter the amount of the interest payment.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date:</guilabel> Select the date for the interest payment.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Num:</guilabel> Enter a number for the transaction (optional).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description:</guilabel> Enter an informational description for the transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Memo:</guilabel> Enter a note about the transaction (optional).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile Account</guilabel> pane highlights in the tree the account that the interest
+ payment will be transferred to or from.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Payment From</guilabel> pane contains a list of accounts where you can select the
+ source account.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If the payment is for a credit or loan account then usually the payment would be from an
+ <emphasis>Expense</emphasis> account. If the payment is for a checking or savings
+ account then usually this would be from an <emphasis>Income</emphasis> account.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Show Income/Expense</guibutton> check-box shows or hides the
+ <emphasis>Income</emphasis> and <emphasis>Expense</emphasis> accounts.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>Select <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to enter the interest transaction (or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
+ the payment) and return to the initial reconciliation screen.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="rec-win">
+ <title>Reconcile</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>For a detailed description of menu items and buttons on the reconcile window, see
+ <xref linkend="gui-reconcile" />.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> dialog is where the actual process of matching your statement to
+ &app; data takes place on a per transaction basis.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> dialog is composed of a <emphasis>toolbar</emphasis> and three
+ panes; <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> on the left, <guilabel>Funds out</guilabel> on the
+ right and a balance pane.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you enabled the option <guilabel>Use formal accounting labels</guilabel> in the
+ <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> section of the &app; preferences, you will see
+ <guilabel>Debits</guilabel> and <guilabel>Credits</guilabel> panes instead of
+ <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel> panes.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel> pane shows all unreconciled
+ deposits to the account. Both panes are composed of five columns.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To order the listed transactions with a preferred criteria, click on the relevant column header. To
+ reverse the selected order click a second time on the column header.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Date</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The date of the unreconciled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Num</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The number of the unreconciled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Description</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The Description of the unreconciled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Amount</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The Amount of the unreconciled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>R</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Shows a check if the transaction will be reconciled when done.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <para>To mark a transaction as reconciled just click on it and a checkmark will appear on the relevant
+ <guilabel>R</guilabel> column.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>You can check or uncheck the reconcile status of all transactions in either pane by clicking on a
+ transaction in the required pane then clicking <keycap>Ctrl-A</keycap> followed by
+ <keycap>space</keycap>. This will toggle the reconcile status of all transactions in the
+ pane to either checked or unchecked state. This procedure can be repeated to achieve the
+ desired status for the transactions in the pane.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Under each pane a <guilabel>Total</guilabel> for reconciled transactions is shown.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The balance pane shows a summary of the balances used in reconciliation.
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Statement Date</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The date on the statement set on the <xref linkend="tool-reconcile" />.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The balance at the end of the last reconciliation.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The balance entered from the statement.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Reconciled Balance</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The balance of selected transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Difference</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The difference between the <guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel> and <guilabel>Ending</guilabel> balances.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <para>The set of unreconciled transactions in the <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and <guilabel>Funds
+ Out</guilabel> panes can be changed by using the menus and <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to
+ access the account and transaction information. You can create a <guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ transaction, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> a selected transaction, add a
+ <guilabel>Balance</guilabel> transaction (of the same amount as listed under
+ <guilabel>Difference</guilabel> in the balance pane), and delete the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To modify a listed transaction, double click on it.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>By pressing the <guilabel>Open</guilabel> icon the register of the account to reconcile will be
+ opened.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If you wish to postpone the reconciliation until later use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Postpone</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item (menu shortcut
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ ) or pressing the <guibutton>Postpone</guibutton> icon. If you wish to cancel the
+ reconciliation use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Cancel</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item or press the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> icon.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>All previous commands are also available in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> dialog menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Select each unreconciled transaction matching a transaction on the statement so a green tick appears
+ in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> column. The <guilabel>Balance</guilabel> pane changes to
+ reflect each selected transaction until the <guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel>
+ <emphasis>equals</emphasis> the <guilabel>Reconciled Balance</guilabel> and the
+ <guilabel>Difference</guilabel> is <emphasis>zero</emphasis>. Once this is done select the
+ <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button or
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ (menu shortcut
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ ) to finish the reconcile process.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/help/de/Help_ch_Business.xml b/help/de/Help_ch_Business.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7adb1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/help/de/Help_ch_Business.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,2437 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter SYSTEM "gnc-docbookx.dtd">
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 2.0.0
+ Last modified: July 9th 2006
+ Maintainers:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Author:
+ Jon Lapham <lapham at extracta.com.br>
+ updated Patrick Schweiger <pks at spiffykitty.com>
+ Originally designed by Carol Champagne.
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="chapter_busnss">
+ <title>Business Features</title>
+
+ <para>&untranslated-de;
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The accounting needs of a business are quite different from that of a person. Businesses have
+ customers that owe money, vendors which are owed money, employee payroll, more complex tax laws,
+ etc. &app; offers business oriented features to facilitate these needs.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Accounts Receivable (A/R) are used by businesses to record sales for which they are not immediately
+ paid. Accounts Payable (A/P) record bills that they have received, but might not pay until
+ later. These types of accounts are used primarily when you have a lot of bills and receipts
+ flowing in and out, and do not want to lose track of them just because you do not pay or get
+ paid right away. For most home users, A/R and A/P are too complicated to be worth the effort.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Accounts Receivable (or A/R) refers to products or services provided by your company for which
+ payment has not yet been received. This is represented on the balance sheet as an asset, because
+ the expectation is that you will receive payment soon.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Accounts Payable (or A/P) refers to products or services bought by your company for which payment
+ has not yet been sent. This is represented on the balance sheet as a liability because you will
+ have to pay for them.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ar-setup1">
+ <title>Initial Setup</title>
+
+ <para>To set up &app; to handle accounts receivable and accounts payable for a company the following
+ preliminary steps must be done.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-setupacct2">
+ <title>Account Setup</title>
+
+ <para>There are many different ways to set up a business account hierarchy. You can start with the
+ Business Accounts setup which is available from the New Account Hierarchy assistant, or you
+ could build one manually. To access the prebuilt Business Accounts, start &app; and click on
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ and proceed until you see the list of available accounts, select <emphasis>Business
+ Accounts</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The prebuilt Business Account hierarchy will not meet your needs exactly. You will need to make
+ adjustments for the hierarchy to function well with your particular situation. It should
+ be close enough that it is recommended you begin with it.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+<!--
+ <para>To use &app;’s integrated accounts
+ payable system, you must first setup an account of the <emphasis>A/Payable</emphasis>
+ type. The <emphasis>A/Payable</emphasis> account is usually a sub-account
+ under Liabilities. It is within this account that the integrated A/P system
+ places transactions.</para>
+
+ <literallayout>
+ Basic A/P Account Hierarchy:
+
+ -Assets
+ -Bank
+ -Liabilities
+ -Accounts Payable
+ -Expenses
+ -AP Expenses
+ </literallayout>
+
+ <para>You need to add additional asset accounts and real expense accounts to make
+ this hierarchy useful. The important aspects of this hierarchy are that you need
+ an expense account and an Accounts Payable account, with account type set to
+ <emphasis>A/Payable</emphasis>.</para>
+-->
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-setuptaxtables">
+ <title>Tax Tables</title>
+
+ <para>Tax Tables can used to determine the tax for customer invoices (or vendor bills).
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A tax table can be assigned to an invoice line or bill line.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The default invoice line tax table can be assigned to each customer and the default bill line tax
+ table can be assigned to each vendor.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The default tax table for new customers or new vendors can be specified in the <emphasis>Book
+ Options </emphasis> window which can be accessed by
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Properties</guisubmenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Business</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ tab.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Tax Tables are maintained using the <emphasis>Sales Tax Table</emphasis> editor which is accessed
+ via menu
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sales Tax Table</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . The following fields should be entered:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Name</guilabel> This is the tax table name.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Type</guilabel> Either <guilabel>Percent %</guilabel> or <guilabel>Value $ </guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Value </guilabel>This is the percentage or value depending on <guilabel>Type</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account</guilabel> This is the account to which tax will be posted. For tax collected from
+ customers, this should probably be a Liability account as it must be payed to the
+ government. For tax paid to vendors, if tax laws allow tax paid to vendors to offset tax
+ collected from customers, this should probably also be a Liability account (even though
+ it will usually have a debit balance) so that the net tax owed to the government can be
+ easily observed.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If you set up Tax on Purchases and Tax on Sales as subaccounts of Liabilities:Tax then the net tax
+ will be rolled up and can be seen in the &app; Accounts tab.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>If unsure about tax law requirements, get professional advice. </emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-setupcname">
+ <title>Company Registration</title>
+
+ <para>After you have built the account structure and defined your tax tables, register the &app; file as
+ belonging to your company by filling in the data requested in the
+ <xref linkend="business-book-options" /> accessible from the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-setup-cntrs">
+ <title>Counters</title>
+
+ <para>Define the format and last used numbers of codes such as customer, invoice, vendor, bill, employee,
+ expense voucher, job number and order. See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss_setup_pref">
+ <title>Business Preferences</title>
+
+ <para>Set options on the Business tab of the &app; preferences, which is accessed via
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on MacOS). See <xref linkend="prefs-biz" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-setupterms">
+ <title>Billing Terms</title>
+
+ <para>Billing Terms can be used to determine the payment due date and be a guide for determining discount
+ for early payment of invoices (or vendor bills).
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>As of &app; 2.6.7, Billing terms are only partially supported. Date due is calculated but discount
+ amount is not.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Discount for early invoice payment is not implemented. There are 2 ways this may be done, although
+ neither is recommended, and professional advice should be used to confirm that regulations
+ are being complied with:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>After creating and posting a payment which pays the invoice in full, manually edit the payment
+ transaction (usually strongly discouraged) and split the payment to reduce it by the
+ amount of the discount and a create a compensating split in an income (discount)
+ account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Alternatively, after creating and posting a payment for the discounted amount, create a credit note
+ for the discount using a specific negative sales income (discount) account for the
+ transfer account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>You can specify the billing terms on each invoice/bill. Invoice billing terms will default from the
+ customer billing terms. Bill billing terms will default from the vendor billing terms.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Billing Terms are maintained using the Billing Terms Editor which is accessed via menu
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Billing Terms Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . The following fields should be entered:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Name</guilabel> The internal name of the billing term. For some examples of billing term
+ names and descriptions see <ulink url="&url-wiki-pmt-term;" />
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel> The description of the billing term, printed on invoices
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>There are 2 types of billing terms, with different information to be entered
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Type Days
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Due Days</guilabel> The invoice or bill is due to be paid within this number of days after
+ the post date
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Discount Days</guilabel> The number of days after the post date during which a discount
+ will be applied for early payment
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Discount %</guilabel> The percentage discount applied for early payment
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Type Proximo
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Due Day</guilabel> The day of the month bills are due
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Discount Day</guilabel> The last day of the month for the early payment discount
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Discount %</guilabel> The discount percentage applied if paid early
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Cutoff Day</guilabel> The cutoff day for applying bills to the next month. After the
+ cutoff, bills are applied to the following month. Negative values count
+ backwards from the end of the month.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ar-components1">
+ <title>Accounts Receivable</title>
+
+ <para>&app; has an integrated accounts receivable system.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To use &app;’s integrated accounts receivable system, you must first set up <emphasis>Accounts
+ Receivable</emphasis> accounts of type <emphasis>A/Receivable</emphasis> under
+ <emphasis>Assets</emphasis> to accrue income you're owed. It is within this account that the
+ integrated A/R system will place transactions, debiting it when you post bills and crediting
+ it when you receive payments.
+ </para>
+<literallayout>
+ Basic A/R Account Hierarchy:
+
+ -Assets
+ -Accounts Receivable
+ -Checking
+ -Income
+ -Sales
+ -Liabilities
+ -Tax
+ -Tax on Purchases
+ -Tax on Sales
+
+ </literallayout>
+ <note>
+ <para>You need to add additional asset, expense, and income accounts to this hierarchy for it to be
+ useful. The important aspects of this hierarchy are the use of an income account and the
+ <emphasis>Accounts Receivable</emphasis> asset account, with account type set to
+ <emphasis>A/Receivable</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If you deal with customers in more than one currency you will need a separate <emphasis>Accounts
+ Receivable</emphasis> account for each currency.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The transactions generated by the A/R system are recorded within the <emphasis>Accounts
+ Receivable</emphasis> account. You generally do not work directly with this account. You
+ generally work with the four integrated &app; A/R application components available through the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ sub-menu. These four components are:
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><xref linkend="busnss-ar-customers1" /></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>People or companies to whom you sell products or services on credit.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><xref linkend="busnss-ar-invoices1" /></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The physical invoice you send to a customer to request payment. This invoice contains an itemized
+ list of things you sold.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><xref linkend="busnss-ar-jobs1" /></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Is where you register Customer Jobs. Jobs are a mechanism by which you can group multiple invoices
+ to a particular customer.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><xref linkend="busnss-ar-payment1" /></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Used to register payments you received from a customer.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <para>The following sections introduce the individual components in more detail.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ar-customers1">
+ <title>Customers</title>
+
+ <para>Customers are people or companies to whom you sell goods or services. They must be registered within
+ the A/R system.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-custnew2">
+ <title>New</title>
+
+ <para>To register a new customer, enter the menu
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>New
+ Customer</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . Fill in customer information, such as Company Name, Address, Phone, Fax, etc. Below is a
+ list of the other options:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Customer Number</guilabel> - can be any number by which you would like to
+ refer to this customer. You may leave it blank and a number will be chosen
+ automatically. See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Active</guilabel> - differentiates active customers from inactive ones.
+ This is useful when you have many past customers, and you want to see only those marked
+ active.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Address - Name</guilabel> - is the contact name of the person to receive the
+ invoices.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel> - records any additional comments about the customer.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Currency</guilabel> - specifies the billing currency for this
+ customer. It will default to the default currency set in
+ <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>All invoices will be denominated in this currency and &app; will require an Accounts Receivable
+ account in this currency.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Terms</guilabel> - specifies the default billing terms for this
+ customer. Billing terms must be preregistered using
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Billing Terms Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Discount</guilabel> - gives the customer a default percentage based
+ discount at the time of invoice creation. Enter a value from 0 to 100. You can override
+ the default discount when you create an invoice.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Credit Limit</guilabel> - stores the maximum credit you are willing
+ to extend to the customer. This field is for your reference purposes only. &app; does
+ not use the value.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Tax Included</guilabel> - this specifies whether nor not tax is
+ included in invoice amounts by default. You can choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>No</guilabel>, or <guilabel>Use Global</guilabel>.
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Yes</guilabel> means that the tax is already included in amounts on invoices.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>No</guilabel> means tax is not included.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use Global</guilabel> means to use the setting made in the global preferences accessible
+ through
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Gnucash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on MacOS).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Tax Table</guilabel> - specifies a default tax table to apply to
+ invoice line items. Tax tables must be registered from the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Tax Table Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Shipping Address</guilabel> - records the customer’s shipping address if it is
+ different from the billing address. The shipping address is for your reference. &app;
+ does not use the value.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-custfind2">
+ <title>Find and Edit</title>
+
+ <para>To search for an existing customer, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Find
+ Customer</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ window. You select a customer to <guilabel>View/Edit</guilabel> from the results of the
+ search. This window is also used to look up customers when creating invoices and processing
+ payments.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If many customers match the search criteria you provide, the search can be refined by running an
+ additional search within the current results. The current result set is searched when the
+ <guilabel>Refine Current Search</guilabel> radio button is selected. In fact, &app; selects
+ this option for you after you run the initial search.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If the customer you are searching for does not match the supplied search criteria, change the search
+ criteria, click the <guilabel>New Search</guilabel> radio button and then the
+ <guilabel>Find</guilabel> button. The relevant step is the <guilabel>New Search</guilabel>
+ selection. If the customer is not in the result of the original search, and you only search
+ within this set, the customer cannot be found, regardless of new search criteria.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>To return a list of all registered active customers, set the search criterion to <guilabel>matches
+ regex</guilabel>, and place a single dot "." in the text field area. Make sure
+ <guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel> is checked, then click
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton>. The regular expression "." means to match anything.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ar-invoices1">
+ <title>Invoices</title>
+
+ <para>An invoice is the paperwork you send to a customer to request payment for products or services
+ rendered. &app; can generate and track invoices.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A credit note is the paperwork you send to a customer to correct products or services rendered that
+ were incorrectly invoiced. &app; can generate and track credit notes via the same menu entries
+ as invoices.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This section applies to both invoices and credit notes. In order to avoid repeating everything twice
+ and to keep the text easier to read it will refer only to invoices. You can apply it equally
+ to credit notes. Only where the behaviour of credit notes differs from invoices this will be
+ explicitly mentioned. Credit notes were introduced starting with &app; stable release 2.6.0.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-invoicenew2">
+ <title>New</title>
+
+ <para>To send an invoice to a customer you must first create a new invoice. To create an invoice use
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>New
+ Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . The New Invoice window must be filled in appropriately:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Invoice Information - Type</guilabel>: the type of customer document to create - either an
+ invoice or a credit note.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Invoice Information - Invoice ID</guilabel> (optional): the formated identification number
+ of this invoice. This is your internal number for this invoice. If you leave it blank,
+ an invoice number will be generated automatically. See
+ <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Invoice Information - Date Opened</guilabel>: the date this invoice was created.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Customer</guilabel>: the customer who is to receive this invoice. If
+ you remember the <emphasis>company name</emphasis> you entered in the <guilabel>New
+ Customer</guilabel> window for this customer, start to type it in this field and &app;
+ will try auto complete it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton>
+ button to access the <guilabel>Find Customer</guilabel> window described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer you are looking for with
+ a click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Job</guilabel> (optional): associates the new invoice with a
+ customer job (see <xref linkend="busnss-ar-jobs1" />). If you remember the <emphasis>job
+ name</emphasis> you entered in the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window for this job,
+ start to type it in this field and &app; will try auto complete it for you. Else, press
+ the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find Job</guilabel>
+ window. This window is the same to the one described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the job you are looking for with a
+ click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Billing ID</guilabel>: this is the customer’s PO Number or
+ other <quote>customer reference number</quote>. You should use it to identify your
+ invoices to this customer (and job, if you have one).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Terms</guilabel>: the payback terms agreement for this invoice. A
+ list of registered terms is available within the pop up menu. If you specified a default
+ value for the selected customer, this field is initialized with the default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel>: Here you can enter internal notes.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>When you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, the <guilabel>Edit Invoice</guilabel> window
+ opens.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-invoiceedit2">
+ <title>Edit</title>
+
+ <para>From the Edit Invoice window you can enter an itemized list of goods and services you sold on this
+ invoice in a manner similar to how the account register works. For credit notes you enter an
+ itemized list of goods and services you refunded instead.
+ <note>
+ <para>Saved column layout works a bit differently in invoices from the account registers: Layouts are not
+ saved for each invoice; instead a layout can be saved as a default for invoices to
+ override the calculated widths using the <guimenu>View</guimenu>><guimenuitem>Use as
+ Default Layout for Customer Documents</guimenuitem> and the calculated widths restored
+ as the default with <guimenu>View</guimenu>><guimenuitem>Reset Default Layout for
+ Customer Documents</guimenuitem>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are 15 columns in the <guilabel>Invoice Entries</guilabel> area:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date</guilabel> - The date this item was sold.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Invoiced?</guilabel> - <guilabel>X</guilabel> means the item is attached to this invoice,
+ an empty box means the item is not attached to this invoice. The item is attached for
+ you when you proceed to the next line item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel> (optional) - is what the item or service is called.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Action</guilabel> (optional) - is a user defined field. You can place Cost Center
+ information here, or use one of the 3 predefined actions, Hours, Material, or Project.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Income Account</guilabel> - selects which income account is credited with this income.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Quantity</guilabel> - tracks how many of the items you sold.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Unit Price</guilabel> - is the unit price of the item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Discount Type</guilabel> - is the type of discount:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>$</guilabel> means <guilabel>Discount</guilabel> is a monetary value
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>%</guilabel> means <guilabel>Discount</guilabel> is a percentage.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>You can click the field to toggle between the discount types.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Discount How</guilabel> - the discount can be computed as follows:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>></guilabel> means the discount applies after tax.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel><</guilabel> means the discount applies before tax.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>=</guilabel> means both discount and tax are applied to the pretax value.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>You can click the field to change the setting.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Discount</guilabel> (optional) - is the total discount, in monetary units or percentage,
+ depending on <guilabel>Discount Type</guilabel>. You can leave it blank for no discount.
+ Any default discount you specified for the customer will be automatically entered for
+ each new item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Taxable?</guilabel> - is this item taxable? <guilabel>X</guilabel> means yes, a blank
+ field means no. You can click the field to toggle the setting.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tax Included?</guilabel> - has the tax already been included in the unit price?
+ <guilabel>X</guilabel> means yes, a blank field means no. For example, if there is 1
+ item of $100 with a tax of 5% then:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If Tax Included is empty, then subtotal = $100 and tax = $5.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If Tax included is set (<guilabel>X</guilabel>), then subtotal = $95.23 and tax = $4.77. The
+ computation is: Subtotal = Total / (1+taxrate) and Tax = Total - Subtotal = Total -
+ (Total / (1+taxrate)).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tax Table</guilabel> (optional) - this is a pop up menu of all the available tax tables.
+ If you make the item taxable, then this table is used to compute the amount of tax. The
+ tax table determines tax percentages and the accounts to which tax is charged.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Subtotal</guilabel> (uneditable) - is the computed subtotal for this item (less tax).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tax</guilabel> (uneditable) - is the computed tax for this item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>When you have finished entering all the items, you can <guilabel>Post</guilabel> and print the
+ invoice.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-invoicepost2">
+ <title>Post</title>
+
+ <para>When you finish editing an invoice and are ready to print, you must <guilabel>Post</guilabel> the
+ invoice. The invoice does not have to be posted immediately. In fact, you should only post
+ an invoice when you are ready to print it. Posting an invoice places the transactions in an
+ accounts receivable account.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Post Invoice</guilabel> window appears and asks you to enter the following
+ information:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Post Date</guilabel> - specifies the date for the transactions entered into the accounts
+ receivable account. By default this is the invoice’s <guilabel>Date
+ Opened</guilabel> (see <xref linkend="busnss-ar-invoicenew2"/> for information about
+ that date).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Due Date</guilabel> - is the date on which payment for the invoice is expected.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If you specified payment terms when you created the invoice, the date is calculated according to
+ selected terms, and the entry field is insensitive.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If you did not specify payment terms, enter the expected payment due date here.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel> - is an arbitrary description. When invoice transactions are placed
+ in the accounts receivable account, this description is entered in the memo field of
+ those transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Post To Account</guilabel> - selects the accounts receivable account in which invoice
+ transactions are posted. You can select the account from a list of existing A/Receivable
+ accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Accumulate Splits</guilabel> - determines if invoice items which transfer to the same
+ account are combined into a single split for that account or entered individually. For
+ the sample invoice which sold Nails and a Hammer, the setting affects post results as
+ follows:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Checked (splits are accumulated) - a single transfer of $575.00 from the
+ <emphasis>Income:Sales</emphasis> account is recorded.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not checked - the transaction created in the A/Receivable account, shows two transfers from
+ <emphasis>Income:Sales</emphasis> account $100.00 and $475.00. The memo fields in
+ the splits indicate the sale of Nails and the Hammer (the item descriptions entered
+ on the invoice) respectively.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-invoicefind2">
+ <title>Find</title>
+
+ <para>To find an existing invoice, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Find
+ Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. From the results of the search, you can select an invoice to edit or view.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Before you can edit a posted invoice, you will need to <guilabel>Unpost</guilabel> it.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>One of the design goals in &app;’s Account Receivable system was to allow different processes
+ to get to the same state, so you can reach an invoice from different directions based on the
+ way you think about the problem:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>You can search for the customer first, then list their invoices.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>You can search for invoices by number or by company name.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>You can list invoices associated with a customer job.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-invoiceprint2">
+ <title>Print</title>
+
+ <para>After you post an invoice, you should print it and send it to your customer. To print an invoice use
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Print Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>You can modify the appearance of the invoice, IE: add a company logo, etc. To do so, see the
+ <xref
+ linkend="busnss-ar-invoicechange" />.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>Invoices can also be printed from the main window by selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu><guisubmenu>Business Reports</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Printable
+ Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ from the main menu. The resulting report window states that no valid invoice is selected. To
+ select the invoice to print:
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Use the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> button or select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ from the main menu.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab of the report options dialog.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Click the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button next to the <guilabel>Invoice Number</guilabel>
+ field.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Search for the invoice as usual.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>You can also print invoices from within the Process Payment dialog. See the
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ar-payment1" /> for instructions on how to do so.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-invoicestarting2">
+ <title>Assign Starting Invoice Number</title>
+
+ <para>By default, &app; starts with invoice number 1 and increments from there. You can manually type an
+ invoice number into the text box each time you create an invoice, but this gets tiring and
+ sooner or later leads to duplicate numbers.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>You can change the starting invoice number if it is important you. Use
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ , access the <guilabel>Counters</guilabel> tab, change the <guilabel>Invoice
+ number</guilabel> value to be one less than your desired starting invoice number and click
+ the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button or the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ar-jobs1">
+ <title>Customer Jobs</title>
+
+ <para>Customer Jobs are used to group multiple invoices and credit notes to the same customer. Use of the
+ Customer Jobs feature is optional. The feature is useful when you have multiple
+ <guilabel>jobs</guilabel> for the same customer, and would like to view all the invoices and
+ credit notes related to a single job.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To use customer jobs, you must create them using the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>New
+ Job</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. You will see the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window. The editable fields are:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Job Info - Job Number</guilabel> (optional) - enter the number for this job. If left
+ blank, a number will be chosen for you. See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for
+ more info.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Job Info - Job Name</guilabel> - the name you want to assign to the new job.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Owner Info - Customer</guilabel> - the customer for whom the job is created. If you
+ remember the <emphasis>company name</emphasis> you entered in the <guilabel>New
+ Customer</guilabel> window for this customer, start to type it in this field and &app;
+ will try auto complete it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button
+ to access the <guilabel>Find Customer</guilabel> window described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer you are looking for with a
+ click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Owner Info - Billing ID</guilabel> - the customer’s reference to this job (e.g.
+ their PO Number). This is the "Billing Identification" that they require to correlated
+ your invoices with their order. The Billing ID you enter is used to set the billing id for
+ new invoices associated with this job.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Job Active</guilabel> - toggles this job being active or not. This is useful when you have
+ many inactive jobs, since it is easier to search only among jobs that are marked active.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>To edit an existing customer job, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Find
+ Job</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. Select the desired job in the search results, and click the <guilabel>View/Edit
+ Job</guilabel> button.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To select from the invoices and credit notes associated with a given job, use
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Find
+ Job</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. Select the desired job in the search results and click the <guilabel>View
+ Invoices</guilabel> button. A window listing invoices and credit notes associated with this
+ job appears. Select an invoice or credit note and click the <guilabel>View Invoice</guilabel>
+ button to open an invoice editor in the main application window.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ar-payment1">
+ <title>Process Invoice Payment</title>
+
+ <para>Eventually, you will receive payment from your customers for outstanding invoices. To register these
+ payments, use the Process Payment application found in
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Process
+ Payment</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>There is an alternative way of assigning a payment to (one or more) invoices where the payment
+ transaction already exists, say in the case where transactions have been imported from a
+ bank. There is no way to assign a payment to an invoice during the import process, so this
+ must be done after transactions have been imported.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This can best be done starting from the asset account register holding the imported payment
+ transaction (like your bank account). In that account, select the payment, right-click
+ (control-click for Mac OS X) and choose <guilabel>Assign as payment...</guilabel>. The
+ payment window will pop-up, partly filled in with the information from the transaction. Fill
+ in the missing information like the proper customer and invoice to complete the payment.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>One caveat: the logic behind <guilabel>Assign as payment... </guilabel> won't properly detect credit
+ note reimbursements and will wrongfully interpret such a transaction as a vendor bill.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The Process Payment application consists of:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Customer</guilabel> - the customer who paid you. If you remember the
+ <emphasis>company name</emphasis> you entered in the <guilabel>New Customer</guilabel>
+ window for this customer, start to type it in this field and &app; will try auto complete
+ it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the
+ <guilabel>Find Customer</guilabel> window described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2" />. Highlight the customer you are looking for with a
+ click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Invoice</guilabel> - the invoice for which payment was received. If
+ you remember the <emphasis>invoice ID</emphasis>, start to type it in this field and &app;
+ will try auto complete it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button
+ to access the <guilabel>Find Invoice</guilabel> window described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ar-invoicefind2" />. Highlight the invoice you are looking for with
+ a click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Date</guilabel> - the date you you received payment.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Amount</guilabel> - the amount of money received.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Num</guilabel> - the check number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Memo</guilabel> - any comments about this payment.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Post To</guilabel> - the A/Receivable account to which to post this transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Transfer Account</guilabel> - the account where the money will be deposited (a checking
+ account for example).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-overpay2">
+ <title>Over Payments or Pre-Payments</title>
+
+ <para>If a customer overpays an invoice or pays for goods or services before they have been invoiced,
+ Process Payment for the total amount received. &app; will then keep track of the
+ over-payment (or pre-payment) in the A/R account and you can use the residual when paying
+ the next invoice.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-partpay2">
+ <title>Partial Payments</title>
+
+ <para>Partial payments are possible too. Select the invoice to pay. &app; will automatically suggest that
+ invoice's remaining balance as payment amount. Simply adjust that amount to what you want to
+ pay.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ar-baddebt">
+ <title>Writing Off a Bad Debt</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Please check with your accountant to ensure the following is acceptable in your region.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The usual way to do this is to process a payment for the invoice to a <emphasis>BadDebt</emphasis>
+ account. Such an account would be an expense account. However, in &app;, you can't process a
+ payment for an invoice directly to an expense account, so it takes two steps:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Pay the invoice to an asset or liability account, such as your checking account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Change the asset or liability account, in the <emphasis> non</emphasis> Accounts Receivable split of
+ the payment transaction, to the BadDebt expense account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Specifically
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Remove all transactions from the A/R account related to the invoice, except for the invoice's
+ transaction itself. This includes any payment transactions, and transactions between
+ your BadDebt and A/R account.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In case the payment has associated lot link transactions
+ <link linkend="busnss-ar-baddeb-lot">(1)</link>, remove those as well.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If all is well, your <guilabel>Process Payment</guilabel> window for this customer should list the
+ invoice the customer won't pay, and no prepayments.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Pay your invoice to an arbitrary asset or liability account. It can be your checking account. We
+ will fix that in the next step.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Open the account register for your A/R account. For this invoice there should now be one payment
+ transaction. If you are using &app; 2.6.0 - 2.6.4 there will also be one lot link
+ transaction <link linkend="busnss-ar-baddeb-lot">(1)</link>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select the payment transaction and change the transfer account to your <emphasis>BadDebt</emphasis>
+ account. Make sure to leave the transaction (eg by clicking on another transaction) to
+ save the changes.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>If all is well, your <guilabel>Process Payment</guilabel> window should still be clean: no
+ pre-payments, and the bad debt invoice gone.
+ </para>
+
+ <note id="busnss-ar-baddeb-lot">
+ <para>(1): &app; versions 2.6.0 to 2.6.4 created lot link transactions which show in the A/R account
+ register. This came with its own set of subtle issues. It is recommended to upgrade to the
+ latest (or at least 2.6.6) version, which fixes a lot of small problems. Version 2.6.5 had
+ a flaw in the logic cleaning up the lot links. Once upgraded, please run
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu> Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Check & Repair</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on your A/R and A/P accounts to clean up most of the lot link legacy. Don't forget to make
+ a backup first just in case.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Lots are used internally for relating payments to invoices. Lots themselves are invisible in the
+ account registers. To see them you need to open the lot viewer, which can be found in
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>View lots </guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ while in any A/R or A/P account register. Select a lot to see the <emphasis>Splits in
+ lot</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Lot links</emphasis> are <emphasis>transactions</emphasis> which you can see in your A/R
+ and A/P accounts. They are unusual in the sense that all their splits are in one account
+ (A/R or A/P). Each split in a lot link transaction is <emphasis>linked</emphasis> (hence
+ the name) to an invoice or payment transaction by means of a lot.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>See <ulink url="&url-wiki-bus-feat;" /> for more information.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ar-invoicechange">
+ <title>Changing the Invoice Appearance</title>
+
+ <para>The default Invoice style, as shown in <xref
+ linkend="busnss-ar-invoiceprint2" />, is fairly
+ barren. The default invoice style leaves the top part of the form blank, so you can print on
+ company letterhead paper. There are some things you can do to change invoice appearance.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Use
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ to enter your Company information in the <guilabel>Business</guilabel> tab of the
+ <guilabel>Book Options</guilabel> window. Some of the entered information is printed on the
+ right side of invoices.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To add a customized background, heading banner or logo to invoices, modify the invoice style sheets.
+ To do this, go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Style Sheets</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ and select the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button in the <guilabel>Select HTML Style
+ Sheet</guilabel> window that will appear.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Give a <guilabel>Name</guilabel> to the new style sheet (e.g. <guilabel>Custom Invoice</guilabel>)
+ and select the <guilabel>Fancy</guilabel> <guilabel>Template</guilabel>. When you click the
+ <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, the <guilabel>HTML Style Sheet Properties</guilabel> window
+ is displayed. This window presents you five sections listed in the left pane:
+ <guilabel>Colors</guilabel>, <guilabel>Fonts</guilabel>, <guilabel>General</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Images</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Tables</guilabel>. The <guilabel>Colors</guilabel>
+ section allows you to change the colors of various items of the invoice. The
+ <guilabel>Fonts</guilabel> section lets you set font type and dimensions. The
+ <guilabel>General</guilabel> section allows you to set the <guilabel>Preparer</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Prepared for</guilabel> information, and to <guilabel>Enable Links</guilabel>. The
+ <guilabel>Images</guilabel> section allows you to import graphics into the style sheet. The
+ <guilabel>Tables</guilabel> section allows you to adjust the spacing around the tables which
+ make up the invoice.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To include a company logo, banner heading and background image, use your favorite graphics
+ application such as <application>The Gimp</application> or <application>OpenOffice
+ Draw</application> to save the images in either <acronym>GIF</acronym> or
+ <acronym>PNG</acronym> format. Then import them into the style sheet using the
+ <guilabel>Images</guilabel> section described above.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The images are placed in the invoice as follows. The <guilabel>Background Tile</guilabel> is tiled
+ to become the background image, the <guilabel>Heading Banner</guilabel> goes above the
+ invoice text, and the <guilabel>Logo</guilabel> is placed in the upper left corner of the
+ invoice to the left of the Heading Banner. You will probably have to try a few different
+ sized images until you get the invoices to print nicely. Some sizing suggestions are that
+ the Logo should be 1 square cm (~0.5 inch), and the Heading Banner should be 15 cm (~6
+ inches) wide and 1 cm (~0.5 inch) tall.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>With the style sheet configured, when you print the invoice, you select the style sheet to use from
+ the <guimenu>Options</guimenu> menu.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+<!-- start of A/P -->
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ap-components1">
+ <title>Accounts Payable</title>
+
+ <para>&app; has an integrated accounts payable system. As with <emphasis>Accounts Receivable</emphasis>
+ you must have an <emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis> account set up under
+ <emphasis>Liabilities</emphasis> for each currency in which you will issue invoices. The
+ <emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis> accounts accrue the amounts you owe to others, so bills
+ credit these accounts and payments and credit memos debit these accounts. Generally you do not
+ directly work with this account but use the four integrated &app; A/P application components.
+ The A/P components are available from the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ sub-menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>These A/P components are:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Vendors</guilabel> are people or companies from which you buy products or services on
+ credit.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Bills</guilabel> represent the physical bills vendors send to request payment from you. A
+ bill contains an itemized list of things you purchased.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Jobs</guilabel> (optional) is where you register Vendor Jobs. Jobs are a mechanism by
+ which you can group multiple bills from a particular vendor.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Process Payments</guilabel> is where you register payments to a vendor to whom you owe
+ money.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The following sections introduce the individual Accounts Payable application components.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ap-vendors1">
+ <title>Vendors</title>
+
+ <para>A vendor is a company or person from whom you purchase goods or services. Vendors must be registered
+ within the A/P system.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-vendornew2">
+ <title>New</title>
+
+ <para>To register a new vendor, select the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>New
+ Vendor</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. Fill in general information about the vendor, such as Company Name, Address,
+ Phone, Fax, etc. Below is a list of the other options:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Vendor Number</guilabel> - can be any number by which you would like to
+ refer to this vendor. You may leave it blank and a number will be chosen automatically.
+ See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Active</guilabel> - differentiates active vendors from inactive ones.
+ This is useful when you have many past vendors, and you want to see only those marked
+ active.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Address - Name</guilabel> - is the contact name of the person to receive payments
+ you make.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel> - records any additional comments about the vendor. Use it to track names
+ of contact people within the vendor’s company, for example.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Currency</guilabel> - specifies the payment currency for this
+ vendor. It will default to the default currency set in <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>All Bills and Credit Notes will be denominated in this currency and &app; will require an Accounts
+ Payable account in this currency.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Terms</guilabel> - specifies the default payment terms for this
+ vendor. Payment terms must be preregistered using
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Billing Terms</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Tax Included</guilabel> - specifies if tax is included in bills from
+ this vendor. You can choose <guilabel>Yes</guilabel>, <guilabel>No</guilabel>, or
+ <guilabel>Use Global</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Yes</guilabel> means that tax is already included in amounts on bills.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>No</guilabel> means tax is not included.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use Global</guilabel> means to use the setting made in the global preferences accessible
+ through
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Gnucash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on MacOS).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Tax Table</guilabel> - specifies a default tax table to apply to
+ bills from this vendor. Tax tables must be registered using the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Tax Table</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-vendorfind2">
+ <title>Find and Edit</title>
+
+ <para>To search for an existing vendor, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Find
+ Vendor</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ window. You select a vendor to <guibutton>View/Edit</guibutton> from the results of the
+ search. This window is also used to look up a vendor when entering bills and processing
+ payments.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If many vendors match the search criteria you provide, the search can be refined by running an
+ additional search within the current results. The current result set is searched when the
+ <guilabel>Refine Current Search</guilabel> radio button is selected. In fact, &app; selects
+ this option for you after you run the initial search.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If the vendor you are searching for does not match the supplied search criteria, change the search
+ criteria, click the <guilabel>New Search</guilabel> radio button and then the
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button. The relevant step is the <guilabel>New Search</guilabel>
+ selection. If the vendor is not in the result of the original search, and you only search
+ within this set, the vendor cannot be found, regardless of new search criteria.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To return a list of all registered active vendors, set the search criterion to <guilabel>matches
+ regex</guilabel>, and place a single dot <quote>.</quote> in the text field area. Make
+ sure <guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel> is checked, then click
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton>. The regular expression <quote>.</quote> means to match
+ anything.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ap-bills1">
+ <title>Bills</title>
+
+ <para>A bill is a request for payment you receive from a vendor. &app; can track bills.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A credit note is the document you receive from a vendor to correct products or services rendered
+ that you were incorrectly charged for on a bill. &app; can generate and track credit notes via
+ the same menu entries as bills.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This section applies to both bills and credit notes. In order to avoid repeating everything twice
+ and to keep the text easier to read it will refer only to bills. You can apply it equally to
+ credit notes. Only where the behaviour of credit notes differs from bills this will be
+ explicitly mentioned.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-billnew2">
+ <title>New</title>
+
+ <para>When you receive a bill from a vendor and want to enter it into &app;, you must create a new bill.
+ To create a new bill use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>New
+ Bill</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item, and fill in the resulting window appropriately.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Bill Information - Type</guilabel> - the type of vendor document to create - either a bill
+ or a credit note.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Bill Information - Bill ID</guilabel> (optional) - the identification number of the
+ invoice as emitted by the vendor (IE: the vendor’s internal number for this
+ invoice).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Bill Information - Date Opened</guilabel> - the date the Invoice was emitted by the
+ vendor.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Vendor</guilabel> - the issuing vendor. If you remember the
+ <emphasis>company name</emphasis> you entered in the <guilabel>New Vendor</guilabel>
+ window for this vendor, start to type it in this field and &app; will try auto complete
+ it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the
+ <guilabel>Find Vendor</guilabel> window described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the vendor you are looking for with
+ a click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Job</guilabel> (optional) - associates a vendor job (see
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ap-jobs1" />) with this bill. If you remember the <emphasis>job
+ name</emphasis> you entered in the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window for this job,
+ start to type it in this field and &app; will try auto complete it for you. Else, press
+ the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the <guilabel>Find Job</guilabel>
+ window. This window is very similar to the one described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the job you are looking for with a
+ click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Billing ID</guilabel> (optional) - the vendor’s ID for the
+ bill (e.g.: their invoice #).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing Information - Terms</guilabel> - the pay back terms agreement for this bill. A
+ list of registered terms is available within the pop up menu. If you specified a default
+ value for the selected vendor, this field is initialized with the default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default Chargeback Project - Customer</guilabel> (optional) - the customer to associate
+ with this bill. This is used to charge your customer later.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default Chargeback Project - Job</guilabel> (optional) - the customer job to associate
+ with this bill.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>When you click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> the <guilabel>Edit Bill</guilabel> window opens.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-billedit2">
+ <title>Edit</title>
+
+ <para>From the Edit Bill window you can enter an itemized list of goods and services you purchased, in a
+ manner similar to how the account register works. For credit notes you enter an itemized
+ list of goods and services the vendor refunded instead.
+ <note>
+ <para>Saved column layout works a bit differently in invoices from the account registers: Layouts are not
+ saved for each invoice; instead a layout can be saved as a default for invoices to
+ override the calculated widths using the <guimenu>View</guimenu>><guimenuitem>Use as
+ Default Layout for Vendor Documents</guimenuitem> and the calculated widths restored as
+ the default with <guimenu>View</guimenu>><guimenuitem>Reset Default Layout for Vendor
+ Documents</guimenuitem>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are 12 columns in the Invoice Entries area:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date</guilabel> - The date this item was sold.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Invoiced?</guilabel> - <guilabel>X</guilabel> means the item is attached to this invoice,
+ an empty box means the item is not attached to this invoice. If the box is empty you can
+ attach the item to the invoice by first selecting the item row and then clicking in this
+ box.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel> (optional) - is what the item or service is called.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Action</guilabel> (optional) - is a user defined field. You can place Cost Center
+ information here, or use one of the 3 predefined actions, Hours, Material, or Project.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Expense Account</guilabel> - selects the expense account to charge for this item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Quantity</guilabel> - tracks how many of the items you bought.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Unit Price</guilabel> - is the unit price of the item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Taxable?</guilabel> - is this item taxable? <guilabel>X</guilabel> means yes, a blank
+ field means no. You can click the field to toggle the setting.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tax Included?</guilabel> - has the tax already been included in the unit price?
+ <guilabel>X</guilabel> means yes, a blank field means no.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tax Table</guilabel> (optional) - this is a pop up menu of all the available tax tables.
+ If the item is taxable and tax has not been included in the unit price, then this tax
+ table is used to compute the amount of tax.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Subtotal</guilabel> (uneditable) - computed subtotal for this item (less tax)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billable</guilabel> - is this item billable to the chargeback customer/job?
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>When you have finished entering all the items, <guilabel>Post</guilabel> the bill.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-billpost2">
+ <title>Post</title>
+
+ <para>When you finish editing a bill, you should <guilabel>Post</guilabel> the bill. You do not have to
+ post the bill, you can close it and return to it later. You have to post the bill
+ eventually. Posting a bill places its transactions into an accounts payable account. The
+ Post Bill window appears and asks you to enter information:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Post Date</guilabel> - specifies the date for the transactions entered into the accounts
+ payable account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Due Date</guilabel> - is the date on which payment for the bill is expected.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If you specified payment terms when you created the bill, the date is calculated according to
+ selected terms, and the entry field is insensitive.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If you did not specify payment terms, enter the expected payment due date here.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel> - is an arbitrary description. When bill transactions are placed in
+ the accounts payable account, this description is entered in the memo field of those
+ transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Post To Account</guilabel> - selects the accounts payable account in which bill
+ transactions are posted. You can select the account from a list of existing A/Payable
+ accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Accumulate Splits</guilabel> - determines if bill items which transfer to the same account
+ are combined into a single split for that account or entered individually. For the
+ sample bill for Letterhead and Envelopes, the setting affects post results as follows:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Checked (splits are accumulated) - a single transfer of $100.00 to the <emphasis>Expenses:Office
+ Supplies</emphasis> account is recorded.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not checked - the transaction created in the A/Payable account, shows two transfers to
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Office Supplies</emphasis> account $75.00 and $25.00. The memo
+ fields in the splits indicate the purchase of Letterhead and Envelopes (the item
+ descriptions entered on the bill) respectively.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-billfind2">
+ <title>Find</title>
+
+ <para>To find an existing bill, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Find
+ Bill</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. From the results of the search, you can select a bill to edit, or view.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Before you can edit a posted bill, you will need to <guilabel>Unpost</guilabel> it.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>There are other ways to access an existing bill. These are similar to accessing invoices for your
+ customers. See <xref linkend="busnss-ar-invoicefind2" /> for more information.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ap-jobs1">
+ <title>Vendor Jobs</title>
+
+ <para>Vendor Jobs are used to group multiple bills and credit notes from a single vendor. Use of the
+ vendor jobs feature is optional. The feature is useful when you have multiple
+ <guilabel>jobs</guilabel> for the same vendor, and would like to view all the bills and credit
+ notes for a single job.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To use vendor jobs, you must create them using the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>New Job</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. You will see the <guilabel>New Job</guilabel> window. The editable fields are:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Job Info - Job Number</guilabel> (optional) - enter the number for this job. If left
+ blank, a number will be chosen for you.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Job Info - Job Name</guilabel> - the name you want to assign to the new job.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Owner Info - Vendor</guilabel> - the vendor for whom the job is created.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Owner Info - Billing ID</guilabel> - the vendor’s reference to this job (e.g. their
+ PO Number).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Job Active</guilabel> - toggles this job being active or not. This is useful when you have
+ many inactive jobs, since it is easier to search only among jobs that are marked active.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>To edit an existing vendor job, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Find
+ Job</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. Select the desired job in the search results, and click the <guilabel>View/Edit
+ Job</guilabel> button.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To select from the bills and credit notes associated with a given job, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Find
+ Job</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. Select the desired job in the search results and click the <guilabel>View
+ Invoices</guilabel> button. A window listing bills and credit notes associated with this job
+ appears. Select a bill or credit note and click the <guilabel>View Invoice</guilabel> button
+ to open a bill editor in the main application window.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-ap-payment1">
+ <title>Process Bill Payment</title>
+
+ <para>Eventually, you need to pay your bills. To do so, use the Process Payment application found in
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Process
+ Payment</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>There is an alternative way of assigning a payment to (one or more) bills where the payment
+ transaction already exists, say in the case where transactions are imported from a bank.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This can best be done starting from the asset account register holding the imported payment
+ transaction (like your bank account). In that account, select the payment, right-click
+ (control-click for Mac OS X) and choose <guilabel>Assign as payment...</guilabel>. The
+ payment window will pop-up, partly filled in with the information from the transaction. Fill
+ in the missing information like the proper vendor and bill to complete the payment.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>One caveat: the logic behind <guilabel>Assign as payment... </guilabel> won't properly detect credit
+ note reimbursements and will wrongfully interpret such a transaction as a customer invoice.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The Process Payment application consists of:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Vendor</guilabel> - the vendor you wish to pay. If you remember the
+ <emphasis>company name</emphasis> you entered in the <guilabel>New Vendor</guilabel>
+ window for this vendor, start to type it in this field and &app; will try auto complete it
+ for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the
+ <guilabel>Find Vendor</guilabel> window described in
+ <xref linkend="busnss-ap-vendorfind2" />. Highlight the vendor you are looking for with a
+ click in the search results, then press the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Bill</guilabel> - the bill you wish to pay. If you remember the
+ <emphasis>bill ID</emphasis>, start to type it in this field and &app; will try auto
+ complete it for you. Else, press the <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button to access the
+ <guilabel>Find Bill</guilabel> window described in <xref linkend="busnss-ap-billfind2" />.
+ Highlight the bill you are looking for with a click in the search results, then press the
+ <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button in the search window.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Date</guilabel> - the date you wish to make the payment, normally
+ the current date.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Amount</guilabel> - the amount of money to transfer in this payment.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Num</guilabel> - the check number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Memo</guilabel> - any comments about this payment.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Post To</guilabel> - the A/Payable account to post this transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Transfer Account</guilabel> - the account from which money for the payments comes from,
+ such as a checking account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-overpay2">
+ <title>Over Payments or Pre-Payments</title>
+
+ <para>If you wish to overpay an invoice or pay for goods or services before they have been invoiced,
+ Process Payment for the total amount payed. &app; will then keep track of the over-payment
+ (or pre-payment) in the A/P account and you can use the residual in the future.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-ap-partpay2">
+ <title>Partial Payments</title>
+
+ <para>You may wish to partially pay a bill. Select the bill to pay. &app; will automatically suggest that
+ bill's remaining balance as payment amount. Simply adjust that amount to what you want to
+ pay.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="busnss-emply">
+ <title>Employees</title>
+
+ <para>&app; can help your company by tracking employees. You can register a
+ <xref linkend="busnss-emplynew" />, <xref linkend="busnss-emplyedit" /> existing employees,
+ create <xref linkend="busnss-emply-newvchr" /> and <xref linkend="busnss-emply-editvchr" />.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Expense vouchers are used to reimburse employees for authorized expenses (f.e. travel, parking, food
+ etc...). Employee credit notes are the opposite of expense vouchers.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-emplynew">
+ <title>New Employee</title>
+
+ <para>To register a new employee, select the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Employee</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>New
+ Employee</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. The <guilabel>New Employee</guilabel> window will open with two tabs:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><xref linkend="mply-tab1" />
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><xref linkend="mply-tab2" />
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <itemizedlist id="mply-tab1">
+ <title>Employee tab</title>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Employee Number</guilabel> - can be any number by which you would like to
+ refer to this employee. You may leave it blank and a number will be chosen
+ automatically. See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Username</guilabel> (Mandatory) - a unique username to identify the
+ employee.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Identification - Active</guilabel> (Optional) - differentiates active employees from
+ inactive ones. This is useful when you have many past employees, and you want to see
+ only those marked <guilabel>Active</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Address - Name</guilabel> (Mandatory) - the full name of the employee.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Address - Address</guilabel> (Mandatory) - the address of the employee.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Address - Phone, Fax, Email</guilabel> (Optional)- other optional contact
+ information for the employee.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Interface - Language</guilabel> (Optional) -
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment Information - Terms</guilabel> (Optional) - specifies the default payment terms
+ for this employee. Payment terms must be preregistered using
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Billing Terms</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing - Default Hours per Day</guilabel> (Optional) -
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing - Default Rate</guilabel> (Optional) -
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing - Currency</guilabel> - specifies the billing currency for this employee. It will
+ default to the default currency set in <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>All expense vouchers and credit notes for this employee will be denominated in this currency and
+ &app; will require an Accounts Payable account in this currency.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing - Credit Account</guilabel> (Optional) -
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <itemizedlist id="mply-tab2">
+ <title>Access Control tab</title>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Access Control List
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-emplyedit">
+ <title>Find and Edit</title>
+
+ <para>To search for an existing employee, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Employee</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Find
+ Employee...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu. You select an employee to <guibutton>View/Edit</guibutton> from the results of the
+ search. This window is also used to look up an employee when entering voucher and processing
+ payments.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If many employees match the search criteria you provide, the search can be refined by running an
+ additional search within the current results. The current result set is searched when the
+ <guilabel>Refine Current Search</guilabel> radio button is selected. In fact, &app; selects
+ this option for you after you run the initial search.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If the employee you are searching for does not match the supplied search criteria, change the search
+ criteria, click the <guilabel>New Search</guilabel> radio button and then the
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button. The relevant step is the <guilabel>New
+ Search</guilabel> selection. If the employee is not in the result of the original search,
+ and you only search within this set, the employee cannot be found, regardless of new
+ search criteria.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To return a list of all registered active employees, set the search criterion to <guilabel>matches
+ regex</guilabel>, and place a single dot <quote>.</quote> in the text field area. Make
+ sure <guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel> is checked, then click
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton>. The regular expression <quote>.</quote> means to match
+ anything.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-emply-newvchr">
+ <title>New Expense Voucher/Credit Note</title>
+
+ <para>To register a new expense voucher/ Credit Note, select the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Employee</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>New Expense
+ Voucher...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. The <guilabel>New Expense Voucher</guilabel> window will open. You can enter the
+ following data:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Type</guilabel> (Optional) - select if you are entering a Voucher or
+ a credit note.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Voucher ID</guilabel> (Optional) - can be any number by which you
+ would like to refer to this voucher. You may leave it blank and a number will be chosen
+ automatically. See <xref linkend="counters-book-options" /> for more info.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Voucher information - Date opened</guilabel> - the date of the voucher. Click on the
+ button on the right of the date to open a calendar.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing information - Employee</guilabel> (Mandatory) - the employee to which the voucher
+ refers.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The field supports auto-completion so if you start typing &app; will try to complete the text
+ automatically using existing employees name. You can also press the button
+ <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-emplyedit">Find
+ Employee</link> window.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing information - Billing ID</guilabel> (Optional) - the identification number of the
+ document (f.e. the bill number for a dinner).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billing information - Terms</guilabel> (Optional) - the pay back terms agreement for this
+ bill. A list of registered terms is available within the pop up menu.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default chargeback project - Customer</guilabel> (Optional) - the Customer to which the
+ voucher refers.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The field supports auto-completion so if you start typing &app; will try to complete the text
+ automatically using an existing Customer name. You can also press the button
+ <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2">Find
+ Customer</link> window.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default chargeback project - Job</guilabel> (Optional) - the Customer Job to which the
+ voucher refers.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>you can type in this field only if there are one or more jobs registered in &app; belonging to the
+ selected Customer.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The field supports auto-completion so if you start typing &app; will try to complete the text
+ automatically using an existing Customer name. You can also press the button
+ <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> to open the <link linkend="busnss-ar-custfind2">Find
+ Customer</link> window.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel> - records any additional comments about the voucher/credit note.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-emply-editvchr">
+ <title>Find Expense Voucher/Credit Note</title>
+
+ <para>To search for an existing Expense Voucher, use the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Employee</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Find Expense
+ Voucher...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. You select an Expense Voucher to <guibutton>View/Edit</guibutton> from the
+ results of the search. This window is also used to look up an expense voucher when entering
+ vouchers and processing payments.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If many expense vouchers match the search criteria you provide, the search can be refined by running
+ an additional search within the current results. The current result set is searched when the
+ <guilabel>Refine Current Search</guilabel> radio button is selected. In fact, &app; selects
+ this option for you after you run the initial search.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If the expense voucher you are searching for does not match the supplied search criteria, change the
+ search criteria, click the <guilabel>New Search</guilabel> radio button and then the
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button. The relevant step is the <guilabel>New
+ Search</guilabel> selection. If the expense voucher is not in the result of the original
+ search, and you only search within this set, the voucher cannot be found, regardless of
+ new search criteria.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To return a list of all expense vouchers, set the search criterion to <guilabel>matches
+ regex</guilabel>, and place a single dot <quote>.</quote> in the text field area. Make
+ sure <guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel> is checked, then click
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton>. The regular expression <quote>.</quote> means to match
+ anything.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="busnss-emply-editvchr2">
+ <title>Edit</title>
+
+ <para>From the Edit Expense Voucher window you can enter an itemized list of goods and services the
+ employee bought or performed for the job, in a manner similar to how the account register
+ works. For credit notes you enter an itemized list of goods and services charged back to the
+ employee instead.
+ <note>
+ <para>Saved column layout works a bit differently in invoices from the account registers: Layouts are not
+ saved for each invoice; instead a layout can be saved as a default for invoices to
+ override the calculated widths using the <guimenu>View</guimenu>><guimenuitem>Use as
+ Default Layout for Employee Documents</guimenuitem> and the calculated widths restored
+ as the default with <guimenu>View</guimenu>><guimenuitem>Reset Default Layout for
+ Employee Documents</guimenuitem>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are 10 columns in the Entries area:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date</guilabel> - The date this item was sold.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Invoiced?</guilabel> - <guilabel>X</guilabel> means the item is attached to this invoice,
+ an empty box means the item is not attached to this invoice. If the box is empty you can
+ attach the item to the invoice by first selecting the item row and then clicking in this
+ box.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel> (optional) - is what the item or service is called.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Action</guilabel> (optional) - is a user defined field. You can place Cost Center
+ information here, or use one of the 3 predefined actions, Hours, Material, or Project.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Expense Account</guilabel> - selects the expense account to charge for this item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Quantity</guilabel> - tracks how many of the items you bought.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Unit Price</guilabel> - is the unit price of the item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Subtotal</guilabel> (uneditable) - computed subtotal for this item (less tax)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Billable</guilabel> - is this item billable to the chargeback customer/job?
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payment</guilabel> - How the employee was reimbursed. You might enter a check or petty
+ cash voucher number here.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>When you have finished entering all the items, <guilabel>Post</guilabel> the voucher.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/help/de/Help_ch_Customize.xml b/help/de/Help_ch_Customize.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44e1d4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/help/de/Help_ch_Customize.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,2904 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter SYSTEM "gnc-docbookx.dtd">
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 2.0.1
+ Last modified: February 13th 2014
+ modified: January 16th 2013
+ modified: September 26th 2010
+ modified: December 7th 2009
+ modified: August 2nd 2008
+ modified: March 21th 2007
+ modified: August 2nd 2006
+ modified: July 9th 2006
+ modified: February 28th 2005
+ Maintainers:
+ Alex Aycinena <alex.aycinena at gmail.com>
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
+ Author:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="custom-gnucash"
+ xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude">
+ <title>Customizing &app;</title>
+
+ <para>&untranslated-de;
+ </para>
+
+ <sect1 id="account-options">
+ <title>Account Display Options</title>
+
+ <para>The
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Filter By ...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ is used to set or modify the view of the account tree window. The
+ <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab of this form allows the selection of the types of accounts
+ to display. These selections effect the view on each specific open window of the account tree.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Other</guilabel> tab allows enabling/disabling of the options; Show Hidden accounts,
+ Show zero total accounts.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The account tree window, by default, only shows the quantity of each commodity that you own, under
+ the column heading <guilabel>Total</guilabel>. Often, however, you may want to display other
+ values. This is easily accomplished by clicking on the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button
+ (the small down pointing arrow on the right side of the main account window
+ <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>), and selecting the option(s) to display. These selections set
+ the view on all open windows of the account tree.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="set-prefs">
+ <title>Setting Preferences</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> window allows you to customize your &app; session by
+ setting several options. From the &app; menu select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on MacOS). The <guilabel>&appname; Preferences</guilabel> window will open. Using the tabs on
+ the left make your desired changes. The settings in this dialog are set per user and not
+ stored with the file. This is in contrast to the settings described in
+ <xref linkend="book-options"/>, which are kept with, and are part of, the file (or Book), and
+ as such are common to all users. So <guilabel>&appname; Preferences</guilabel> settings are
+ individual to each user who uses a given file and any changes made by one user will not affect
+ other users of that file. Also, a given user's preferences will be common to all files that
+ that user opens with &app;.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Pausing the cursor for a couple of seconds over options in these windows will display a tooltip with
+ in-depth information on the choice.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The changes you make will be applied at once.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>To close the <guilabel>&appname; Preferences</guilabel> window press the
+ <guibutton>Close</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Each tab in the <guilabel>&appname; Preferences</guilabel> window is discussed in its own section
+ below. For a listing of the tabs, see <xref linkend="custom-gnucash"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The presentation of the sections that follows matches the order of the tabs, which are sorted
+ alphabetically by name, in English. The order of the tabs may be different in other
+ languages.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-accounting-period">
+ <title>Accounting Period</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-acct-period-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel>Accounting Period</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_Accounting-Period">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_AccntPeriod.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_AccntPeriod.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Accounting Period tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Start Date:</guilabel> This item sets the accounting period’s start date.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Relative:</guilabel> Use the specified relative starting date for profit/loss
+ calculations. Also use this date for net assets calculations. Relative defines start
+ by today or start of current/previous year, quarter, month.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Absolute:</guilabel> Use the specified absolute starting date for profit/loss
+ calculations. Also use this date for net assets calculations.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>End Date:</guilabel> This item sets the accounting period’s end date.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Relative:</guilabel> Use the specified relative ending date for profit/loss calculations.
+ Also use this date for net assets calculations.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Absolute:</guilabel> Use the specified absolute ending date for profit/loss calculations.
+ Also use this date for net assets calculations.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Summarybar content</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Include grand total:</guilabel> If checked, show in the <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> a
+ grand total of all accounts converted to the default currency.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Include non-currency totals:</guilabel> if this option is selected, &app; will include in
+ the <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> a total for non-currency items (for instance
+ number of shares).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-accounts">
+ <title>Accounts</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-acct-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Accounts</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_Accounts">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Accnts.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Accnts.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Accounts tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Separator Character:</guilabel> The account separator is the character that separates a
+ parent account from its sub-account, for example Utilities:Electric. The default is a
+ <keycap>:</keycap> (Colon), but you can also select <keycap>/</keycap> (Slash),
+ <keycap>\</keycap> (Backslash), <keycap>-</keycap> (Dash) or <keycap>.</keycap>
+ (Period), or any Unicode character that isn’t a letter or a number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reverse Balanced accounts:</guilabel> This option lets you determine whether account
+ balances will display as positive or negative numbers:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Income & Expense</guilabel> assigns a positive credit balance to income account
+ balances and a negative debit balance to expense account balances. See
+ <xref linkend="acct-types"></xref> for more information on these account types.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Credit accounts</guilabel> (default) displays a positive balance for account types that
+ would normally carry a credit balance (income, credit, liability, equity). See
+ <xref linkend="acct-types"></xref> for more information on these account types.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>None</guilabel> shows all credit balances as negative and all debit balances as positive.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Labels:</guilabel> Select this option if you want column headings in the register to refer
+ to <guilabel>debits</guilabel> and <guilabel>credits</guilabel> instead of the default
+ informal headings such as <guilabel>withdrawal</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>deposit</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default Currency:</guilabel> This item determines which currency will be selected by
+ default when creating new accounts.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Locale:</guilabel> Use the system locale currency for all newly created accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Choose:</guilabel> specify the currency to use, independent of your system settings.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Color:</guilabel> This option lets you manage the display of the account color set
+ in the <guilabel>Edit Account</guilabel> window:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show the Account Colors as background:</guilabel> show the accounts color as account name
+ background in the Accounts Page.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show the Account Colors on tabs:</guilabel> show the accounts color as background in the
+ account register tabs.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-biz">
+ <title>Business</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-biz-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Business</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_Business">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Business.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Business.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Business tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>General</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable extra buttons:</guilabel> If checked, extra toolbar buttons for common business
+ functions are shown.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Open in new window:</guilabel> If checked, each invoice will be opened in its own top
+ level window. If clear, the invoice will be opened in the current window.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Accumulate splits on post:</guilabel> Whether multiple entries in an invoice which
+ transfer to the same account should be accumulated into a single split by default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Invoices</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Report for printing:</guilabel> Allows to select the invoice report to be used for
+ printing.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tax Included:</guilabel> Whether tax is included by default in entries on invoices. This
+ setting is inherited by new customers and vendors.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Auto pay on posting:</guilabel> If enabled, at post time automatically attempt to pay
+ customer documents with outstanding pre-payments and counter documents.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Counter documents are documents with opposite sign. For example for an invoice, customer credit
+ notes and negative invoices are considered counter documents.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The pre-payments and documents obviously have to be against the same customer.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Bills</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notify when due:</guilabel> Lets you set whether you want to be notified at &app; startup
+ of when a bill is soon to be due.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Days in advance:</guilabel> How many days before the due date to warn about bills coming
+ due.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tax Included:</guilabel> Whether tax is included by default in entries on bills. This
+ setting is inherited by new customers and vendors.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Process payments on posting:</guilabel> If enabled, at post time automatically attempt to
+ pay vendor documents with outstanding pre-payments and counter documents.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Counter documents are documents with opposite sign. For example for a bill, vendor credit notes and
+ negative bills are considered counter documents.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The pre-payments and documents obviously have to be against the same vendor.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-date-time">
+ <title>Date/Time</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-date-time-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Date/Time</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_DateTime">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_DateTime.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_DateTime.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Date/Time tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Time Format</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use 24-hour clock:</guilabel> Lets you specify if you want to use 24 or 12 hours time
+ format. That is if 11 o’clock at night should be represented as 11PM or 23:00.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date Format:</guilabel> This option controls the appearance of the date (you can see a
+ preview of the date beside each of the choices). The available choices are:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>US:</guilabel> Use the date format common in the United States.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>UK:</guilabel> Use the date format common in the United Kingdom.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Europe:</guilabel> Use the date format common in continental Europe.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>ISO:</guilabel> Use the date format specified by the ISO-8601 standard.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Locale:</guilabel> Use the date format specified by the system locale.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date completion:</guilabel> This option lets you manage the case when a date is entered
+ without a year:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>In the current calendar year:</guilabel> Dates will be completed so that they are within
+ the current calendar year.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>In a sliding 12-month window starting a configurable number of months before the current
+ month:</guilabel> (Default) Dates will be completed so that they are close to the
+ current date. You can enter the maximum number of months to go backwards in time
+ when completing dates in a range of 0…11 with 6 as default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-general">
+ <title>General</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-general-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> General</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_General">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_General.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_General.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The General tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>General</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Display "Tip of the Day" dialog:</guilabel> This option displays or hides the
+ <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel> screen when &app; is started.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show splash screen:</guilabel> With this option you can enable or disable the
+ visualization of the startup screen while &app; is starting up.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Perform account list setup on new file:</guilabel> This option turns off the display of
+ the <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant when the entry
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ is selected from the &app; menu.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Set book option on new files to use split "action" field for "Num" field on
+ registers/reports:</guilabel> If selected, the displayed setting on the
+ <guilabel>New Book Options</guilabel> dialog for the <guilabel>Use Split Action
+ Field for Number</guilabel> setting will be selected and, if saved, the book option
+ for the new file will be set so that the "Num" field on registers shows/updates the
+ split-action field and the transaction-num field is shown on the second line in
+ double line mode (and is not visible in single line mode). Otherwise, the displayed
+ setting on the dialog will not be selected and, if saved, the book option for the
+ new file will be set so that the "Num" field on registers shows/updates the
+ transaction-num field. See the discussion in
+ <xref
+ linkend="book-options"/> about how to set book options including
+ the option for <xref linkend="num-action-book-option"/>. Regardless of the setting
+ of this preference, the user can modify the initially displayed setting for this
+ option on the <guilabel>New Book Options</guilabel> dialog before saving the
+ options.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If the <guilabel>New Book Options</guilabel> dialog appears in situations where a new book is being
+ set up, the settings from this preference will determine the default setting for the
+ corresponding check box on the dialog. However, the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button
+ on the <guilabel>New Book Options</guilabel> dialog must be pressed for the setting to
+ be made for the new book; otherwise it will default to <emphasis>not
+ selected</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Numbers</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Display negative amounts in red:</guilabel> If you turn off this option, &app; will
+ display negative numbers in black.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Automatic Decimal Point:</guilabel> This option will automatically insert a decimal point
+ into numbers you type in.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>When a calculation is entered in the <guilabel>Amount</guilabel> field, the decimal sign is inserted
+ into <emphasis>every</emphasis> operand that omits a decimal separator.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Decimal Places:</guilabel> This field allows you to set the number of decimal places to be
+ used.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Files</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The following options are only relevant for files saved in <acronym>XML</acronym> format.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Compress files:</guilabel> This option determines whether the &app; data file will be
+ compressed or not.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show auto-save confirmation question:</guilabel> If this option is enabled, &app; will
+ show you a confirmation screen each time the auto-save process is started.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Auto-save time interval:</guilabel> This field sets the number of minutes between each
+ automatic saving of the file. Set to 0 to disable the auto-save feature.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable timout on "Save changes on closing" question:</guilabel> If enabled, the
+ <guilabel>Save changes on closing</guilabel> question will only wait a limited
+ number of seconds for an answer. If the user didn’t answer within that time,
+ the changes will be saved automatically and the question window closed. You can set
+ the number of seconds in the <guilabel>Time to wait for answer</guilabel> field.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Retain log files:</guilabel> In this section you can set your preferences about the log
+ files using the provided radio buttons.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Never:</guilabel> Disable the creation of log files.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>For:</guilabel> Enter a specific number of days for which keep the files.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Forever:</guilabel> Disable the auto deletion of log files; retains the log files forever.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Search Dialog</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>New search limit:</guilabel> Defaults to "new search" if fewer than this number of items
+ is returned.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-online">
+ <title>Online Banking</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-online-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Online Banking</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_OnlineBanking">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_OnlineBanking.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_OnlineBanking.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Online Banking tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>QIF Import</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show documentation:</guilabel> The first time you use the QIF importer you may notice that
+ the importer has detailed instructions on how to import a file. Once you have become
+ familiar with using the importer, you might want to turn off this option. Turning
+ off the option gives you less detail in the importer screens.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default transaction status (overridden by the status given by the QIF file):</guilabel> In
+ this section you can set the default status for imported transactions using the
+ provided self-explainingradio buttons:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Not cleared</guilabel> (Default)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Cleared</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Generic Importer</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable skip transaction action:</guilabel> Enable the SKIP action in the transaction
+ matcher. If enabled, a transaction whose best match’s score is in the yellow
+ zone (above the Auto-ADD threshold but below the Auto-CLEAR threshold) will be
+ skipped by default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable update match action:</guilabel> Enable the UPDATE AND RECONCILE action in the
+ transaction matcher. If enabled, a transaction whose best match’s score is
+ above the Auto-CLEAR threshold and has a different date or amount than the matching
+ existing transaction will cause the existing transaction to be updated and cleared
+ by default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use Bayesian matching:</guilabel> Use Bayesian algorithms to match new transactions with
+ existing accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Match display threshold:</guilabel> The minimal score a potential match must have to be
+ displayed in the match list.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Auto-add threshold:</guilabel> A transaction whose best match’s score is in the red
+ zone (above display threshold, but below or equal to Auto-add threshold) will be
+ added by default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Auto-clear threshold:</guilabel> A transaction whose best match’s score is in the
+ green zone (above or equal to Auto-clear threshold) will be cleared by default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Commercial ATM fees threshold:</guilabel> In some places commercial ATMs (not belonging to
+ a financial institution) are installed in places like convenience stores. These ATMs
+ add their fee directly to the amount instead of showing up as a separate transaction
+ or in your monthly banking fees. For example, you withdraw $100, and you are charged
+ $101.50 plus Interac fees. If you manually entered that $100, the amounts
+ won’t match. You should set this to whatever is the maximum such fee in your
+ area (in units of your local currency), so the transaction will be recognized as a
+ match by &app;.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Automatically create new commodities:</guilabel> Enables the automatic creation of new
+ commodities if any unknown commodity is encountered during import. If not enabled,
+ the user will be asked what to do with each unknown commodity.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This section is shown only if &app; is compiled with Aqbanking and <acronym>HBCI</acronym> support.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Close log window when finished:</guilabel> Close the log window when the operation is
+ completed.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Remember PIN:</guilabel> Enable this option if you want &app; to remember the PIN you
+ enter for online banking authentication.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Verbose debug messages:</guilabel> Enable this option if you want &app; to show more
+ information about the online banking operations.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-online-quotes">
+ <title>Online Quotes</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-quotes-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Online Quotes</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer-online-quotes">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Quotes.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Quotes.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Online Quotes tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Online Quotes</guilabel> tab allows you to set options that affect the fetching of
+ online quotes with the <acronym>perl</acronym> module
+ <application>Finance::Quote</application>.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Alpha Vantage API key:</guilabel> To retrieve online quotes from Alphavantage, this key
+ needs to be set. A key can be retrieved from the <ulink url="&url-av;">Alpha Vantage
+ website</ulink>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <title>See also:</title>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><xref linkend="fq-sources"/>,
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+<!-- TODO: create link to id="currency_howto_Auto" -->
+ <para><quote>Automatic Updating Exchange Rates</quote> in the guide.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-printing">
+ <title>Printing</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-printing-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Printing</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_Printing">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Printing.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Printing.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Printing tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Printing</guilabel> tab allows you to set some options that affect the printing of
+ checks on paper.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Print date format:</guilabel> Enable this option if you want to print on the check, below
+ the actual date, its format in 8 point type.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Print blocking chars:</guilabel> Enable this option to print a series of three asterisks
+ before and after each text field in the check.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default font:</guilabel> Click the button on the left to open a <guilabel>Pick a
+ Font</guilabel> screen in which you can customize the font that will be used to print
+ checks.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-reg">
+ <title>Register</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-reg-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Register</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_Register">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Register.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Register.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Register tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Actions</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>'Enter' moves to blank transaction:</guilabel> If selected, move the cursor to the blank
+ transaction at the end of the register after the user presses the
+ <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key. Otherwise the cursor will be moved down
+ one row.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Auto-raise lists:</guilabel> If selected, all lists will automatically be expanded when
+ input focus is in the list field.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tab order includes Transfer on Memorized Transaction:</guilabel> If selected, when the
+ transaction is auto filled, pressing the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key in the register
+ the cursor’s jump will include the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reconciling</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Check cleared transactions:</guilabel> If selected, automatically check off cleared
+ transactions when reconciling.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Automatic interest transfer:</guilabel> If selected, prior to reconciling an account which
+ charges or pays interest, prompt the user to enter a transaction for the interest
+ charge or payment. Currently only enabled for Bank, Credit, Mutual, Asset,
+ Receivable, Payable, and Liability accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Automatic credit card payment:</guilabel> If selected, after reconciling a credit card
+ statement, prompt the user to enter a credit card payment.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Always reconcile to today:</guilabel> If selected, always open the reconcile screen with
+ today’s date for statement date, regardless of previous reconciliation.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Graphics</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use &appname; built-in color theme:</guilabel> If selected, the original &app; register
+ color theme will be used. Otherwise the system color theme will be applied to
+ register windows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Double mode colors alternate with transactions:</guilabel> If selected, configures the
+ register window to alternate between the primary and secondary colors with each
+ transaction, instead of each row.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Draw horizontal lines between rows:</guilabel> If selected, &app; will draw a horizontal
+ line between each row.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Draw vertical lines between columns:</guilabel> If selected, &app; will draw a vertical
+ line between the cells in each row.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-reg-def">
+ <title>Register Defaults</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-reg-def-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Register Defaults</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_RegisterDefaults">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_RegisterDefaults.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_RegisterDefaults.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Register Defaults tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Register Defaults</guilabel> tab preferences affect the behavior of the transaction
+ register windows.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default Style</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Here you can choose from 3 different styles for register windows:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Basic ledger:</guilabel> Show all transactions on one line. (Two in double line mode.)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Auto-split ledger:</guilabel> Automatically expand the current transaction to show all
+ splits. All other transactions are shown on one line. (Two in double line mode.)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Transaction journal:</guilabel> All transactions are expanded to show all splits.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Other Defaults</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Register opens in a new window:</guilabel> If selected, register will be in a separate
+ window instead of in a tab.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Double line mode:</guilabel> If selected, show two lines of information for each
+ transaction instead of one.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Only display leaf account names:</guilabel> If selected, only the name of the leaf
+ accounts will be displayed in the <guilabel>Account</guilabel> selection popup. The
+ default behavior is to display the full account name including the path in the
+ account tree.
+ </para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Enabling this option implies that you use unique leaf account names.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number of transactions:</guilabel> How many transactions to show in a register. Set to 0
+ to show all transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-reports">
+ <title>Reports</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-reports-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Reports</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_Reports">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Reports.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Reports.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Reports tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reports</guilabel> tab preferences affect the behavior of &app; reports.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Default Report Currency:</guilabel> This item determines which currency will be used by
+ default when creating reports. You can choose:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Locale:</guilabel> Use the system locale currency for all newly created reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Choose:</guilabel> Use the specified currency for all newly created reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Location</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Report opens in a new window:</guilabel> if you select this option, the reports will open
+ up in a new window, instead of in a tab.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-sched">
+ <title>Scheduled Transactions</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-sched-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_ScheduledTransactions">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Sched.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Sched.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Scheduled Transactions tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab preferences affect the behavior of &app; for
+ scheduling transactions. More information about scheduled transactions can be found in
+ <xref linkend="trans-sched"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Since Last Run Dialog</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Run when data file opened:</guilabel> If selected, the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel>
+ screen will appear when &app; opens the file.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show notification window:</guilabel> If selected, a list of scheduled and created
+ transactions will appear when &app; opens the file.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Transaction Editor Defaults</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Auto-Create new transactions:</guilabel> If selected, new scheduled transactions will
+ automatically be entered into the register. If the auto-create option is enabled,
+ you can also check <guilabel>Notify before transactions are created</guilabel> so
+ that you will be able to confirm creating the transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Create in advance:</guilabel> The default number of days in advance to create the
+ registered scheduled transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Remind in advance:</guilabel> The default number of days in advance to remind about new
+ scheduled transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="prefs-window">
+ <title>Windows</title>
+
+ <figure id="prefs-windows-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Windows</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Prefer_Windows">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Windows.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Pref_Windows.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Windows tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Window Geometry</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Save window size and position:</guilabel> If selected, next time &app; starts it will
+ re-use the window size and position configured in the last run.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tabs</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show close button on notebook tabs:</guilabel> Adds a small close icon on each tab, to
+ make it easier to close the various tabs.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Bring the most recent tab to the front:</guilabel> If selected, the newly created tab will
+ be shown over the other tabs.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Width:</guilabel> The width of tab label expressed in characters.
+ <note>
+ <para>If the text in the tab is longer than this value (the test is approximate) then the tab label will
+ have the middle cut and replaced with an ellipsis.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Tab Position</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Position the tabs at the <guilabel>Top</guilabel> (default), <guilabel>Bottom</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Left</guilabel> or <guilabel>Right</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Summary Bar Position</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Position the Summary Bar at the <guilabel>Top</guilabel> or at the <guilabel>Bottom</guilabel>
+ (default) of the &app; main window.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="book-options">
+ <title>Book Options</title>
+
+ <para>The
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item is used to set or modify choices that affect how a specific &app; file (also
+ referred to as a Book) operates. Selecting this menu item brings up the <guilabel>Book Options
+ </guilabel> dialog. This dialog also appears in situations where you are importing
+ transactions into a new book, with the title <guilabel>New Book Options</guilabel>. It is
+ automatically raised in these 'new book' situations because these settings can affect how
+ imported data are converted to &app; transactions and so should be considered and set before
+ your first import (specifically, the <xref linkend="num-action-book-option"/> setting).
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The settings in this dialog are kept with, and are part of, the file (or Book). This is in contrast
+ to the settings described in <xref linkend="set-prefs"/>, which are set per user and not
+ stored with the file. So <guilabel>Book Options</guilabel> settings are shared by all users
+ who use a given file and any changes made by one user will affect all users of that file.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Pausing the cursor for a couple of seconds over options in these tabs will display a tooltip with a
+ more detailed description of the choice.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Book Options</guilabel> dialog has five buttons that are common to all tabs. The
+ <guibutton>Reset defaults</guibutton> button takes all items on the visible tab and sets their
+ value to the default setting; it only affects the visible tab. The <guibutton>Help</guibutton>
+ button opens up a help window to this section. The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button closes
+ the dialog, making no changes to the saved settings for <guilabel>Book Options</guilabel>. The
+ <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button is initially insensitive but becomes sensitive when any
+ setting is set or changed. Selecting it saves the setting(s) for the book but keeps the
+ <guilabel>Book Options</guilabel> dialog open. Typically, the changes are reflected in the
+ affected areas of &app; as soon as the button is pressed, so it can be used to 'see' the
+ effect of a given option without having to re-open the dialog. The
+ <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button is not sensitive on the dialog if it appears during
+ transaction import (that is, 'new book') situations. The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button
+ behaves like the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button except that it immediately
+ <emphasis>closes</emphasis> the dialog, as well.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="accounts-book-options">
+ <title>Accounts Book Options Tab</title>
+
+ <figure id="book-opt-acc-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Book Options</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Accounts</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Book_Options_Accounts">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Book_Options_Accounts.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab of this dialog allows the selection of options that affect how
+ accounting registers function.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="trading-accounts-book-option">
+ <title>Use Trading Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>Check the <guilabel>Use Trading Accounts</guilabel> checkbox to have trading accounts used for
+ transactions involving more than one currency or commodity.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To avoid several problems on multiple currency accounting read Peter Selinger's
+ <ulink url="&url-selinger;accounting/tutorial.html">&tit-sel-tut;</ulink>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="read-only-days-option">
+ <title>Day Threshold for Read-Only Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>Use the <guilabel>Day Threshold for Read-Only Transactions</guilabel> spin-box to choose the number
+ of days before today, prior to which, transactions will be read-only and cannot be edited
+ anymore in the registers. This threshold is marked by a red line in the account register
+ windows. If zero, all transactions can be edited and none are read-only. This feature is
+ intended to be used to guard against accidental changes to non-current transactions.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="num-action-book-option">
+ <title>Use Split Action Field for Number</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This option is only available in &app; version 2.6 or later.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>Check the <guilabel>Use Split Action Field for Number</guilabel> checkbox to have the split action
+ field of the anchor split used for the 'Num' column in registers, reports and
+ import/export functions, where applicable, in place of the transaction number; the
+ transaction number is then shown as 'T-Num' on reports and on the second line of
+ registers. This choice has a corresponding effect on business features.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The difference between the two is that with the checkbox not selected, the same 'Num' is displayed
+ for a given transaction regardless of what register it is viewed in and with the checkbox
+ selected, a different 'Num' can be entered/displayed for a given transaction in each
+ register it is viewed in. In both cases, the 'next number logic' of the 'Num' cell is
+ based on the account of the register the transaction is entered to or viewed from but in
+ one case it fills the transaction number, in the other, it fills the split action field of
+ the anchor split. In both cases, both fields are visible and can be viewed and used as
+ free-form text in double-line mode for any value the user wants.
+ </para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Initial setup of &app;: It is expected that, after careful consideration of the consequences, this
+ option will be set when a new &app; file is created and not changed thereafter (see next
+ warning). For this reason, a preference is provided (see
+ <link
+ linkend="prefs-general">Setting Preferences - General </link>) that
+ can establish an initial default setting for new files, so that if you will have more
+ than one file, it is easier to set them all up consistently. You may wish to set up a
+ test file and experiment with the two settings to understand the differences before
+ establishing your first real &app; file.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Moving from Quicken: For users that are switching from other personal accounting applications, such
+ as Quicken, selecting this option may be more consistent with the numbering approach
+ used there and can preserve the numbering of historical data brought over; this option
+ should be set before performing the initial import.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Changing this option for an existing &app; file: If you change this option for an existing file,
+ historical data will not be changed. This means that if you set the option one way,
+ enter (or import) transactions, then change the option and enter (or import) additional
+ transactions and switch back-and-forth, you will end up with a file that will appear to
+ have inconsistent treatment of numbers in registers, reports and exports. This is
+ because the setting of this option at the time of data entry/import determines where the
+ number data is stored and the setting at the time of data display/reporting/exporting
+ determines which field is displayed as number.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There is no reason to avoid changing this option for an existing &app; file if you understand the
+ implications. If you elect to make this change, it should probably be done between
+ accounting periods with the understanding that number data prior to the date the option
+ is changed will be displayed/reported/exported differently from that after the date.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>If you change this option, and press <guibutton>Apply </guibutton> or <guibutton>OK</guibutton>,
+ open registers and labels on query and sorting dialogs will be refreshed to reflect the
+ new option immediately. But open reports need to be individually reloaded by the user to
+ have the change reflected on the report.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>This option is only available in &app; version 2.6 or later. If a &app; file from an earlier version
+ is opened in version 2.6 or later, and this feature is not used, this feature will not
+ prevent the file from being opened in the earlier version of &app;. However, if the
+ option is set, the file will not be able to be opened by the earlier version, even if
+ the option is set back to its original setting. A warning dialog will be displayed from
+ the earlier version. Do not set this option if you want to open the file with an earlier
+ version.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="budgeting-book-options">
+ <title>Budgeting Book Options Tab</title>
+
+ <figure id="book-opt-bud-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Book Options</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Budgeting</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Book_Options_Budgeting">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Book_Options_Budgeting.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Budgeting</guilabel> tab allows you to specify the budget to be used for reports when
+ none has otherwise been specified.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="business-book-options">
+ <title>Business Book Options Tab</title>
+
+ <figure id="book-opt-bus-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Book Options</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Business</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Book_Options_Business">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Book_Options_Business.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Business</guilabel> tab allows you to enter values that are in turn used by the
+ business features of &app;:
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Company Name</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The name of the company is used in many reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Company Contact Person</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The name of the contact person to print on invoices.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Company Phone, Fax, Email Address</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The references of your business.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Company Website URL</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The internet address of the company’s website.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Company ID</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The tax ID of your company.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Default Customer TaxTable</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The default taxtable applicable to your most common customers.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Default Vendor TaxTable</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The default taxtable applicable to your most common vendors.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Fancy Date Format</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The default date format used for fancy printed dates (e.g. on invoices).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guibutton>Reset Defaults</guibutton></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press the button to reset all values to their defaults.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>None of the above values is required to use &app; but, if given, will be used throughout the
+ program. (f.e. in reports, invoices etc...)
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="counters-book-options">
+ <title>Counters Book Options Tab</title>
+
+ <figure id="book-opt-count-fig">
+ <title>The <guimenuitem>Book Options</guimenuitem> window, <guilabel> Counters</guilabel> tab</title><screenshot id="Book_Options_Counters">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Book_Options_Counters.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Counters</guilabel> tab allows you to set the 'previous' value for each number
+ indicated: Bill, Customer, Employee, etc. These counters are used by the
+ <xref linkend="chapter_busnss" /> of &app;.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>number</guilabel> entered here will be incremented when the various business features
+ calculate a value for a corresponding field on a dialog. For example, if you leave the
+ Customer Number field blank on the New Customer dialog, the customer will be assigned the
+ number in the counter field plus 1. The numbers displayed in the tab are incremented as
+ these business features are used. (But note that if you have the <guilabel>Book
+ Options</guilabel> dialog open, you need to close it and re-open it to see the changes; the
+ displayed field values are not automatically refreshed.)
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The corresponding <guilabel>format</guilabel> fields are used to specify printf-style format strings
+ that are used to format the printing of the number. For example, to put the literal "C - "
+ in front of the customer number, you would put "C - %li" (without the quotes) in the
+ customer format string field. If the value in the customer number field was 5, the next
+ customer added would be assigned the number "C - 6". As another example, if you wanted the
+ number to be printed with leading zeros and 5 characters wide, you would enter "C - %05li"
+ and the next customer number would be assigned the number "C - 00006".
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>For historical reasons &app; accepts multiple format specifiers although they all yield the same end
+ result. You can choose "li", "lli" or I64i".
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="change-style">
+ <title>Changing Style Sheets</title>
+
+ <para>&app; has four default style sheets for web-page reports. These style sheets can be altered by using
+ the <acronym>HTML</acronym> Style Sheets editor. To access the editor go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Style Sheets...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Using the Style Sheet Editor you may display/modify the setting of a Style Sheet.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Changing the Style Sheet will change the appearance of all reports that have selected that Style
+ Sheet. A <guibutton>Reload</guibutton> is required to view the changes, if the report(s) are
+ currently displayed.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>To add a new Style Sheet click the <guibutton>New...</guibutton> button in the Style Sheet pane. The
+ <guilabel>New Style Sheet</guilabel> dialog will appear. Fill in the <guilabel>name</guilabel>
+ field with the name of the new Style Sheet and choose a template. To remove a Style Sheet
+ select the Style Sheet from the list and click <guibutton>Delete</guibutton>.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="style-default">
+ <title>Default Style Sheet</title>
+
+ <para>The Default Style Sheet has four tabs to alter the appearance of reports utilizing it, Colors,
+ Fonts, General and Tables.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-def-color">
+ <title>Colors Tab</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a color that will
+ be applied to alternate table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-def-fonts">
+ <title>Fonts Tab</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Titles.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Account Links.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Negative Values in Red:</guilabel> Select to have negative values displayed in red.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Text Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Centered Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Centered Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-def-general">
+ <title>General Tab</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new background color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Pixmap:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
+ picture to use as the background in reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable Links:</guilabel> Select this to enable blue hyperlinks in reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-def-tables">
+ <title>Tables Tab</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell spacing:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cells
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cell edges and contents
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table border width:</guilabel> Sets the width of the borders on tables.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="style-easy">
+ <title>Easy Style Sheet</title>
+
+ <para>The Easy Style Sheet has five tabs to alter the appearance of reports: Colors, Fonts, General,
+ Images and Tables.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-easy-colors">
+ <title>Colors</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new background color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new text color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new text cell color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new link color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color for
+ alternate table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color
+ for subheading/subtotal table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color
+ for sub-subheading/total table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color for grand
+ total rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-easy-fonts">
+ <title>Fonts</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Titles.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Account Links.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Negative Values in Red:</guilabel> Select to have negative values displayed in red.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Number Header table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Text Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Centered Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Centered Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-easy-general">
+ <title>General</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Preparer:</guilabel> Name of the person preparing the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Prepared for:</guilabel> Name of Organization or Company the report is prepared for.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show preparer info:</guilabel> Show the Preparer information in the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable Links:</guilabel> Select this to enable blue hyperlinks in reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-easy-images">
+ <title>Images</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Tile:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
+ picture to use as the background in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button
+ will clear the selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Heading Banner:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
+ picture to use as the heading in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button will
+ clear the selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Heading Alignment:</guilabel> Select from pull-down list; Left, Right, Center, to specify
+ the alignment of the banner at the top of report(s).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Logo:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a picture to use
+ as the logo in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button will clear the
+ selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-easy-tables">
+ <title>Tables</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell spacing:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cells
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cell edges and contents
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table border width:</guilabel> Sets the width of the borders on tables.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="style-footer">
+ <title>Footer Style Sheet</title>
+
+ <para>The Footer Style Sheet has the same five tabs to alter the appearance of reports as the Easy Style
+ Sheets: Colors, Fonts, General, Images and Tables.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-footer-colors">
+ <title>Colors</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new background color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new text color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new text cell color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new link color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color for
+ alternate table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color
+ for subheading/subtotal table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color
+ for sub-subheading/total table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color for grand
+ total rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-footer-fonts">
+ <title>Fonts</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Titles.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Account Links.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Negative Values in Red:</guilabel> Select to have negative values displayed in red.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Number Header table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Text Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Centered Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Centered Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-footer-general">
+ <title>General</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Preparer:</guilabel> Name of the person preparing the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Prepared for:</guilabel> Name of Organization or Company the report is prepared for.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show preparer info:</guilabel> Show the Preparer information in the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable Links:</guilabel> Select this to enable blue hyperlinks in reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Footer:</guilabel> Text to be included in report footer.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-footer-images">
+ <title>Images</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Tile:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
+ picture to use as the background in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button
+ will clear the selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Heading Banner:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
+ picture to use as the heading in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button will
+ clear the selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Heading Alignment:</guilabel> Select from pull-down list; Left, Right, Center, to specify
+ the alignment of the banner at the top of report(s).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Logo:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a picture to use
+ as the logo in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button will clear the
+ selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-footer-tables">
+ <title>Tables</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell spacing:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cells
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cell edges and contents
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table border width:</guilabel> Sets the width of the borders on tables.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="style-technicolor">
+ <title>Technicolor Style Sheet</title>
+
+ <para>The Technicolor Style Sheet has has five tabs to alter the appearance of reports: Colors, Fonts,
+ General, Images and Tables.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-tech-colors">
+ <title>Colors</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new background color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new text color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new text cell color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Link Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new link color.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Alternate Table Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color for
+ alternate table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color
+ for subheading/subtotal table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color
+ for sub-subheading/total table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Grand Total Cell Color:</guilabel> Opens the color picker to choose a new color for grand
+ total rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-tech-fonts">
+ <title>Fonts</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Titles.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Link:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Account Links.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Negative Values in Red:</guilabel> Select to have negative values displayed in red.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number Header:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Number Header table rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Text Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Text Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Number Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Number Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Total Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Centered Label Cell:</guilabel> Select the font and size for Centered Label Cells.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-tech-general">
+ <title>General</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Preparer:</guilabel> Name of the person preparing the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Prepared for:</guilabel> Name of Organization or Company the report is prepared for.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show preparer info:</guilabel> Show the Preparer information in the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Enable Links:</guilabel> Select this to enable blue hyperlinks in reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-tech-images">
+ <title>Images</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Background Tile:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
+ picture to use as the background in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button
+ will clear the selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Heading Banner:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a
+ picture to use as the heading in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button will
+ clear the selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Heading Alignment:</guilabel> Select from pull-down list; Left, Right, Center, to specify
+ the alignment of the banner at the top of report(s).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Logo:</guilabel> Use the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to select a picture to use
+ as the logo in reports. The <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button will clear the
+ selection.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="style-tech-tables">
+ <title>Tables</title>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell spacing:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cells
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table cell padding:</guilabel> Sets the space between table cell edges and cell contents
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table border width:</guilabel> Sets the width of the borders on tables.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="set-tax-options">
+ <title>Setting Tax Report Options</title>
+
+ <abstract>
+ <para>The tax report can be used to prepare online tax reports for specific countries, see
+ <xref linkend="report-regional"/>. Currently US and partial DE are supported.
+ </para>
+ </abstract>
+
+ <note>
+ <title>Localization</title>
+
+ <para>Before it can be used in other regions, one needs to provide a localized taxtable. See the
+ instructions in the <ulink url="&url-wiki-L12N-tax;">wiki</ulink>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+<!-- Translators: you can stop here to translate. After you created or got a
+ localized taxtable describe the options, which your report requires. -->
+ <para>The <guilabel>Income Tax Information</guilabel> dialog is used to set Tax Report Options. The
+ settings on accounts in this dialog are used by the <acronym>TXF</acronym> Export function in
+ reports to select the accounts for export. To access this dialog go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu><accel>E</accel>dit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Ta<accel>x</accel> Report
+ Options</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If the Income Tax features are used, it is strongly recommended that the <guilabel>Tax
+ Info</guilabel> column be made visible on the accounts tab (click large downward-pointing
+ arrow and select <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel> check box). The <guilabel>Tax Info</guilabel>
+ column will display the Form/Schedule and tax category (e.g., <guilabel>Schedule D Dividend,
+ cap gain distrib.</guilabel>) assigned to an account, if any. Alternatively, it will display
+ the following error messages which can be corrected through
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ :
+ <itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Tax-related but has no tax code
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Tax entity type not specified
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Tax type "tax_type": invalid code "code" for account type"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not tax-related; tax type "tax_type": invalid code "code" for account type
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Invalid code "code" for tax type "tax_type"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not tax-related; invalid code "code" for tax type "tax_type"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>No form: code "code", tax type "tax_type"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not tax-related; no form: code "code", tax type "tax_type"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>No description: form "form", code "code", tax type "tax_type"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not tax-related; no description: form "form", code "code", tax type "tax_type"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Not tax-related; "form"("copy") "desc" (code "code", tax type "tax_type")
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The Income Tax Identity must be set in order to assign codes to individual accounts. Click
+ <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> to set the identity. The Tax Name is optional. If entered, it will
+ be printed at the top of the report. A <guilabel>Type</guilabel> must be selected in order to
+ activate the tax category selections. The choices are:
+ <itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Individual, Joint, etc. - Files US Form 1040 Tax Return
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Partnership - Files US Form 1065 Tax Return
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Corporation - Files US Form 1120 Tax Return
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>S Corporation - Files US Form 1120S Tax Return
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>None - No Income Tax Options Provided
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>While the Income Tax Entity Type can be changed after tax categories have been assigned to accounts,
+ you should be cautioned that you will need to manually change each one if you do so, which
+ could be quite tedious. The tax categories are unique for each Income Tax Entity Type, so
+ changing the type will make all previously assigned categories invalid. It is assumed (and
+ highly recommended) that each &app; file is for only one tax entity and this is where you
+ specify its type of tax entity. You should not keep, for example, personal and partnership
+ accounts mixed in one &app; file if you plan to use the Income Tax Reporting features.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A given <acronym>TXF</acronym> code can be assigned to multiple accounts. The Tax Schedule Report
+ will combine accounts by code and generate a detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for each
+ account and a summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for the total as calculated by the report.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>For codes for which the "Payer Name Source" is not grayed, the payer on the <acronym>TXF</acronym>
+ record will be based on what is specified here, either the account name of the account or the
+ account name of the account’s parent account. This feature is typically used for
+ interest accounts or stocks or mutual funds that pay dividends where the individual payees are
+ shown on the tax schedule. For example, if the parent account’s name is the name of your
+ broker and the sub-account’s names are the names of individual stocks that pay dividends
+ and the name on the 1099-DIV received is that of the broker, in order to match that name, you
+ would select ’Parent Account’; the total dividends from the broker would be
+ exported and, if you had several brokers, there would be an amount exported and a subtotal for
+ each broker, along with each brokers name. Alternatively, if you had a parent account named
+ <emphasis>Directly Held</emphasis>, for example, and below it sub-accounts for one or more
+ stocks, you would receive a 1099-DIV from the issuer of each stock separately and, in order to
+ match that name, you would select <guilabel>Current Account</guilabel>; the total dividends
+ from each stock would be exported and, if you had several stocks, there would be an amount
+ exported and a subtotal for each stock, along with each stock’s name as the payer.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Some tax Forms/Schedules need to have multiple copies filed under some circumstances (for example,
+ Schedule C if a taxpayer and spouse have separate businesses). For tax categories on these
+ Forms/Schedules, the <guilabel>Copy Number</guilabel> is not grayed out and can be used to
+ segregate accounts by copy number.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Accounts: This pane contains the list of accounts. Select an account to set a <acronym>TXF</acronym>
+ category. If no account is selected nothing is changed. If multiple accounts are selected,
+ all of the accounts will be set to the selected item.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Tax Related: Select this check-box to add tax information to an account then select the
+ <acronym>TXF</acronym> Category below. This setting is displayed on the account edit
+ dialogue but cannot be changed from there.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>TXF Categories: Select the desired one. A detailed description appears just below (if available,
+ otherwise it says <guilabel>No help available</guilabel>), along with the
+ <acronym>TXF</acronym> code for the category and information about what line number on the
+ form or schedule the amounts are included in by tax year (used for detailed sort on
+ report).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payer Name Source: Select an option to determine where the text description that is exported along
+ with the value of the account is derived from, as described above. This is usually the
+ name of a bank, stock, or mutual fund that pays dividends or interest. Occasionally, it is
+ a description of a deduction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Copy Number: A copy number that is exported along with the value of the account. This is used to
+ segregate amounts between different copies of the same Form/Schedule that may need to be
+ filed (e.g., Schedule C(1), Schedule C(2), etc.). This is also used to sort the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <sect2 id="txf-probs">
+ <title>TXF Export - Known Anomalies and Limitations</title>
+
+ <para>TaxCut 1999
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Code: N488 "^ Sched B \ Div. income, cap gain distrib."
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Code: N286 "^ Sched B \ Dividend income"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>These two codes, from the same payer, are not correlated. The user will have to adjust for this
+ after import.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>TaxCut 1999, 2000
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Code: N521 " F1040 \ Federal estimated tax, quarterly"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Does not accept the date field and does not import the individual payment amounts, only the total.
+ The date and individual payment amounts, only matter if you have to compute the penalty.
+ (this may be a TurboTax enhancement)
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Code: N460 " W-2 \ Salary or wages, self"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Code: N506 " W-2 \ Salary or wages, spouse"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>and other related codes.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Use Copy Number to separate information from more than one job.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>TurboTax 1999, 2000
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Code: N521 " F1040 \ Federal estimated tax, quarterly"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Does not accept the dates outside of the tax year. This is a problem for the last payment that is
+ due Jan 15. &app; changes the the date of the last payment to Dec 31 for the export unless
+ the "Do not use special date processing" option is selected in the report options display
+ tab. The user will have to adjust for this after import. The date only matters if you have
+ to compute the penalty.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>TXF Tax eXport Format
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Duplicate Codes
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Codes can be assigned to multiple accounts and the amounts will be summed for all the accounts
+ generating one detail <acronym>TXF</acronym> record per account and one summary
+ <acronym>TXF</acronym> record for the sum. Codes that let you select "Payer Name Source"
+ will generate a separate summary <acronym>TXF</acronym> account with each change in payer.
+ Selecting the "Print <acronym>TXF</acronym> export parameters" option will cause the report
+ to show to which codes this applies (Payer Name Source option Y) and, for the accounts
+ assigned to those codes, the Name Source each account is set to and the
+ <acronym>TXF</acronym> item number that will be assigned to each. A summary
+ <acronym>TXF</acronym> record will be generated for each change in assigned item line
+ number. These may not be handled the same by TaxCut and TurboTax.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Code: N673 "Short/Long gain or loss"
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Short term or long term gain or loss from the sale of a security; generates <acronym>TXF</acronym>
+ output for only the date sold and sales amount, with the date acquired and cost basis
+ information left blank (to be separately added in the tax software). The code can be
+ assigned to either a short-, long-, or mixed-term gain/loss income account and the security
+ sales transaction should be entered as illustrated in Section 8.7, Selling Shares, of the
+ &app; Tutorial and Concepts Guide. The report uses the transaction split of the gain/loss
+ account to find one or more other splits in the same transaction with negative share
+ quantities. For each of these found, it generates a detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> output
+ record with the quantity sold, the name of the security, the date sold, and the sales
+ amount. Note that if, for a given transaction, more than one transaction split is to a
+ gain/loss income account assigned to code 673, <acronym>TXF</acronym> output data will be
+ erroneously repeated. That is because the report will fetch the same data, and re-output it,
+ for each transaction split set to a gain/loss income account within the same transaction.
+ For this reason, there should be no more than one gain/loss account entered per transaction
+ to use this tax reporting code properly. (Note that no amounts are used from &app;’s
+ lot-tracking; a future enhancement is expected to use this data to provide capital gain
+ reporting).
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="txf-defs">
+ <title>Detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> Category Descriptions</title>
+
+ <para>Table 32. Detailed <acronym>TXF</acronym> Category Descriptions
+ </para>
+
+ <xi:include href="Help_txf-categories.xml" />
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="reset-warning">
+ <title>Reset Warnings...</title>
+
+ <para>&app; gives warnings when certain operations are attempted, such as removing a transaction or
+ removing the splits of a transaction. The warning message gives you the option to not give you
+ these warnings when attempting the operation. Check-boxes labeled <guilabel>Remember and
+ don’t ask me again</guilabel> and <guilabel>Remember and don’t ask me again this
+ session</guilabel> allow disabling the warnings. This option permits reseting the warnings to
+ the default, IE make the warning happen. Warnings may be selectivly enabled.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="chang-lang">
+ <title>Changing the Language or Region</title>
+
+ <para>The language of the &app; user interface is not modifiable directly from the program’s
+ preferences.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The way you can change the language depends on the operating system you are running &app; on.
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Linux</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>In general you should set the <envar>LANGUAGE</envar> and <envar>LANG</envar> environment variables
+ before starting &app;. To do this you need to open a terminal and run the following
+ command:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><command>LANGUAGE=<replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> LANG=<replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable>
+ gnucash</command>
+ </para>
+
+ <para><replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> is the locale you want to run &app; with
+ (<emphasis>de_DE</emphasis> for Deutsch, <emphasis>it_IT</emphasis> for Italian etc.)
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>On some systems (e.g. Ubuntu) the encoding could be part of the locales name, like
+ <replaceable>ll_LL.UTF-8</replaceable>. You can use these names as well.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>MacOSX</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If you want to use a different translation from the one that is automatically selected, you can run
+ the following in <application>Terminal.app</application>:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><command>defaults write $(mdls -name kMDItemCFBundleIdentifier -raw /Applications/GnuCash.app)
+ AppleLanguages "(<replaceable>de</replaceable>,
+ <replaceable>en</replaceable>)"</command>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Use whatever language codes you want, replacing Deutsch and English. It won’t work if there
+ isn’t a translation file for the language you want.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If you want to unset it (that is, return to using the system settings), run this:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><command>defaults delete $(mdls -name kMDItemCFBundleIdentifier -raw
+ /Applications/GnuCash.app)</command>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><trademark>Windows</trademark></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If you are running &app; 2.4.0 (or newer) on Windows, you can set the interface language by editing
+ the file <filename>environment</filename> with a text editor (e.g.
+ <application>Notepad</application>). By default this file is installed in
+ <filename role="directory">c:\Program Files\gnucash\etc\gnucash</filename>. Change this
+ file such that the last few lines are:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><programlisting linenumbering="unnumbered"># If you wish GnuCash to use a different language, uncomment the two parameters
+# below and set LANG to your preferred locale
+LANG=ll_LL
+LANGUAGE={LANG}</programlisting>
+ </para>
+
+ <para><replaceable>ll_LL</replaceable> is the locale you want to run &app; with
+ (<emphasis>de_DE</emphasis> for Deutsch, <emphasis>it_IT</emphasis> for Italian etc.)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>More and updated information about this topic can be found on the
+ <ulink url="&url-wiki-locale;">Locale Settings page</ulink> of the &app; wiki.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/help/de/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml b/help/de/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e2e8f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/help/de/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,7774 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter SYSTEM "gnc-docbookx.dtd">
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 3.11
+ Last modified: March 29th 2018
+ modified: November 18th 2010
+ modified: December 7th 2009
+ modified: April 23th 2007
+ modified: August 12th 2006
+ modified: February 28th 2005
+
+ Maintainers:
+ Frank H. Ellenberger
+ Cristian Marchi <cri79 at libero.it>
+ Alex Aycinena <alex.aycinena at gmail.com>
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
+
+ Author:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="GUIMenus">
+ <title>&app; Windows & Menus Options Overview</title>
+
+ <para>&untranslated-de;
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The main &app; window displays the accounts, reports, menu selections and tools you may use to
+ process your financial data. This section gives you an overview of the different windows and
+ sections of windows that you will see in &app;.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Links in the various tables will lead to additional details on the topic.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-windows">
+ <title>&app; Windows and Menus</title>
+
+ <sect2 id="Main-window">
+ <title>Main &app; Window</title>
+
+ <para>You can access commonly used sub-windows and tools through this window.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure id="Help_Main_WindowCallouts">
+ <title>The Main &app; Window</title><mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Main-window-callouts.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Main-window-callouts.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>&app; main window parts</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>The parts in which the main &app; window is divided.
+ </para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>When you start &app;, after a couple of windows (Splash screen, Tip of the Day) the main window will
+ be displayed. This window is divided into the following sections (see
+ <xref linkend="Help_Main_WindowCallouts"/> for reference):
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Titlebar</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Displays the name of the currently opened file and the active tab’s name
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Menubar</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Displays the available menu entries
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Toolbar</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Displays the available <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> buttons
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Tab bar</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Lists the open reports, registers and tree of accounts
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Main pane</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The major display space showing the content of the currently selected tab
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Summarybar</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Displays a financial summary
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term>Statusbar</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Gives a description of the active menu item and shows a progress bar
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The contents and options within the various sub-menus of the different sections of the main &app;
+ window will vary upon the active display window.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The tree of accounts is labeled <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> in the <firstterm>Tab bar</firstterm>,
+ and displays all your accounts and their balances, grouped according to standard accounting
+ practice.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To open an additional view of the tree of accounts go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu> <guimenuitem>New Accounts Page</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . This will open the account tree in the existing window.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To open a new window with a tree of accounts view, go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Windows</guimenu> <guimenuitem>New Window with Page</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-acct-tree">
+ <title>Account Tree Display</title>
+
+ <figure>
+ <title>The <emphasis>Account Tree</emphasis> Display.</title><screenshot id="AccTree_Screen">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_AccountTree_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_AccountTree_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Account Tree screen</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This is an image of the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab.
+ </para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <sect2 id="AccTree-menus">
+ <title>Account Tree - Menus</title>
+
+ <para>The <firstterm>Menubar</firstterm> for the Accounts Tree window contains the following options.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-file-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The following table describes the options in the File Menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Clicking on the <guimenu>File</guimenu> option of the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> will <quote>pull
+ down</quote> a menu of options described in <xref linkend="AccTree-FileMenu"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-FileMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - Access to file, account operations and printing.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>N</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>New <accel>F</accel>ile</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Creates a new data file (starts with new accounts and data.)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>O</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>pen...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens an already existing &app; data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu><accel>I</accel>mport</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the Import sub-menu to import files from other financial programs.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>Q</accel>IF...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>QIF</acronym> file Import process.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>O</accel>FX/QFX...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>OFX</acronym>/<acronym>QFX</acronym> file Import process.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>A</accel>ccounts from CSV...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Account file import process. The file to import must be in the
+ same format as the one exported by &app;.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>T</accel>ransactions from CSV...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be a
+ delimited file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>eplay &appname; .log file...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the replaying of a &app; log file. Used for data recovery from "crashes".
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>M</accel>T940</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import an end-of-day account statement in SWIFT MT940 format into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import MT94<accel>2</accel></guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import an interim account statement in SWIFT MT942 format into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>D</accel>TAUS</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import a traditional german DTAUS file into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import DTAUS and <accel>s</accel>end</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import a DTAUS file into GnuCash and transmit its orders by Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import Bills & <accel>I</accel>nvoices...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Import Transactions from text file</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import Customers and Vendors ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Import <accel>C</accel>ustomers and Vendors from text file</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+<!-- TODO: Are the above descriptions really supposed to be blank? -->
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem><accel>S</accel>ave</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Saves the currently open file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save <accel>A</accel>s...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Saves the currently opened file with a different name.
+ </para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Do NOT store your data file in <filename class="directory">~/.gnucash/books</filename>.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guimenuitem>Re<accel>v</accel>ert</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Reload the last saved version of the currently opened file. Useful if you need to discard changes
+ made to the data and not yet saved.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Print</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para><emphasis>This entry is only activated if a printable item like a report or an invoice is
+ selected.</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Pa<accel>g</accel>e Setup...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Lets you choose the paper size, layout and margins for printing.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu><accel>E</accel>xport</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the Export sub-menu.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export Account T<accel>r</accel>ee to CSV</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports your account hierarchy to a delimited <acronym>CSV</acronym> file. Does not export data.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export <accel>T</accel>ransactions to CSV</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports transactions to a delimited <acronym>CSV</acronym> file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export A<accel>c</accel>tive Register to CSV...</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Export the active Register to a CSV file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export <accel>A</accel>ccounts</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports your account hierarchy to a new &app;file. Does not export data.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Proper<accel>t</accel>ies</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Sets options for this &app; data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Recently opened files</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Numbered list of most recently opened &app; data files.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Close</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Close the current tab.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>In the initial Account tree this item is not available - it will be grayed out.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Q</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Exits &app;.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-edit-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu><accel>E</accel>dit</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-EditMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu - Access to file and account editing operations and
+ preferences.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>X</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Cut</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>C</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Copy</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>V</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Paste</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>E</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Edit Account</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Modify name or characteristic of selected account. <xref linkend="acct-edit"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut> <keycap>Delete</keycap> </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Delete
+ Account...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove an account. See <xref linkend="acct-delete"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Renumber Subaccounts...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Starts the Renumber Account assistant. See <xref linkend="chart-renumber"></xref>.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This item is selectable only if you have highlighted an account with at least one subaccount in the
+ accounts tree.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Account</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens the register window for the currently selected account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Subaccount</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens a register window that displays all the transactions for the selected account and for all its
+ subaccounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Set criteria for a search for a specific transaction. See <xref linkend="tool-find"></xref> for
+ specifics on searches.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Pr<accel>e</accel>ferences</guimenuitem> (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on MacOS).
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customize &app; for location, style, and numerous other preferences. See
+ <xref linkend="set-prefs"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>St<accel>y</accel>le Sheets</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Modify/customize Style Sheets. See <xref linkend="change-style"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Ta<accel>x</accel> Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Set tax characteristics on account(s) (US). Assign tax form and line to account. See
+ <xref linkend="set-tax-options"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-view-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-ViewMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu><accel>V</accel>iew</guimenu> Menu - Changes display window view.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem><accel>T</accel>oolbar</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Check-box to enable/disable display of <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Su<accel>m</accel>marybar</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Check-box to enable/disable display of <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> .
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Stat<accel>u</accel>sbar</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Check-box to enable/disable display of <emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Filter by ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Set filter for accounts displayed in the Account Tree display.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>efresh</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Repaint the display screen.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Accounts <accel>P</accel>age</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open a new tab that displays the account tree.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-actions-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-ActionsMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu><accel>A</accel>ctions</guimenu> Menu - Setup scheduled transactions, repair
+ accounts, perform stock splits, transfer and reconcile transactions.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu><accel>O</accel>nline
+ Actions</guisubmenu><guimenuitem></guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Online Banking Submenu
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This is shown only if WITH_AQBANKING was set while building &app;.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <important>
+ <para>The menu entries will be enabled by the successful completion of
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu><accel>T</accel>ools</guimenu><guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>nline
+ Banking Setup...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </important>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Not all options are for all institutions available.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Get <accel>B</accel>alance</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Get the balance for the selected account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Get <accel>T</accel>ransactions...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Get the transactions online through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Issue <accel>S</accel>EPA Transaction...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Issue a new international European (SEPA) transaction online through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem><accel>I</accel>nternal Transaction...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Issue a new bank-internal transaction online through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Issue SEPA Direct <accel>D</accel>ebit...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Issue a new international European (SEPA) direct debit note online through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Show log window...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Online Banking Connection Window</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ Scheduled Transactions sub-menus
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Invoke tool to edit scheduled transactions. See <xref linkend="sched-editor"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Since Last Run...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Display Scheduled transactions since last running of &app;. <xref linkend="trans-sched-slr"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Mortgage & Loan Repayment...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the Mortgage & Loan Repayment assistant for setting up repayments.
+ <xref linkend="trans-sched-loans"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Budget</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ Budget sub-menus
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Opens the window to create a new budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Opens an existing budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Copy Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Copy a budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Creates a new account and opens the account properties window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <guimenuitem>New Account Hierarchy...</guimenuitem>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Starts the <link linkend="acct-hierarchy">New Account Hierarchy Setup</link> assistant.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>T</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Transfer...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Starts the Transfer assistant for transfer between accounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Reconcile...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Open the Reconcile window. <xref linkend="acct-reconcile"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Auto clear...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the auto-clear screen where you can fill up the automatic clear information.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Stock Split...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Starts the Stock Split assistant. Additional details
+ <xref
+ linkend="stock-split"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>View Lots...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the <guilabel>Lots in Account</guilabel> form.
+<!-- Additional details <xref linkend="view-lots"></xref> -->
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry align="left">
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Check & Repair</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Check & Repair Submenus
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Check & Repair Account</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Check for and repair unbalanced transactions and orphan splits in this account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Check & Repair Subaccounts</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Check for and repair unbalanced transactions and orphan splits in this account and its subaccounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Check & Repair All</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Check for and repair unbalanced transactions and orphan splits in all accounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Reset Warnings...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>&app; gives warnings when certain operations are attempted, such as removing a transaction or
+ removing the splits of a transaction. The warning message gives you the option
+ to not give you these warnings when attempting the operation. Check-boxes
+ labeled <guilabel>Remember and don’t ask me again</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Remember and don’t ask me again this session</guilabel> allow
+ disabling the warnings. This option resets the warnings to the default, i.e.
+ display all warnings.
+ <tip>
+ <para>Warnings may be selectively enabled.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Rename Page</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Open the form to rename the current page/tab.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-business-menu">
+ <title id="usage">Account Tree - <guimenu>Business</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-BusinessMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Business</guimenu> Menu - Access small business features of &app;.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Customer</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Select customer related activities.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Customers Overview</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open a customers overview page.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Customer...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new customer.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Customer...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for a customer.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Invoice...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new invoice.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Invoice...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for an invoice.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Job...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new job.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Job...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for a job.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Process Payment...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the Process Payment assistant. Requires an account of type "A/Payable" before running
+ assistant.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Vendor</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Select vendor related activities.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Vendors Overview</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open a vendors overview page.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Vendor...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new vendor.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Vendor...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for a vendor.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Bill...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new bill.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Bill...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for a bill.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Job...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new job.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Job...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for a job.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Process Payment...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the Process Payment assistant. Requires an account of type "A/Payable" before running
+ assistant.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Employee</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Select employee related activities.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Employees Overview</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open an employees overview page.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Employee...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new employee.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Employee...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for an employee.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Expense Voucher...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the form to create a new expense voucher.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Find Expense Voucher...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Start the assistant to search for an expense voucher.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Process Payment...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the Process Payment assistant. Requires an account of type "A/Payable" before running
+ assistant.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Sales Tax Table</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>View and edit the list of tax tables.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Billing Terms Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>View and edit the list of Billing Terms.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Bills Due Reminder</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>View and edit the list of Bills Due Reminder.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-reports-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>This is a brief listing of each of the available reports and graphs. See
+ <xref linkend="report-classes"></xref> for specific report details. Each report or graph
+ may be customized by selecting a different <firstterm>Stylesheet</firstterm> or by
+ pressing the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-ReportsMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> Menu - Access &app; Reports and Charts.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Assets & Liabilities</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Advanced Portfolio</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Asset Barchart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Asset Piechart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Average Balance</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Balance Sheet</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Balance Sheet using eguile-gnc</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>General Journal</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>General Ledger</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+<!-- <para>See <xref linkend="general-journal-report"></xref></para>-->
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Investment Portfolio</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Liability Barchart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Liability Piechart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Net Worth Barchart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Net Worth Linechart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Price Scatterplot</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Business Reports</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Customer Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Customer Summary</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Easy Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Employee Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Fancy Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Job Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Payable Aging</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Printable Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Receivable Aging</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Tax Invoice</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Vendor Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Income & Expense</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Cash Flow</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Equity Statement</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Expense Barchart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Expense Piechart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Expenses vs. Day of Week</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Income & Expense Chart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Income Barchart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Income Piechart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Income Statement</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Income vs. Day of Week</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Profit & loss</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Trial Balance</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Sample & Custom</guimenu><guisubmenu></guisubmenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Welcome Sample Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Custom Multicolumn Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Sample Report With Examples</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Budget</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Balance Sheet</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Barchart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Flow</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Income Statement</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Profit & Loss</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Account Summary</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Report showing the balance of selected accounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Future Scheduled Transactions Summary</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Report showing a summary of future transactions.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Tax Schedule Report & TXF Export</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Create a Tax report (US) and/or export data for tax preparation software. (TXF)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Transaction Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Saved Report Configurations</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Open the screen to manage saved user configured reports.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-tools-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu><accel>T</accel>ools</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-ToolsMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu - Access to miscellaneous tools and editors</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>nline Banking Setup...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs the initial setup of an account for Online Banking access (FinTs, OFX DirectConnect, ...)
+ by AqBanking, if &app; was built with the option WITH_AQBANKING.
+ <xref linkend="tools-on-line-banking"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Price Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Tool to enter or modify Stock/Fund prices. Details at <xref linkend="tool-price"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Security Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Tool to enter or modify Stock or commodities. Details at <xref linkend="tool-security-edit"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Loan Repayment Calculator</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Details at <xref linkend="tool-calc"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Close Book</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open a screen where you can enter the required information to close the current accounting period.
+ See <xref linkend="tool-close-book"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>General Journal</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>See <xref linkend="general-journal"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-windows-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Windows</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-WindowsMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Windows</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Window</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens a new &app; empty window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Window with Page</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Moves the current tab into a new window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opened windows
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>A numbered list of open windows.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="AccTree-help-menu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-HelpMenu">
+ <title>Account Tree - <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu - Access to this help and the Tutorial and Concepts
+ Guide.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Tutorial & Concepts Guide</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Explanation of accounting principles and how to apply them in &app;
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Tips Of The Day</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Shows short notes about features you might otherwise miss.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Contents</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open this document.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>About</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Show the information screen with &app; version, license and credits
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="AccTree-toolbar">
+ <title>Account Tree - <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Icons/Buttons</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+
+ <para>The &app; main Window has a number of buttons in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to quickly access
+ some common functions used with the specific active tab. The <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>
+ can be hidden or shown by selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . The specific options displayed in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> vary with the functions
+ available to the "active tab".
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A brief description of the function of a <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> button is displayed when the
+ mouse pointer is placed over the icon for a couple of seconds.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="AccTree-ToolBarIcons">
+ <title>Account Tree - Window <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis></title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Buttons
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guibutton>Save</guibutton>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Perform a save on the data file, commit all transactions to the data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guibutton>Close</guibutton>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Close the currently active account page
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This icon is not available for the first accounts tab. It is available for additional account tree
+ displays.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Open</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open a transaction register of the selected account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the characteristics for the selected account. <xref linkend="acct-edit"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Start the assistant for creating a new account. <xref linkend="acct-create"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove the selected account. <xref linkend="acct-delete"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Common-Tab-bar">
+ <title>Tab bar</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Tab bar</emphasis> displays <quote>file/notebook folder</quote> style tabs for open
+ transaction registers, reports and the account tree.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="AccTree-main-bar">
+ <title>Main pane - Account tree</title>
+
+ <para>The account tree displays the list of your accounts in hierarchical format. This enables you to
+ organize your accounts by type.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The triangle shape (or plus sign) beside the account name is used to open and close the account
+ tree. When you click on the triangle (plus sign), it changes from a rightward-pointing
+ into a downward-pointing sign (minus sign) to indicate that the tree is opened. You will
+ then see offset below the account name either a list of the sub account(s) or another
+ triangle (plus sign) to the left of an account. This indicates another lower level of the
+ account tree.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>In the main pane are also shown, by default, four columns: <guilabel>Account Name</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>Description</guilabel> and <guilabel>Total</guilabel>.
+ For each account, this informations, if available, is displayed in the same row of the
+ account.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The columns shown for each account in the Account Tree can be customized to suit your needs. Click
+ on the arrow icon on the far right of the Account Tree window to display a drop down list
+ of column options. Click on a column description to add it to the Account Tree window.
+ Click again on the column description to hide it.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The default display for the account tree window is in Notebook mode. This is indicated by the tab in
+ the tab row of the main window. Other tabs will appear beside this one when you open
+ reports, account registers or additional account trees.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Common-summary-bar">
+ <title>Summarybar</title>
+
+ <para>The <firstterm>Summarybar</firstterm> displays balances appropriate for the opened account type at a
+ glance. Usually accounts display today’s account balance, any balance for future
+ dates, a balance for cleared items and a reconciled balance. Stock accounts, however,
+ display shares totals and their value. The <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> can be hidden or
+ shown by selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Summarybar</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Common-status-bar">
+ <title>Statusbar</title>
+
+ <para>The <firstterm>Statusbar</firstterm> displays informations about the currently highlighted menu
+ item. It also shows a progress bar when opening or saving a &app; data file or generating
+ reports. The <emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis> can be hidden or shown by selecting the
+ <guimenuitem>Statusbar</guimenuitem> item on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-acct-reg">
+ <title>Account Register/General Journal</title>
+
+ <sect2 id="account-register">
+ <title>Account Register & General Journal Window</title>
+
+ <para>This window is used to enter and edit your account data. It also provides tools for scheduling
+ future transactions, finding and reporting on transactions and printing checks.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To open the Account Register Window for an account, select the account in the Account Tree then go
+ to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Open Account</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ or press
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <keycap>O</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ . This will open a new window with the Account Register. Pressing the
+ <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> in the Account Tree
+ Window or the <guibutton>Jump</guibutton> button in the Account Register Window are
+ alternate methods.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure>
+ <title>The <emphasis>Account Register</emphasis> Display.</title><screenshot id="AccountReg_Screen">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_AccountReg_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_AccountReg_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Account Register screen</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This is an image of the <emphasis>Account Register</emphasis> tab.
+ </para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Appearance of the Account Register Display is highly customizable (see
+ <ulink
+url="https://www.gnucash.org/docs/v&series-stable;/C/gnucash-guide/chapter_txns.html#txns-regstyle1">
+ Tutorial and Concepts Guide, Choosing a Register Style</ulink>).
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The methods to enter transactions are described in detail in <xref linkend="ch_Common_Trans_Ops"/>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Trans-menus">
+ <title>Account Register Menus</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> for the Transaction Register window contains the following options.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-file-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The following table describes the options in the <guimenu>File</guimenu>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Clicking on <guimenu>File</guimenu> in the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> will <quote>pull
+ down</quote> a menu of choices described in <xref linkend="Trans-FileMenu"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Trans-FileMenu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - Access to file and account operations and
+ printing.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>N</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>New <accel>F</accel>ile</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Creates a new data file (starts with new accounts and data.)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>O</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>pen...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens an already existing &app; data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the Import sub-menu to import files from other financial programs.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import QIF ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>QIF</acronym> file Import process.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import OFX/QFX ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>OFX</acronym>/<acronym>QFX</acronym> file Import process.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import Accounts from CSV...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Account file import process. The file to import must be in the
+ same format as the one exported by &app;.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import Transactions from CSV...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be a
+ delimited file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Replay &appname; .log file...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the replaying of a &app; log file. Used for data recovery from "crashes".
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import MT940</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import an end-of-day account statement in SWIFT MT940 format into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import MT942</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import an interim account statement in SWIFT MT942 format into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import DTAUS</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import a traditional german DTAUS file into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import DTAUS and send</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import a DTAUS file into GnuCash and transmit its orders by Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import Bills & Invoices...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Import Transactions from text file</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import Customers and Vendors ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Import Customers and Vendors from text file</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Saves the currently open file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Saves the currently opened file with a different name.
+ </para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Do NOT store your data file in <filename class="directory">~/.gnucash/books</filename>.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Print Checks...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Starts the <guilabel>Print Checks</guilabel> assistant. See <xref linkend="print-check"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Page Setup...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Let you choose the paper size, layout and margins for printing.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Export</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Exports ...
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export Accounts Tree to CSV</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports your account hierarchy to a delimited <acronym>CSV</acronym> file. Does not export data.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export Transactions to CSV</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports transactions to a delimited <acronym>CSV</acronym> file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export Accounts</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports your account hierarchy to a new &app;file. Does not export data.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Sets options for this &app; data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Recently opened files</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Numbered list of most recently opened &app; data files.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Close</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Closes the currently opened transaction register.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Q</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Exits &app;.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-edit-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Trans-EditMenu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu - Access to file and account editing operations and
+ preferences.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>X</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Cut</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>C</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Copy</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>V</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Paste</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Assign as payment...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Assign as payment the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Edit Account</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open form to edit/modify account characteristics and parameters.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Set criteria for a search for a specific transaction. See <xref linkend="tool-find"></xref> for
+ specifics on searches.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on MacOS).
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customize &app; for location, style, and numerous other preferences. See
+ <xref linkend="set-prefs"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Style Sheets</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Modify/customize Style Sheets.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Set tax characteristics on account(s) (US). Assign tax form and line to account. See
+ <xref linkend="set-tax-options"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-view-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Trans-ViewMenu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu - Changes &app; display window characteristics.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Check-box to enable/disable display of <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Summarybar</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Check-box to enable/disable display of Summary Bar.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Statusbar</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Check-box to enable/disable display of Status Bar.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Basic Ledger</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Radio button to select register display mode. See
+ <ulink
+url="https://www.gnucash.org/docs/v&series-stable;/C/gnucash-guide/chapter_txns.html#txns-regstyle1">
+ Tutorial and Concepts Guide, Choosing a Register Style</ulink>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Radio button to select register display mode.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Transaction Journal</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Radio button to select register display mode.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Check-box to enable/disable display of Double Line display.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Sort by...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Set the sort order of the transactions display. Requires a click to start options form. Option form
+ requires <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>/<guibutton>OK</guibutton> to close.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Standard Order</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Keep normal order: date posted [day], number, date entered [second]
+ <footnote>
+ <para>The <quote>date entered</quote> is usually invisible. Use a report to display it.
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ , description.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Date</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by date.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Date of Entry</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by date of entry.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Statement Date</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by the statement date (unreconciled items last).
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Number</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by number.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Amount</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by amount.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Memo</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by memo.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by Description.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Action</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by action field.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Sort by notes field.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Reverse Order</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Reverse the sort order.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guilabel>Save Sort Order</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Save the sort order between sessions.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Filter by ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Set filtering for accounts displayed in the Account Tree or transactions in Register display.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>R</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Refresh</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Repaint the display screen.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Accounts Page</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Open a new tab that displays the account tree.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-transaction-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Trans-TransactionMenu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu> Menu - access to transaction tools.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Cut Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Cut the selected transaction into the clipboard.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Copy Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Copy the selected transaction into the clipboard.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Paste Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Paste the selected transaction from the clipboard.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Duplicate Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Insert in the register a copy of the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Delete Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Delete the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Remove Other Splits</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove all splits from the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Enter Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Enter in the register the transaction you are currently working on.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Cancel Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Blanks all fields in the selected transaction if it has not yet been recorded.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Void Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Void the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Unvoid Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Unvoid the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Add Reversing Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Add a copy of the selected transaction with an inverted amount.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Associate File with Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Associate a file with the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Associate Location with Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Associate a URL with the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Associated File/Location</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open the file or location associated with the transaction. Available if a file or location was
+ associated with the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-actions-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Trans-ActionsMenu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> Menu - Setup scheduled transactions, repair accounts,
+ perform stock splits, transfer and reconcile transactions.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Online Actions</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ This menu item (and sub-menu) is shown only if Online Banking was enabled for
+ &app;
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Get Balance</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Get the account balance online through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Get Transactions</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Get recent transactions through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <note>
+ <para>Sending orders to the bank is only available for <acronym>EBICS</acronym> and
+ <acronym>FinTS</acronym>:
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Issue SEPA Transaction...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Issue an international European (SEPA) transaction online through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Internal Transaction...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Issue a bank-internal transaction online through Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Direct Debit...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>With the conversion to <acronym>SEPA</acronym> this menu entry disappeared, but it is still
+ possible. See <ulink url="&url-wiki;De/SEPA-Lastschrift"></ulink> (in german).
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Show log window...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Show the <guilabel>Online Banking Connection Window</guilabel> with the log messages to find errors.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ Scheduled Transactions sub-menus
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Invoke tool to edit scheduled transactions. See <xref linkend="sched-editor"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Since Last Run...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Display Scheduled transactions since last running of &app;. <xref linkend="trans-sched-slr"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Mortgage & Loan Repayment...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the Mortgage & Loan Repayment assistant for setting up repayments.
+ <xref linkend="trans-sched-loans"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Budget</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ Budget sub-menus
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Opens the window to create a new budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Opens an existing budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Copy Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Copy a budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>T</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Transfer...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Starts the Transfer assistant for transfer between accounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Reconcile...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Start the Reconcile process for the selected account. <xref linkend="acct-reconcile"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Stock Split...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Starts the Stock Split assistant. Additional details
+ <xref
+ linkend="stock-split"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>View Lots...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the <guilabel>Lots in Account</guilabel> form.
+<!-- Additional details <xref linkend="view-lots"></xref> -->
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Blank Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Move to the blank transaction at the bottom of the register
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Expand the currently selected transaction to show splits.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Edit Exchange Rate</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Edit the exchange rate for the current transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Schedule...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Create a Scheduled Transaction with the current transaction as a template.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Jump</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Jump to the corresponding transaction in the other account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Check & Repair</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Check & Repair Submenus
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>All Transactions</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Check for and repair unbalanced transactions and orphan splits in this account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>This Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Check for and repair splits in this transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Reset Warnings...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>&app; gives warnings when certain operations are attempted, such as removing a transaction or
+ removing the splits of a transaction. The warning message gives you the option
+ to not give you these warnings when attempting the operation. Check-boxes
+ labeled <guilabel>Remember and don’t ask me again</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Remember and don’t ask me again this session</guilabel> allow
+ disabling the warnings. This option resets the warnings to the default, i.e.
+ display all warnings.
+ <tip>
+ <para>Warnings may be selectively enabled.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Rename Page</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Open the form to rename the current page/tab.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-business-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Business</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Business</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-BusinessMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-reports-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-ReportsMenu" /> plus the two types of report listed in the
+ following.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Account report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Account Transaction Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-tools-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-ToolsMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-windows-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Windows</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Windows</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-WindowsMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Trans-help-menu">
+ <title>Account Register - <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-HelpMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Trans-toolbar">
+ <title>Account Register - <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Icons/Buttons</title>
+
+ <para>The &app; main Window has a number of icons/buttons in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to quickly
+ access some common functions used with the specific active tab. The
+ <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> can be hidden or shown by selecting the
+ <guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem> item on the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The specific options displayed in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> varies by the functions available
+ to the active tab.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>A brief description of the function of a button is displayed when the mouse pointer is placed over
+ the button for a couple of seconds.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Trans-ToolBarIcons">
+ <title>Account Register (Transaction Register) Window <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis></title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Buttons
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Perform a save on the data file, commit all transactions to the data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Close</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Close this register.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Duplicate</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Make a copy of the current transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Delete the current transaction in this register.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Enter</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Record the current transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Cancel the current transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Blank</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Move to a blank transaction at bottom of register.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Split</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Show all splits in the current transaction. Not highlighted if
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ is enabled.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Jump</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Jump to the corresponding transaction in the other account
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Schedule</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a Scheduled Transaction with the current transaction as a template.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Transfer</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Start the transfer assistant to transfer funds from one account to another.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Reconcile</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Start the Reconcile process for the selected account. <xref linkend="acct-reconcile"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Common-tab-bar">
+ <title>Tab Bar</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Tab bar</emphasis> displays <quote>notebook/file folder</quote> style tabs for open
+ transaction registers, account trees and reports.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Trans-display-main">
+ <title>List of Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>The List of Transactions displays transactions you have entered and a running balance. It also
+ provides a blank transaction to enter new transactions. The column headings vary according
+ to what type of account you have opened. Common headings are <guilabel>Date</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Description</guilabel>, <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Balance</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu can be used to alter the appearance of the List of Transactions.
+ Possible changes are limiting the number of transactions shown, using a different sort order
+ and changing the style to more easily see transactions. The <guibutton>Split</guibutton>
+ button also provides quick access to view all the parts of a transaction.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Trans-summary-bar2">
+ <title>Summarybar</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> displays balances appropriate for the opened account type at a
+ glance. Usually accounts display <guilabel>Present</guilabel> (today’s) account
+ balance, any balance for <guilabel>Future</guilabel> dates, a balance for
+ <guilabel>Cleared</guilabel> items, a <guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel> balance and a
+ <guilabel>Projected Minimum</guilabel> balance. Stock accounts, however, display shares
+ totals and their value. The <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> can be hidden or shown by
+ selecting the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Summarybar</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ item.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Trans-status-bar">
+ <title>Statusbar</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis> works the same as described in
+ <xref linkend="Common-status-bar" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-report">
+ <title>Report Window</title>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-display">
+ <title>Report Display Window</title>
+
+ <para>This window is shown whenever a report or chart is selected from the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
+ menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To open the report window, select a report from the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> item in the
+ <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis>. This will open a new window with the report displayed. It
+ provides a web browser type display with active links to account data.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Depending on the report there may be a delay while the report is generated. An approximation of the
+ progress to completion is displayed in the <emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis>, if has not been
+ opted out of displaying.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <figure>
+ <title>The <emphasis>Report Window</emphasis></title><screenshot id="Report_Screen">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Report_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Report_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Report screen</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This is an image of the <guilabel>Income/Expense Chart</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Report-menus">
+ <title>Report Menus</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> for the report window contains the following options.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-file-menu">
+ <title>Reports - <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The following table describes the options in the File Menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Clicking on the <guimenu>File</guimenu> option of the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> will <quote>pull
+ down</quote> a menu of options described in <xref linkend="Report-FileMenu"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Report-FileMenu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>File</guimenu> Menu - Access to file and account operations and printing.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>N</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>New <accel>F</accel>ile</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Creates a new data file (starts with new accounts and data.)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>O</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem><accel>O</accel>pen...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens an already existing &app; data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the Import sub-menu to import files from other financial programs.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>Q</accel>IF ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>QIF</acronym> file Import process.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>O</accel>FX/QFX ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>OFX</acronym>/<acronym>QFX</acronym> file Import process.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>A</accel>ccounts from CSV...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Account file import process. The file to import must be in the
+ same format as the one exported by &app;.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>T</accel>ransactions from CSV...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the <acronym>CSV</acronym> Transactions file import process. The file to import must be a
+ delimited file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem><accel>R</accel>eplay &appname; .log file...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the replaying of a &app; log file. Used for data recovery from "crashes".
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>M</accel>T940</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import an end-of-day account statement in SWIFT MT940 format into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import MT94<accel>2</accel></guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import an interim account statement in SWIFT MT942 format into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>D</accel>TAUS</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import a traditional german DTAUS file into GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import DTAUS and <accel>s</accel>end</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Import a DTAUS file into GnuCash and transmit its orders by Online Banking.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import Bills & <accel>I</accel>nvoices...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Import Transactions from text file</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Import <accel>C</accel>ustomers and Vendors ...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Import Customers and Vendors from text file</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Saves the currently open file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Saves the currently opened file with a different name.
+ </para>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>Do NOT store your data file in <filename class="directory">~/.gnucash/books</filename>.
+ </para>
+ </warning>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guimenuitem>Revert</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Reload the last saved version of the currently opened file. Useful if you need to discard changes
+ made to the data and not yet saved.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Print Report...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Print the selected report.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Page Setup...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Let you choose the paper size, layout and margins for printing.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Export as PDF</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Exports the displayed report as a <acronym>PDF</acronym> file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Export</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the Export sub-menu.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export Accounts Tree to CSV</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports your account hierarchy to a delimited <acronym>CSV</acronym> file. Does not export data.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export Transactions to CSV</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports transactions to a delimited <acronym>CSV</acronym> file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Export Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Export the current report in an <acronym>HTML</acronym> formatted file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guisubmenu>Export Accounts</guisubmenu>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Exports your account hierarchy to a new &app;file. Does not export data.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Properties</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Sets options for this &app; data file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Recently opened files</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Numbered list of most recently opened &app; data files.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Close</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Closes the current report.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Q</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Quit</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Exits &app;.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-edit-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Report-EditMenu">
+ <title>Reports - <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu - Access to file and account editing operations and
+ preferences.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>X</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Cut</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Cut</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>C</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Copy</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Copy</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>V</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Performs a standard <emphasis>Paste</emphasis> operation.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Set criteria for a search for a specific transaction. See <xref linkend="tool-find"></xref> for
+ specifics on searches.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem> (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>GnuCash</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ on MacOS).
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customize &app; for location, style, and numerous other preferences. See
+ <xref linkend="set-prefs"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Style Sheets</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Modify/customize Style Sheets.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open form to edit/modify report selection criteria, stylesheets, date ranges, and many other
+ parameters.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Tax Report Options</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Set tax characteristics on account(s) (US). Assign tax form and line to account. See
+ <xref linkend="set-tax-options"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-view-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>View</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>Except <guimenuitem>Filter By...</guimenuitem>, the items shown in the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu
+ are the same as listed in <xref linkend="AccTree-ViewMenu" />
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-actions-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Report-ActionsMenu">
+ <title>Reports - <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> Menu - Setup scheduled transactions.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu><accel>O</accel>nline Actions</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ This menu item (and sub-menu) is shown only if Online Banking was enabled for
+ &app;
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Show <accel>l</accel>og window...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Open the <guilabel>Online Banking Connection Window</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu><guimenuitem></guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ Scheduled Transactions sub-menus
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Invoke tool to edit scheduled transactions. See <xref linkend="sched-editor"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Since Last Run...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Display Scheduled transactions since last running of &app;. <xref linkend="trans-sched-slr"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Mortgage & Loan Repayment...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Starts the Mortgage & Loan Repayment assistant for setting up repayments.
+ <xref linkend="trans-sched-loans"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Budget</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ Budget sub-menus
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Opens the window to create a new budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Opens an existing budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Copy Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Copy a budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Reset Warnings...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>&app; gives warnings when certain operations are attempted, such as removing a transaction or
+ removing the splits of a transaction. The warning message gives you the option
+ to not give you these warnings when attempting the operation. Check-boxes
+ labeled <guilabel>Remember and don’t ask me again</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Remember and don’t ask me again this session</guilabel> allow
+ disabling the warnings. This option resets the warnings to the default, This
+ option resets the warnings to the default, i.e. display all warnings.
+ <tip>
+ <para>Warnings may be selectively enabled.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Rename Page</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c2" nameend="c3">
+ <para>Lets you type a new name for the current page or tab.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-business-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Business</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Business</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-BusinessMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-reports-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-ReportsMenu" /> with the addition of:
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Report-ReportsMenu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> Menu.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Save Report Configuration</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Save the current report configuration. If you are not working with a saved report configuration, you
+ will be asked to give it a name. You will be able to run the exact same report
+ again by using the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports </guimenu><guimenuitem>Saved Report Configurations
+ </guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Save Report Configuration As...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Save the current report configuration with a new name.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-tools-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-ToolsMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-windows-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Windows</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Windows</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-WindowsMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="Report-help-menu">
+ <title>Report - <guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The items shown in the <guimenu>Help</guimenu> menu are the same as listed in
+ <xref linkend="AccTree-HelpMenu" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Report-tool-bar">
+ <title>Reports - <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Icons/Buttons</title>
+
+ <para>The Report Window has a <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to quickly access the functions used with
+ reports. The <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> can be hidden or shown by selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Toolbar</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot">
+ <title>Reports - <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Buttons</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Button
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Close</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Closes the displayed report.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Back</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Move back one step in the history.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Forward</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Move forward one step in the history.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Reload</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Reload (rerun) current report.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Stop</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Stops the <acronym>HTML</acronym> requests.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Save Report Configuration</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Saves the displayed report. You will be able to run the exact same report again by using the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Saved Report
+ Configurations</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Save Report Configuration As... </guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Saves the displayed report in a configuration file with a given name. You will then be able to run
+ the exact same report again by using the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Saved Report
+ Configurations</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Export</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Exports <acronym>HTML</acronym> formatted report to a file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Options</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit options specific to selected report.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Print</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Queues the current report for printing.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Export as PDF</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Exports the selected report as a <acronym>PDF</acronym> file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Report-tab-bar">
+ <title>Tab Bar</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Tab bar</emphasis> displays <quote>notebook/file folder</quote>-style tabs for open
+ transaction registers, account trees and reports.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-main">
+ <title>Report Main Display</title>
+
+ <para>This is where the report or chart you have selected is shown. The properties of this window are
+ editable in two ways. Selecting the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button on the
+ <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> lets you edit what the report is showing and which accounts the
+ information is drawn from. Selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Style Sheets...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ lets you select the properties of the page that displays your report.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The report is able to act like a web browser if your report contains links to external web pages.
+ The <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> buttons allow you to move <guibutton>Back</guibutton> and
+ <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> through web pages. It will also open account registers when
+ you click on links to accounts contained in the report.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>You can also <guibutton>Export</guibutton> your report to a file and <guibutton>Print</guibutton>
+ the report through the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> buttons.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Report-summary-bar">
+ <title>Summarybar</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Summarybar</emphasis> is not displayed when viewing a report window.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="Report-status-bar">
+ <title>Statusbar</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis> works the same as described in
+ <xref linkend="Common-status-bar" />.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-reconcile">
+ <title>Reconcile Window</title>
+
+ <para>To simplify navigation the following are the topics covered in this section;
+ <xref linkend="reconcile-display"></xref>, <xref linkend="reconcile-menus"></xref>,
+ <xref linkend="reconcile-toolbar"></xref>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The detailed explanation of reconciling an account is described in
+ <xref linkend="acct-reconcile"></xref>.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="reconcile-display">
+ <title>Reconcile Display Window</title>
+
+ <para>To open the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window, click
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reconcile...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ from the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> or the <guibutton>Reconcile</guibutton> button from
+ the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> in a register window. This will open a
+ <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> screen in which you need to enter the <guilabel>Statement
+ Date</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel>. If you select the
+ <guilabel>Include subaccounts</guilabel> option, all transactions in the subaccounts of the
+ selected account will also be counted for the reconcile operation. Pressing the
+ <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button will open a <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window allowing
+ you to compare deposit and withdrawal transactions to your statement.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="Tools-ReconcileWin">
+ <title>Components of the Reconcile Window.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Component
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menubar
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Contains the Menus used in the Reconcile Window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> (Icons and/or Text)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Contains buttons used to access common Reconcile Account Window tasks.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guilabel>Funds In</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>This pane in the left contains a list of funds deposited in the account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>This pane in the right contains a list of funds withdrawn from the account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Balance Pane
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>This pane in the lower right contains a list of balances useful for reconciling.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <sect3 id="reconcile-menus">
+ <title>Menus</title>
+
+ <para>The following tables describe menus in the Reconcile Window.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-reconcile-menu">
+ <title><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu> Menu - Access to Reconcile Information and finishing or postponing.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Reconcile Information...</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens the Reconciling Information Window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>F</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Complete the reconciliation of this account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>P</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Postpone</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Postpone the reconciliation of this account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Cancel</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Cancel the reconciliation of this account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-rec-account">
+ <title><guimenu>Account</guimenu> Menu - Access to account operations.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Account</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens a transaction register for the accounts
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Edit Account</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Modify name or characteristic of selected account. <xref linkend="acct-edit"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>T</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Transfer...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens a Transfer assistant for entering a transfer transaction between any two accounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Check & Repair</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Verify and repair this account if necessary.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-rec-trans">
+ <title><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu> Menu - Access to transaction editing operations.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Add a new transaction to the account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Balance</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens the account‘s register window with a pre-compiled balancing transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Delete</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-rec-help">
+ <title><guimenu>Help</guimenu> Menu - Access to help.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Help</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open this Help text file.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="reconcile-toolbar">
+ <title><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Buttons</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window has a <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to quickly access some
+ common functions used with reconciliation.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-rec-toolbar">
+ <title><guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> Window <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis></title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Button
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Add a new transaction to the account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Balance</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Opens the account‘s register window with a pre-compiled balancing transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Open</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Open an Account transaction window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Finish</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Complete the reconciliation of this account.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This button is not active (grayed out) until the <guilabel>Difference</guilabel> value in the
+ balance pane (lower right) is 0.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Postpone</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Postpone the reconciliation of this account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Cancel the reconciliation of this account.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-win-sx">
+ <title>Schedule Transaction Window</title>
+
+ <para>To simplify navigation the following are the topics covered in this section;
+ <xref linkend="tools-SX-menus"></xref>, <xref linkend="tools-SX-toolbar"></xref>,
+ <xref linkend="sched-trans-win"></xref>. <xref linkend="sched-editor"></xref>,
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The detailed explanation of scheduling transactions is described in
+ <xref linkend="trans-sched"></xref>.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-SX-display">
+ <title>Scheduled Transactions Main Display Window</title>
+
+ <para>This window is shown when
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Scheduled Transactions Editor</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ is selected from the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis>. This will open a new tab window with the
+ Scheduled Transactions displayed.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="tools-SXWin">
+ <title>Scheduled Transaction Main Window Components</title>
+ <para></para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot">
+ <title>Components of the Schedule Transactions Window.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Component
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menubar
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Contains the Menus used in the Schedule Transactions Window. It provides the standard list of
+ <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> options and an additional option,
+ <guilabel>Scheduled</guilabel>, which presents options; New, Edit or Delete. If
+ no transaction is highlighted Edit and Delete will be "grayed out".
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> (Icons and/or Text)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Contains buttons used to access Schedule Transitions tasks.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Tabs
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Tabs to switch between open displays.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guilabel>Transactions</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Transactions</guilabel> pane contains a list of transactions scheduled and related
+ characteristics.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guilabel>Upcoming</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Upcoming</guilabel> pane contains a calendar of the next months In this calendar the
+ days in which one or more transactions are scheduled, are highlighted with a
+ circle.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>You can change the time interval displayed in the calendar by selecting a different period from the
+ <guilabel>View:</guilabel> drop down list on the right.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Click on a date in the pane and the details about the scheduled transactions on that date will be
+ displayed.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="tools-SX-menus">
+ <title><guimenu>Scheduled</guimenu> Menu</title>
+
+ <para>The following table describe the <guimenu>Scheduled</guimenu> menu options available in the
+ <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> when you are in the <guilabel>Scheduled
+ Transaction</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-SX-trans">
+ <title><guimenu>Scheduled</guimenu> Menu - Access to scheduled transaction editing operations.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Add a new scheduled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Delete</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="tools-SX-toolbar">
+ <title><guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Buttons</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> window has a <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to quickly
+ access some common functions used with scheduling.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot">
+ <title><guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> Window <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis></title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Button
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Save the current schedule of transactions.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Close</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Close the <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Add a new scheduled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove the currently selected transaction.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-budget">
+ <title>Budget Window</title>
+
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guisubmenu>Budget</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Open
+ Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ will open the default budget or offer you a choice if there is more than one budget. A new tab
+ will open with the budget displayed.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="budget-menus">
+ <title>Budget Window Menus</title>
+
+ <para>Here are some menu items that are particularly useful to working with budgets.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3 id="budget-menus-edit">
+ <title>Budget Window - Edit menu</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="budget-menus-edit-items">
+ <title><guimenu>Edit</guimenu> Menu - Special items for the budget window.</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Estimate Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Estimate a budget value for the selected accounts from past transactions.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Delete Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Delete this budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Options</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit this budget’s options.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="budget-menus-actions">
+ <title>Budget Window - Actions menu</title>
+ <para></para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="budget-menus-actions-items">
+ <title><guimenu>Actions</guimenu> Menu - Items in the standard menu that relate to budgets.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Budget</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the Budget sub-menu to select budget actions.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>New Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>Create a new budget and open it in a new tab.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>If no budget exists, create a new budget and open it. If only one budget exists, open it; otherwise
+ user selects one to open.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Copy Budget</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>If no budgets exist yet, just open a new budget. If only one budget exists, create a copy of it;
+ otherwise user selects one to copy. If a copy is made, then the copy is opened
+ in a new tab.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="budget-menus-reports">
+ <title>Budget Window - Reports menu</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <title>Using more than one budget</title>
+
+ <para>When there is more than one budget, the reports will use the budget selected in book options by
+ default. See <xref linkend="book-options"></xref> and
+ <xref linkend="budgeting-book-options"></xref> for more details. After the report is
+ displayed, the budget it uses can be changed in the report options
+ <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="budget-menus-reports-items">
+ <title><guimenu>Reports</guimenu> Menu - Items in the standard menu that relate to budgets.</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="3">
+ <colspec colname="c1"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c2"></colspec>
+
+ <colspec colname="c3"></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Menu Item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3"
+ namest="c2">
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <guisubmenu>Budget</guisubmenu><guimenuitem/>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align="center" nameend="c3" namest="c2">
+ <para>Opens the Budget sub-menu to select a budget report.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Balance Sheet</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Barchart</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Flow</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>This report includes information from one budget period at a time. The left column of numbers shows
+ the budgeted amounts, and the right column of numbers shows the actual amounts.
+ It only shows certain accounts, those that have no sub-accounts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Income Statement</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Profit & Loss</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>This report is identical to the Budget Income Statement report.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c2">
+ <para><guimenuitem>Budget Report</guimenuitem>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry namest="c3">
+ <para>The budget report shows all accounts and all periods. For each period it gives the budgeted amount
+ and the actual amount. There is an option to add another column showing the
+ difference (budgeted - actual).
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="tools-budget-toolbar">
+ <title>Budget Window Toolbar Buttons</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Budget</guilabel> window has a <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> to quickly access common
+ functions used with budgeting.
+ </para>
+
+ <table frame="topbot">
+ <title><guilabel>Budget</guilabel> Window <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis></title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> Button
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>S</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Save</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Save the current budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><menuchoice>
+ <shortcut>
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>W</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ </shortcut> <guimenuitem>Close</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Close the <guilabel>Budget</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Options</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit this budget’s options.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Estimate</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Estimate a budget value for the selected accounts from past transactions.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Delete</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Delete this budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="budget-widget">
+ <title>Budget Window Main Display</title>
+
+ <para>The budget window contains a list of accounts down the left hand side, and a set of columns down the
+ right hand side that represent budget values. Each column corresponds to a budget
+ <emphasis>period</emphasis>. The number of periods for a budget can be changed using the
+ <guilabel>Budget Options</guilabel> dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <procedure>
+ <title>Entering a budget value</title>
+
+ <step>
+ <para><emphasis>Click</emphasis> the row corresponding to the account you wish to budget
+ </para>
+ </step>
+
+ <step>
+ <para>Choose the period this value is for, and <emphasis>click</emphasis> in the cell corresponding to
+ that period
+ </para>
+ </step>
+
+ <step>
+ <para>Type the value in the cell
+ </para>
+ </step>
+
+ <step>
+ <para>Press
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Enter</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ to finish editing the value.
+ </para>
+ </step>
+ </procedure>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="budget-options">
+ <title>Budget Options</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot">
+ <title>Budget options</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Option
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Budget Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The budget name is used in the tab’s name and also in any reports you create with the budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Notes
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>A description of the budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Budget Period
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The budget period includes when the budget starts (start date) and how long each budget period
+ lasts.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Number of Periods
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>The number of periods in the budget.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="gui-bussiness">
+ <title>Business Windows</title>
+
+ <sect2 id="business-customer-overview">
+ <title>Customers Overview</title>
+
+ <para>To open the <guilabel>Customers Overview</guilabel> window, click
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Customer </guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Customers
+ Overview</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <table id="business-customer-overview-toolbar-table">
+ <title>Customers Overview - Toolbar Buttons</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Toolbar Buttons
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the selected customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New Invoice</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new invoice (by default it is for the selected customer)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Customer Listing</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Show customer aging overview for all customers
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table id="business-customer-overview-context-table">
+ <title>Customer context menu</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Context menu item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Rename Page</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit Customer</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the selected customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New Invoice</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new invoice
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Customer Report</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Show customer report
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The customer context menu appears if you right click on a customer in the list.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="business-vendor-overview">
+ <title>Vendors Overview</title>
+
+ <para>To open the <guilabel>Vendors Overview</guilabel> window, click
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Vendor </guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Vendors
+ Overview</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <table id="business-vendor-overview-toolbar-table">
+ <title>Vendors Overview - Toolbar Buttons</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Toolbar Buttons
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the selected vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New Bill</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new bill (by default it is for the selected vendor)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Vendor Listing</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Show vendor aging overview for all vendors
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table id="business-vendor-overview-context-table">
+ <title>Vendor context menu</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Context menu item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Rename Page</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit Vendor</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the selected vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New Bill</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new bill
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Vendor Report</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Show vendor report
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The vendor context menu appears if you right click on a vendor in the list.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="business-employee-overview">
+ <title>Employees Overview</title>
+
+ <para>To open the <guilabel>Employees Overview</guilabel> window, click
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guimenuitem>Employee </guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Employees
+ Overview</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <table id="business-employee-overview-toolbar-table">
+ <title>Employees Overview - Toolbar Buttons</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Toolbar Buttons
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the selected employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New Voucher</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new voucher (by default it is for the selected employee)
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table id="business-employee-overview-context-table">
+ <title>Employee context menu</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Context menu item
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Description
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Rename Page</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Edit Employee</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Edit the selected employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>New Voucher</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Create a new voucher
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para><guibutton>Employee Report</guibutton>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Show employee report
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The employee context menu appears if you right click on an employee in the list.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/help/de/Help_ch_Reports.xml b/help/de/Help_ch_Reports.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b955f73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/help/de/Help_ch_Reports.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,3191 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter SYSTEM "gnc-docbookx.dtd">
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 2.0.x
+ Last modified: January 20th 2017
+ modified: December 7th 2009
+ modified: May 13th 2007
+ modified: November 28th 2006
+ modified: August 12th 2006
+ modified: February 28th 2005
+
+ Maintainers:
+ Alex Aycinena <alex.aycinena at gmail.com>
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
+
+ Author:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="Reports">
+ <title>Reports And Charts</title>
+
+ <para>&untranslated-de;
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This section is a <quote>work in process</quote>. Some of the material has not been reviewed for
+ V2.0. While it may not be strictly accurate, it is at least a "guide".
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <sect1 id="report-intro">
+ <title>Introduction</title>
+
+ <para>Reports and Charts give &app; the ability to present an overview of financial data in various ways.
+ This can range from a simple summary of account totals to an advanced portfolio view. This
+ section will present an explanation of the main &app; reports and how to adjust them.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To run a report or chart, click on the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu, then either select a report (it will open with standard options), or click on
+ <guibutton> Saved Report Configuration</guibutton> to select a report you have previously
+ configured and saved.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Once the report has opened, click on the <emphasis>toolbar</emphasis> button
+ <guibutton>Options</guibutton> to configure the report as needed, for example to set the
+ report date or select accounts.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If you intend to save a report configuration, you should choose a named report date option such as
+ <emphasis>Today</emphasis> rather than enter a specific date so it is not necessary to enter
+ a specific date again in future reports.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If you often run a report with a date as at the start or end of an accounting period, set the
+ accounting period start and end dates in
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Accounting
+ Period</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ then select appropriate report date options. See <xref linkend="prefs-accounting-period" />.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If you cannot find a specific report to suit your requirements, you may be able to use the
+ <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> assistant (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ ) to select a set of transactions, and then report them using
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Account Report</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . Further formatting or analysis may be done by copying and pasting the report into a
+ spreadsheet.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>After you have configured a report, you can save the configuration for future use by clicking either
+ the <guibutton>Save Report Configuration</guibutton> or <guibutton>Save Report Configuration
+ As...</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-saving">
+ <title>Saving a Report Configuration</title>
+
+ <para>To save a report configuration for future use, while the required report tab is selected, go to the
+ report options, select the <emphasis>General</emphasis> tab and change the <emphasis>Report
+ Name</emphasis> to a meaningful unique name. Do not confuse this with the <emphasis>Report
+ Title</emphasis> which prints at the top of a report.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Click the <guibutton>Save Report Configuration</guibutton> or <guibutton>Save Report Configuration
+ As...</guibutton> button. This will store your customized report options in a file below
+ your home directory.
+<!-- FIXME by adding the wiki page to the appendix -->
+ The exact location depends on your OS, its version and the &app; version. See
+ <ulink url="&url-wiki;Configuration_Locations#GTK_CONFIG_HOME">wiki:Configuration_Locations#GTK_CONFIG_HOME</ulink>,
+ <ulink url="&url-wiki;Configuration_Locations#GNC_DATA_HOME">GNC_DATA_HOME</ulink> and
+ <ulink url="&url-wiki;Configuration_Locations#In_GNC_DATA_HOME">Files in
+ GNC_DATA_HOME</ulink> Then it is
+ <filename>GNC_DATA_HOME/saved-reports-<replaceable>version</replaceable></filename>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The first time you save a report with a name that has not already been saved, you can use either the
+ <guibutton>Save Report Configuration</guibutton> or the <guibutton>Save Report Configuration
+ As...</guibutton> button. You can modify the report name before saving it.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>After a report configuration for a specific name has been saved, the <guibutton>Save Report
+ Configuration</guibutton> button will immediately update the saved report configuration
+ without giving the opportunity to save the configuration with a new name. Use the
+ <guibutton>Save Report Configuration As...</guibutton> button to save the current report
+ configuration with a new name.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>After your customized report has been saved, it is available for use by the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu><guimenuitem>Saved Report Configurations</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu and it will also be listed when starting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu><guisubmenu>Sample & Custom</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Custom
+ Multicolumn Report</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-working">
+ <title>Working with Saved Report Configurations</title>
+
+ <para>Selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Reports</guimenu><guimenuitem>Saved Report Configurations</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ will open a dialog window with the list of the <emphasis>Saved Report
+ Configurations</emphasis> you have previously created. In this context <emphasis>Saved
+ Report Configurations</emphasis> means the set of customized settings for standard reports.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Saved Report Configurations</emphasis> window lists each of your previously saved
+ report configurations, and 3 small buttons at the end of each. These buttons perform the
+ following actions
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Load (and run) report configuration. Double clicking a report configuration also performs this
+ action.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Edit report configuration name. This enables a report configuration to be renamed.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Delete report configuration.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="report-config">
+ <title>Configuring Reports and Charts</title>
+
+ <para>&app; reports have many configuration options. First, run the original report itself. Then, access
+ the report options with the <guibutton>Options</guibutton> button on the
+ <emphasis>toolbar</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Check changed Graphic Engine Options
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-opt-btns">
+ <title>Report Options Buttons</title>
+
+ <para>After modifying report options, either
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button to apply the changes, regenerate the report and close the
+ options window.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>or
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Click the <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> button to apply the changes, regenerate the report and leave
+ the options window open for possible further changes. In this case, both the
+ <guibutton>Apply</guibutton> and <guibutton>OK</guibutton> buttons will be disabled,
+ indicating changes have been applied, until further changes are made.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>or
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Click the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button to close the options window without applying any
+ unapplied changes.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-common">
+ <title id="report-common.title">Common Report Options</title>
+
+ <para>Many reports share similar options. Some common ones include:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Report Name: Set the title of the report. This is also used to print the report for later viewing.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Date Options: Reports typically specify either a single date, or a date range, for the report. Dates
+ can be specified in two ways, either directly (using the date selector), or by selecting
+ a relative date from the menu. Relative dates allow you to specify dates like
+ <guilabel>Beginning of this year</guilabel> or <guilabel>Today</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If you often run a report with a date as at the start or end of an accounting period, set the
+ accounting period start and end dates in
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Accounting
+ Period</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ then select appropriate report date options. See
+ <xref linkend="prefs-accounting-period" />.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Step Size: This option is used on bar charts to determine the interval which each bar represents.
+ Typical values are daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Accounts: Select the appropriate accounts for the report. Note that in some reports only certain
+ types of accounts can be selected. For example, an expense piechart only allows expense
+ accounts to be selected.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Show Long Account Names: This option allows displaying either short account names (for example,
+ Power) or long account names (for example, Utilities:Power).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Include Subaccounts?: Summary reports typically have an include all subaccounts option, which if
+ selected ensures that all subaccounts are included if the parent account is.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Depth: This option allows the selection of how many levels the report displays subaccounts. If the
+ subaccounts go deeper than selected, an overall value for all the subaccounts is
+ calculated and included in a total. To make sure every account selected is individually
+ displayed, select <guibutton>All</guibutton>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Style Sheet: Select a Style Sheet. Style sheets control how reports are displayed. At the moment,
+ there are four style sheets: <guilabel>Default</guilabel>, <guilabel>Easy</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Footer</guilabel> and <guilabel>Technicolor</guilabel>. You can customize each
+ of these from the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Style Sheets...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item. This is described in the <xref linkend="change-style"></xref>
+<!--Changing Style Sheets-->
+ section.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Plot Dimensions: There are width and height options for most charts, which specify the displayed
+ dimensions (in pixels).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Report Currency: Select the report currency. Generally, values will be converted to this currency
+ for display.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The default Report Currency is defined in
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ Reports tab. See <xref linkend="prefs-reports" />.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Price Source: Select how stock and currency prices are calculated in this report. Choose between:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Nearest in time (default for most reports): A price retrieved from the prices database on the date
+ nearest to the date of the report or of the datum for time-series reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Most recent: The latest price in the price database.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Average Cost: The amount-weighted <emphasis>net</emphasis> average of <emphasis>all</emphasis>
+ splits exchanging the commodity for another <emphasis>regardless of
+ account</emphasis>. Gain/loss splits are <emphasis>included</emphasis> in the
+ calculation.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Weighted Average: The <emphasis>gross</emphasis> amount-weighted average price of
+ <emphasis>all</emphasis> splits exchanging the commodity for another
+ <emphasis>regardless of account</emphasis>. Gain/Loss splits are
+ <emphasis>not</emphasis> in the calculation.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ More information on Average Cost and Weighted Average may be found in the Investments
+ chapter of The Tutorial and Concepts Guide.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Totals: Charts display totals in the chart legend if this option is selected.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Maximum Slices: Controls the maximum number of slices displayed in a piechart - other accounts will
+ be placed in a slice marked Other.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Maximum Bars: Controls the maximum number of bars displayed in a barchart.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Display Columns: Choose columns to show from the register.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="report-classes">
+ <title>Reports Listed By Class</title>
+
+ <para>&app; has classified the main types of reports into major classes. These are all available under the
+ Reports menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-general">
+ <title>General Reports</title>
+
+ <para>The General Reports include the Account Summary Report, the Future Scheduled Transactions Summary,
+ and the Transaction Report and also the reports in the Sample & Custom menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Account Summary</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Future Scheduled Transactions Summary</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Transaction Report</title>
+
+ <para>This report lists transactions in selected accounts during a specified financial period. Two fields
+ may be optionally used for sorting and totalling.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect4 id="report-txrpt-opts">
+ <title>Report Options</title>
+
+ <figure>
+ <title><emphasis>Transaction Report, Report Options</emphasis></title><screenshot id="Help_TxRptOpt_Screen">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_TxRptOpt_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Geert Janssens" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_TxRptOpt_Screen.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Geert Janssens" ></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Transaction Report, Report Options screen</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This is an image of the <emphasis>Transaction Report, Report Options, Display tab.</emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Accounts tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Accounts</guilabel>: Select one or more accounts to be reported.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are 4 buttons to aid account selection
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Select All
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Select all accounts
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Clear All
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ Clear the selection and unselect all accounts
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Select Children
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Select all descendants of selected account
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Select Default
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Select the default account selection
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Hidden Accounts</guilabel>: Show accounts that have been marked hidden.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Filter By</guilabel>: Optionally select accounts to be either included or excluded
+ depending on Filter type
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Hidden Accounts</guilabel>: Show accounts that have been marked hidden in the Filter
+ By list of accounts
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Filter Type</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ None
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Do not do any filtering
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Include Transactions to/from Filter Accounts
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ Include Transactions to/from Filter Accounts only
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Exclude Transactions to/from Filter Accounts
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ Exclude Transactions to/from all Filter Accounts
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reset defaults button</guilabel>: Reset all values to their defaults
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Display tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date</guilabel> refers to the 'posted date' i.e. effective date of a transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reconciled Date</guilabel> refers to the 'date of reconciliation' of a transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Num</guilabel> is commonly used for check numbers.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel> is a description of the transaction
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Memo</guilabel> is the memo field of a transaction. This can be used as a secondary
+ description of a transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notes</guilabel>: Display the notes if the memo is unavailable
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Name</guilabel> will print the account name containing the transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use Full Account Name</guilabel> if the account name is enabled, this option will display
+ the full account name hierarchy.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Code</guilabel> this refers to the 'account code' related to the account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Detail Level</guilabel>
+ <footnote id='report-fn-v3-dl'>
+ <para>Before &app; 3.0 <emphasis>Detail Level</emphasis> was called <emphasis>Style</emphasis> on the
+ General tab.
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ : One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Single
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Display 1 line per transaction,
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Multi-Line
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Display a transaction header and 1 line per split.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+
+ <para>If <emphasis>Detail Level</emphasis> is <emphasis>Multi-Line</emphasis>, check boxes <emphasis>Other
+ Account Name</emphasis> and <emphasis>Use Full Other Account Name</emphasis> are
+ automatically deselected and disabled, and the <emphasis>Transfer</emphasis>
+ column is not reported.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Other Account Name</guilabel>: For multi-split transactions, this parameter should be
+ unticked. See below for more details.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use Full Other Account Name</guilabel> will enable display of full corresponding account
+ name.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Other Account Code</guilabel> will enable display of corresponding account code.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Shares</guilabel>: Display number of shares
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Price</guilabel>: Display share prices
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Amount</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ None
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Do not display Amount
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Single
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Single column display
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Double
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Two column display
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Subtotal Table</guilabel> will add a summary table for the various subtotals generated in
+ the report. It lists the same subtotals generated in tabular form.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Running Balance</guilabel> refers to the running balance of the account holding the
+ transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Totals</guilabel> will add a 'Grand Total' line adding all transactions in the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sign Reverses</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Global Preference
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Use reversing option specified in global preference.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ None
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Do not display signs reversed
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Credit Accounts
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Reverse amount display for Liability, Payable, Equity, Credit Card and
+ Income accounts
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Income and Expense
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Reverse amount display for Income and Expense accounts
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reset defaults button</guilabel> Reset all values to their defaults
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Filter tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account Name Filter</guilabel> will include only selected accounts containing the
+ substring. Alternatively, if the next option is checked, the account name filter
+ will be matched according to full POSIX regular expressions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use regular expressions for account name filter</guilabel> toggles regular expressions for
+ account name filter.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Transaction Filter</guilabel> will include only transactions which contain this substring
+ in the description, notes, or memo. Alternatively if the next option is checked,
+ the filter will be matched using full POSIX regular expressions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Use regular expressions for transaction filter</guilabel> toggles regular expressions for
+ the transaction filter.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reconcile Status</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ All
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Show all transactions
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Unreconciled
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Unreconciled only
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Cleared
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Cleared only
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Reconciled
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Reconciled only
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Void Transactions</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Non-void only
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Show only non-voided transactions
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Void only
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Show only voided transactions
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Both
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Show both and include voided transactions in totals
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Closing transactions</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Excluding closing transactions
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Show only regular transactions
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Show both closing and regular transactions
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Show both regular and closing transactions
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Show closing transactions only
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Show closing transactions only
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reset defaults button</guilabel>: Reset all values to their defaults
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>General tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Report name</guilabel>: Enter a descriptive name for this report
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Stylesheet</guilabel>: Select Default, Easy, Footer or Technicolor
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Start Date</guilabel>: Enter or select a specific Start Date
+ </para>
+
+ <para>or select one of the following named start date options which will be used to determine the start
+ date each time the report is run
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Today
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The current date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Start of this month
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ First day of the current month
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Start of previous month
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ First day of the previous month
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Start of current quarter
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ First day of the current quarterly accounting period
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Start of previous quarter
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ First day of the previous quarterly accounting period
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Start of this year
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ First day of the current calendar year
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Start of previous year
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ First day of the previous calendar year
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Start of accounting period
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ First day of the accounting period as defined in the global preferences
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>End Date</guilabel>: Enter or select a specific End Date,
+ </para>
+
+ <para>or select one of the following named end date options which will be used to determine the end date
+ each time the report is run
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Today
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The current date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ End of this month
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Last day of the current month
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ End of previous month
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Last day of the previous month
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ End of current quarter
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Last day of the current quarterly accounting period
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ End of previous quarter
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Last day of the previous quarterly accounting period
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ End of this year
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Last day of the current calendar year
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ End of previous year
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Last day of the previous calendar year
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ End of accounting period
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Last day of the accounting period as defined in the global preferences
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Detail Level</guilabel><footnoteref linkend='report-fn-v3-dl'/>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Single
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Display 1 line
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Multi-Line
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Display N lines
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Common Currency</guilabel>: Convert all transactions into a common currency
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Report's currency</guilabel>: Select the currency to display values
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show original currency amount</guilabel> Also show original currency amounts
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Table for Exporting</guilabel>: Formats the table for cut & paste exporting with extra
+ cells
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Add options summary</guilabel>: Adds an informative text describing options that were
+ changed by user. This is mainly useful for troubleshooting reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reset defaults button</guilabel>: Reset all values to their defaults
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Sorting tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Primary Key</guilabel>: Primary Sort Key. One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ None
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Do not sort
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Account Name
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort and subtotal by account name
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Account Code
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort and subtotal by account code
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Date
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Reconciled Date
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by the reconciled date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Reconciled Status
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by the reconciled status
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Register Order
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort as within the register
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Other Account Name
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by account transferred from/to's name
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Other Account Code
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by account transferred from/to's code
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Amount
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by amount
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Description
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by description
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Number
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by check/transaction number
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Memo
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Sort by memo
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Primary Subtotal</guilabel>: Subtotal according to the primary key
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Primary Subtotal for Date Key</guilabel>: Do a date subtotal. Only configurable if primary
+ key is date or reconciled date. One of None, weekly, monthly, quarterly or
+ yearly
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Primary Sort Order</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Ascending
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Smallest to largest, earliest to latest
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Descending
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Largest to smallest, latest to earliest
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Secondary Key</guilabel>: Secondary Sort Key. Same options as Primary Key
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Secondary Subtotal</guilabel>: Subtotal according to the secondary key
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Secondary Subtotal for Date Key</guilabel>: Do a date subtotal. Only configurable if
+ primary key is date or reconciled date. One of None, weekly, monthly, quarterly
+ or yearly
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Secondary Sort Order</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Ascending
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Smallest to largest, earliest to latest
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Descending
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Largest to smallest, latest to earliest
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Full Account Name</guilabel>: Show the full account name for subtotals and subtitles
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Account Code</guilabel>: Show the account code for subtotals and subtitles
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Account Description</guilabel>: Show the account description for subtitles
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Informal Debit/Credit Headers</guilabel>: Show informal names for debit/credit in the
+ subtitles. This requires that subtotal is enabled, and the primary or sortkey is
+ account or account code.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Add indenting columns</guilabel>: Add columns to align transactions within the same
+ grouping together, and can be useful to highlight groups.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show subtotals only (hide transactional data)</guilabel>: Will hide transactions. This may
+ be useful for reports whereby only subtotals are required.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Reset defaults button</guilabel>: Reset all values to their defaults
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect4>
+
+ <sect4 id="report-txrpt-splits">
+ <title>Displaying Split Account Details</title>
+
+ <para>This is controled by the <emphasis>Detail Level</emphasis><footnoteref linkend='report-fn-v3-dl'/>
+ option on the Display tab.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In <emphasis>Single</emphasis> line mode, there's only one line per transaction. So you can have the
+ account name on one side of the equation and
+ <orderedlist numeration="loweralpha" spacing="compact">
+ <listitem>
+ <para>the other <replaceable>account name</replaceable> if there's only one other split in the transaction
+ or
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><computeroutput>Split</computeroutput> if there are multiple other splits in the transaction. You
+ can't display multiple "other" account names in one line. There's just no room for
+ it.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In the case of <emphasis>Multi-Line</emphasis> mode, this report uses a completely different
+ concept. For each transaction, every split (both the split in this account and the
+ split(s) in the other account(s) !) is printed on a separate line. And every split
+ really means every split: both the split which belongs in the account being reported and
+ the split(s) in the other account(s) that balance the transaction. So even the most
+ basic transaction, with only two splits (this account and other account) will print two
+ lines in multiline mode.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>For a simple transaction like this
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="4">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Description</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Account</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Debit</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Credit</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Cheques Received
+ </entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Multiple Payers
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Income Account
+ </entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>
+ £30.00
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>
+ Bank Account
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ £30.00
+ </entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+
+ <para>then on a Transaction Report for the bank account the details appear pretty much as above.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>For clarity of the accounts, you might enter transactions with multiple splits referring to the same
+ account. For example, the above transaction might well be entered like this
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="4">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Description</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Account</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Debit</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <emphasis>Credit</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Cheques Received
+ </entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ First Payer
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Income Account
+ </entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>
+ £10.00
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Second Payer
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Income Account
+ </entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>
+ £20.00
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry></entry>
+ <entry>
+ Bank Account
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ £30.00
+ </entry>
+ <entry></entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+
+ <para>When this transaction is printed on the bank account's Transaction Report in
+ <emphasis>Single</emphasis> line mode, then under <emphasis>other account</emphasis> it
+ simply prints the word <emphasis>split</emphasis> instead of the account name.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To display the additional split detail, you need to set <emphasis>Single/Multi-Line</emphasis> to
+ <emphasis>Multi-Line</emphasis> and then tick <emphasis>Display</emphasis> ->
+ <emphasis>Account Name</emphasis>. Do <emphasis>not</emphasis> tick
+ <emphasis>Display</emphasis>-><emphasis>Other Account Name</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>You can choose whether or not to turn off the full account name using <emphasis>Display</emphasis>
+ -> <emphasis>Use Full Account Name.</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Use Full Other Account Name</emphasis> has no effect in <emphasis>Multi-Line</emphasis>
+ mode.
+ </para>
+ </sect4>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-assets">
+ <title>Assets & Liabilities</title>
+
+ <para>The Assets & Liabilities reports includes the Balance Sheet report, Investment reports and the
+ Net Worth report.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Advanced Portfolio:
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Columns
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account</guilabel>: Stock Account
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Symbol</guilabel>: Ticker Symbol/Abbreviation as defined in the Security Editor. A report
+ option can suppress this column.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Listing</guilabel>: Type as defined in the Security Editor. A report option can suppress
+ this column.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Shares</guilabel>: Number of shares (quantity). A report option sets how many decimal
+ places to show. A report option can suppress this column.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Price</guilabel>: Unit market price as at report date. A report option can suppress this
+ column.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Basis</guilabel>: Cost of all shares acquired by any means, including brokerage fees if
+ the option to include them is checked. Report option <emphasis>Basis calculation
+ method</emphasis> can be set to Average, LIFO or FIFO.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Value</guilabel>: Number of shares * Unit market price as at report date
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Money In</guilabel>: Sum of the cost of stock purchased, excluding stock acquired as part
+ of a Dividend Reinvestment Plan. I.e. External money used to purchase shares.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Money Out</guilabel>: Money from selling shares or a spin off transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Realized Gain</guilabel>: Money received for selling shares minus basis for shares sold,
+ minus brokerage fees for the sale if the option to include them in basis is checked.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Unrealized Gain</guilabel>: Value less Basis for unsold shares
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Gain</guilabel>: Realized Gain + Unrealized Gain
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Rate of Gain</guilabel>: Total Gain / Money In * 100 (from &app; 2.6.1 onwards)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Income</guilabel>: Total of all income transactions associated with a stock account.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>To include income from dividends which are not reinvested (if there is no split to the stock account
+ in the income transaction, the report has no way of associating the income with a
+ particular stock) :
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Ensure there is a dummy transaction split to the stock account with quantity 0, price 1 and value 0
+ in the dividend transaction. Enter the dummy stock split with no values in the
+ dividend account and it will create the transaction with price 1 even though you
+ cannot see the Price column in that register.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In GnuCash 2.6.6, this report was modified to simplify the recording of dividend and interest
+ payments. With this change it may not be necessary to include the dummy stock
+ split in the transaction. The report will find income (and expense) transactions
+ that are in the parent account of the stock account being reported on. This is
+ done by looking in the parent account for transactions that have exactly two
+ splits (not counting trading account splits) where the other split is to an income
+ or expense account with the same name as the stock's account.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>For example given an account structure like
+ </para>
+<literallayout>
+Assets (type ASSET)
+ Broker (type ASSET)
+ Widget Stock (type STOCK)
+Income (type INCOME)
+ Dividends (type INCOME)
+ Widget Stock (type INCOME)
+</literallayout>
+ <para>A transaction that debits the "Assets:Broker" account and credits the "Income:Dividends:Widget
+ Stock" account will count as income even though it doesn't have a split with
+ account "Assets:Broker:Widget Stock".
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This only works if the parent account ("Assets:Broker" in this case) is a Bank or Asset account and
+ the Income/Expense account has the same name as the stock account. It won't double
+ count transactions that have a dummy split since they won't have exactly two split
+ transactions.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>It will not work if the income or expense account split is to a subaccount of the account with the
+ same name as the stock account i.e. "Income:Dividends:Widget Stock:Franked"
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Brokerage Fees</guilabel>: Brokerage Fees
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Total Return</guilabel>: Total Gain + Income
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Rate of Return</guilabel>: Total Return / Money In * 100
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Common report options are described in <xref linkend="report-config"/>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Report Specific Options
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+<!-- list of Tabs -->
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Accounts Tab
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Include accounts with no shares</guilabel>: Unchecked (default) or checked.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+<!-- end of Accounts Tab -->
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Display Tab
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show ticker symbols</guilabel>: Checked (default) or unchecked. If unchecked, Symbol
+ column will be omitted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show listings</guilabel>: Checked (default) or unchecked. If unchecked, Listing column
+ (source of shares price quotes) will be omitted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show number of shares</guilabel>: Checked (default) or unchecked. If unchecked, Shares
+ column will be omitted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Share decimal places</guilabel>: The number of decimal places to show in the number of
+ shares. Default is 2.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show prices</guilabel>: Checked (default) or unchecked. If unchecked, Price column will be
+ omitted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+<!-- end of Display Tab -->
+ <listitem>
+ <para>General Tab
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Price Source</guilabel>: Nearest in time (default) or Most Recent.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Basis calculation method</guilabel>: Average (default), FIFO or LIFO.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Set preference for price list data</guilabel>: Checked (default): Use price list data. If
+ there is no relevant price list data, transaction prices will be used and there
+ will be a warning. Unchecked: Get prices from stock transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>How to report brokerage fees</guilabel>: Include in basis (default), Include in gain or
+ Ignore.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Asset Barchart:
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Asset Barchart report displays bars that present the value of all assets in a &app; file over
+ time. By default, the report shows all accounts in <emphasis>Accounts
+ Receivable</emphasis>, <emphasis>Current Assets</emphasis>, <emphasis>Fixed
+ Assets</emphasis>, <emphasis>Investments</emphasis> and Special Accounts (if they exist)
+ and it displays monthly bars for the current financial period. This report provides a
+ graphic view of the assets in the file over time.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Like all the generic reports, the user can assign a title and save the report with it's selected
+ options for re-use later.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The display is in the form of either a stacked barchart or simple barchart with an option to display
+ a table of the values.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This report calculates and displays a default of 8 bars or up to 24 separate asset accounts value at
+ the end of the day on several dates through a specified time period. The report
+ automatically selects the most significant accounts to display with all other selected
+ accounts summed as <emphasis>Other</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The report exploits the outline structure of the chart of accounts to allow the user to select top
+ level accounts and sub-accounts down to a user-selectable depth. Selected sub-accounts
+ below the selected depth are automatically <emphasis>summed up</emphasis> into the next
+ level when it is also selected. The default number of sub-account levels is 2, giving a
+ summary view. Increasing the number of sub-levels increases the detail available to
+ display. It is possible to un-select a higher level account and leave sub-accounts
+ selected to force greater detail to appear in the report.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>By default the report includes all <emphasis>asset</emphasis> accounts and sub-accounts, as well as
+ <emphasis>Imbalance</emphasis> and <emphasis>Orphan</emphasis> Special accounts in
+ whatever currencies or commodities may be present. The report's base currency is the
+ default currency of the &app; file but if the file has data for multiple currencies,
+ then it can be changed to another currency.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Since each account may be individually selected, the report can be designed to focus on a small
+ subset of data such as current assets or investments.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The overall interval of the report defaults to start at the start of the current accounting period
+ and to end at the end of the current accounting period. Numerous other starting choices
+ and ending choices are available.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The first bar shows the selected values at the end of the day on the first date chosen. There are a
+ number of choices for step size from <emphasis>day</emphasis> to
+ <emphasis>year</emphasis> with the default being <emphasis>month</emphasis>. Note that
+ if any step date would fall on the 29th, 30th or 31st in a month that does not have such
+ a date the next interval will be 31 days later. For that step only the date will
+ <emphasis>slip</emphasis> up to 3 days into the following month. This is true for
+ releases at least through 2.4.13. Bug 639049 is open in Bugzilla to modify this
+ behavior.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Currently, there is no option to start the report on the last day of any period. There is also no
+ option to show <emphasis>beginning</emphasis> balances or <emphasis>end of previous
+ step</emphasis> balances. This makes it difficult to correlate this report to business
+ quarterly reports, for example.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Net Worth linechart report, Liability barchart report and Net Worth barchart report are similar
+ except for the graphic type and default account groups selected.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Other features are customizable in a manner similar to other standard reports.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Asset Piechart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Average Balance:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Balance Sheet: This report summarizes assets, liabilities, and equity. When properly maintained,
+ assets should equal the sum of liabilities and equity. If that is not the case, there is
+ some kind of internal imbalance in the accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Balance Sheet using eguile-gnc:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>General Journal:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>General Ledger:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Investment Portfolio: This report summarizes the value of the stocks in the current portfolio.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Liability Barchart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Liability Piechart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Net Worth Barchart: Net worth is the difference between the value of assets or liabilities.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Net Worth Linechart: Net worth plotted over time. Net worth is the difference between the value of
+ assets or liabilities.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Price Scatterplot:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-biz">
+ <title>Business Reports</title>
+
+ <para>The Business Reports includes Customer and Vendor Reports and Printable Invoices as well as Aging
+ reports.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Customer Report</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Customer Summary</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Easy Invoice</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Employee Report</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Fancy Invoice</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Job Report</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Payable Aging</title>
+
+ <para>This report provides a listing of vendors and their aged outstanding balances. Vendors may be
+ included if they have posted business transactions (e.g. invoices) for the selected
+ accounts payable account. It shows their current balance, and how much they have due from
+ invoices over time periods 0-30 days, 31-60 days, 61-90 days, and over 90 days. The report
+ also contains links to each vendor and to their current vendor report.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Optionally, vendor address details may be also shown.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To export vendor address details, say in order to do a mail merge, select the optional vendor
+ address details in the report options display tab, apply the options to regenerate the
+ report, then copy and paste the report into a spreadsheet. Alternatively, the report can
+ be exported to a .html file, then read into a spreadsheet.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <sect4 id="report-pay-aging-opts">
+ <title>Report Options</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>See <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/> in the <emphasis>Configuring
+ Reports and Charts</emphasis> section of this help manual for more details of the
+ common options.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>General tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel> Report name</guilabel>: Enter a descriptive name for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Stylesheet</guilabel>: Select a style sheet for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>To</guilabel>: Select a date to report on or a named date. Transactions up to and
+ including the selected date will be used to calculate the outstanding aged
+ balances. See <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Report's currency</guilabel>: Select the currency to display the values in - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Price Source</guilabel>: Select the source of price information used for currency
+ conversion if needed. One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Average Cost
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The volume-weighted net average price of all exchanges.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Weighted Average (default)
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The volume-weighted gross average price of all exchanges up to the date
+ of the report
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Most recent
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The most recent recorded price
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Nearest in time
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The price recorded nearest in time to the report date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Multi-currency Totals</guilabel>: If not selected, all totals are shown in the report
+ currency.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sort By</guilabel>: Sort companies by one of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Name (default)
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Company name
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Total Owed
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Total amount owed to company
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Bracket Total Owed
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Amount owed in oldest bracket. If same, use next oldest
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sort Order</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Ascending (default)
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ 0 … 999,999.99, A … Z
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Descending
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ 999,999.99 … 0, Z … A
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show zero balance items</guilabel>: Show companies even if they have a zero outstanding
+ balance.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Due or Post Date</guilabel>: Leading date. Which date to use to determine aging. One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Due Date (default)
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Post Date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Payable Account</guilabel>: The accounts payable account used to select vendors to be
+ reported. Vendors are included if they have a posted business transaction
+ (usually an invoice) on or before the report date and also meet the
+ <emphasis>Show zero balance items</emphasis> criteria.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Display tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address Name</guilabel>: Display vendor address name. This, and other fields, may be
+ useful if copying this report to a spreadsheet for use in a mail merge.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 1</guilabel>: Display address line 1.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 2</guilabel>: Display address line 2.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 3</guilabel>: Display address line 3.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 4</guilabel>: Display address line 4.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Phone</guilabel>: Display address phone number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Fax</guilabel>: Display address fax number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Email</guilabel>: Display email address.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Active</guilabel>: Display vendor active status.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect4>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Printable Invoice</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Receivable Aging</title>
+
+ <para>This report provides a listing of customers and their aged outstanding balances. Customers may be
+ included if they have posted business transactions (e.g. invoices) for the selected
+ accounts receivable account. It shows their current balance, and how much they have
+ outstanding from invoices over time periods 0-30 days, 31-60 days, 61-90 days, and over 90
+ days. The report also contains links to each customer and to their current customer
+ report.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Optionally, customer address details may be also shown.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To export customer address details, say in order to do a mail merge, select the optional customer
+ address details in the report options display tab, apply the options to regenerate the
+ report, then copy and paste the report into a spreadsheet. Alternatively, the report can
+ be exported to a .html file, then read into a spreadsheet.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <sect4 id="report-rec-aging-opts">
+ <title>Report Options</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>See <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/> in the <emphasis>Configuring
+ Reports and Charts</emphasis> section of this help manual for more details of the
+ common options.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>General tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel> Report name</guilabel>: Enter a descriptive name for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Stylesheet</guilabel>: Select a style sheet for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>To</guilabel>: Select a date to report on or a named date. Transactions up to and
+ including the selected date will be used to calculate the outstanding aged
+ balances. See <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Report's currency</guilabel>: Select the currency to display the values in - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Price Source</guilabel>: Select the source of price information used for commodity
+ conversion if needed. One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Average Cost
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The volume-weighted net average price of all exchanges
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Weighted Average (default)
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The volume-weighted gross average price of all exchanges
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Most recent
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The most recent recorded price
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Nearest in time
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ The price recorded nearest in time to the report date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show Multi-currency Totals</guilabel>: If not selected, all totals are shown in the report
+ currency.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sort By</guilabel>: Sort companies by one of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Name (default)
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Company name
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Total Owed
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Total amount owed by company
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Bracket Total Owed
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Amount owed in oldest bracket. If same, use next oldest
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Sort Order</guilabel>: One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Ascending (default)
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ 0 … 999,999.99, A … Z
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Descending
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ 999,999.99 … 0, Z … A
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Show zero balance items</guilabel>: Show companies even if they have a zero outstanding
+ balance.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Due or Post Date</guilabel>: Leading date. Which date to use to determine aging. One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Due Date (default)
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Post Date
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Receivables Account</guilabel>: The accounts receivable account used to select customers
+ to be reported. Customers are included if they have a posted business
+ transaction (usually an invoice) on or before the report date and also meet the
+ <emphasis>Show zero balance items</emphasis> criteria.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Display tab</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address Source</guilabel>: Which customer address fields to display. One of
+ </para>
+
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Billing (default)
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Address fields from billing address.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ Shipping
+ </entry>
+ <entry>
+ Address fields from shipping address.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address Name</guilabel>: Display customer address name. This, and other fields, may be
+ useful if copying this report to a spreadsheet for use in a mail merge.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 1</guilabel>: Display address line 1.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 2</guilabel>: Display address line 2.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 3</guilabel>: Display address line 3.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Address 4</guilabel>: Display address line 4.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Phone</guilabel>: Display address phone number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Fax</guilabel>: Display address fax number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Email</guilabel>: Display email address.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Active</guilabel>: Display vendor active status.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect4>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Tax Invoice</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Vendor Report</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-income">
+ <title>Income & Expense</title>
+
+ <para>The Income & Expense reports includes the Cash Flow and Income Statement reports.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Cash Flow:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Equity Statement:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Expense Barchart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Expense Piechart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Expense vs Day of Week:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Income & Expense Chart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Income Barchart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Income Piechart:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Income Statement: This report summarizes sources of income and expenditure. (This report was called
+ Profit & Loss in gnucash-1.8.)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Income vs Day of Week:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Profit & Loss: This is the same report as the Income Statement but with a different title.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Trial Balance: This report summarizes sources of income and expenditure.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-sample">
+ <title>Sample & Custom</title>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Welcome Sample Report</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Custom Multicolumn Report</title>
+
+ <para>This report is used to place multiple reports into a single report window to examine a set of
+ financial information at a glance.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Sample Report with Examples</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-budget">
+ <title>Budget</title>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Budget Balance Sheet</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Budget Barchart</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Budget Flow</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Budget Income Statement</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Budget Profit & Loss</title>
+
+ <para></para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Budget Report</title>
+
+ <para>This report is used to compare budgeted and real amounts for selected accounts. It allows you to
+ review how well you follow the budget.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The report is generated as a table in which each row represents an account and each set of columns
+ shows the <emphasis>budgeted amount</emphasis>, the <emphasis>real amount</emphasis>, and
+ the <emphasis>difference</emphasis> between them for each report period.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Each entry in the <emphasis>real amount</emphasis> column is the sum of all the splits in the row's
+ account over the column's period. For example, if the report is set up for monthly
+ periods, the column is for May, and the row is for Expenses:Groceries, then the value will
+ be the sum of all Expenses:Groceries splits for that May.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The report supports selecting a range of periods instead all of them. Periods that are out of range
+ can be included in the report as the consolidated columns around the selected range. This
+ allows you to focus on particular periods, for example the current one, and is especially
+ useful for budgets with many periods. For example, if you have a 12 period budget you can
+ make a 3 column report with the format "(all periods before columns set) (current period
+ columns set) (all periods after columns set)" that is easily fits on the screen and allows
+ you to match values with account names.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Budget report options</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <para><note>
+ <para>Here we describe only options that are specific for the Budget Report. You can find information
+ about standard parameters in <xref linkend="report-config"/>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Show budget</emphasis> - include the budgeted values for the period
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Show actual</emphasis> - include the real values for the period
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Show difference</emphasis> - include the difference between budgeted and real values for
+ the period. Enabling this option does not force including budgeted and actual values
+ in the report
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Show Column with totals</emphasis> - Adds a final column set containing budgeted, real
+ value, and difference columns summing those values across all periods of the report.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Rollup budget amounts to parent</emphasis> - not used in the report, can be deleted or
+ should be fixed
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Include accounts with zero total balances and budget values</emphasis> - enables display
+ of accounts with no budget or splits in any period.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Budget</emphasis> - Select the budget to use for report generation
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Report for range of budget periods</emphasis> - Enables reporting on a subset of the
+ budget by selecting a beginning and an ending period.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Range start</emphasis> - a combobox with a list of options to select the start period:
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>First</emphasis> - select first budget period
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Previous</emphasis> - select previous period.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Current</emphasis> - select current period.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Next</emphasis> - select next period.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Last</emphasis> - select last budget period
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Manual</emphasis> - enables spinbox where you can select exact period
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The <emphasis>current</emphasis>, <emphasis>previous</emphasis>, and <emphasis>next</emphasis>
+ options select the period based on the date on which the report is run, with
+ <emphasis>current</emphasis> being the period in which the date falls,
+ <emphasis>previous</emphasis> being the one before that, and
+ <emphasis>next</emphasis> the period after. If the current date falls outside the
+ date range covered by the budget, the <emphasis>first</emphasis> or
+ <emphasis>last</emphasis> period will be used as appropriate.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Exact start period</emphasis> - options for select exact start period, enabled only if the
+ range start option is set to <emphasis>Manual</emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Range end</emphasis> - a combobox with a list of options to select the end period. Values
+ are the same as in <emphasis>Range start</emphasis> options
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Exact end period</emphasis> - the same as <emphasis>Exact start period</emphasis> but for
+ the end of range
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Include collapsed periods before selected</emphasis> - if on, then includes in the report
+ all budget periods, that are before selected period range, as a single consolidated
+ column set
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis>Include collapsed periods after selected</emphasis> - if on, then includes in the report
+ all budget periods, that are after selected period range, as a single consolidated
+ column set.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-regional">
+ <title>Country Specific Reports</title>
+
+ <highlights>
+ <para>Some report are only useful in specific regions. Each tax authority has other requirements. The
+ availability of this reports depend on your <ulink url="&url-wiki-locale;">Locale
+ Settings</ulink>. As there is currently not more than one report per country they are
+ merged into the <xref linkend="report-general"/>.
+ </para>
+ </highlights>
+
+ <important>
+ <para>To get useful data, the user has to segregate <emphasis>taxable</emphasis> and <emphasis>non
+ taxable</emphasis> income into different accounts, as well as
+ <emphasis>deductible</emphasis> and <emphasis>non deductible</emphasis> expenses. The user
+ must also set the <guilabel>TXF category</guilabel> of each tax related account. This can
+ be done by the <guimenuitem>Income Tax Information</guimenuitem> dialog, reachable by
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu><accel>E</accel>dit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Ta<accel>x</accel> Report
+ Options</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . Its usage is explained in <xref linkend="set-tax-options"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </important>
+
+ <sect3 id="report-taxreport">
+ <title>US: Tax Schedule Report and <acronym>TXF</acronym> Export</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This report is also visible, if no tax report for your region is available in &app;.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The tax schedule report lists all taxable income and deductible expense amounts used in the
+ preparation of US Income Tax returns. The purpose of the report is to provide a complete
+ audit trail for these amounts. The report is intended to be used by a tax payer to
+ manually prepare his or her own tax return, or alternatively, to be provided to a tax
+ preparer for that purpose. The report can also be used to generate an export of all tax
+ related income and expenses to a <acronym>TXF</acronym> (Tax eXchange Format) file (this
+ is in addition to exporting to the <acronym>HTML</acronym> format that all reports allow).
+ The <acronym>TXF</acronym> file can be imported into tax filing programs such as TaxCut or
+ TurboTax. The report should be run, inspected carefully for errors or omissions, and then
+ corrections made to transactions, report settings, currency conversion rates or the
+ account structure as needed. This process should be repeated as often as needed until all
+ the amounts on the report are correct before a final version is used and saved along with
+ the tax returns.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>For accounts specified in the report options (none = all) that are also flagged as
+ <guilabel>Tax-related</guilabel>, all transactions for the time period selected (also in
+ the report options) are included. The report sorts transactions by date within account
+ providing subtotals by account within tax code within Form or Schedule line number.
+ Support is also provided for multiple copies of and for sub-line items for selected
+ Forms/Schedules. Optionally uses special date processing to include federal estimated tax
+ payments after year end.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>All totals are in USD since this is the currency required for filing US Income Tax returns. Non-USD
+ transaction amounts are converted to USD using the transaction conversion rate to USD, if
+ available. If not, a conversion rate from the price database is used (either the date
+ nearest the transaction date or nearest the report date as specified in the report
+ options; if none is available, transaction amounts are converted to zero and the report
+ provides a comment accordingly). A complete audit trail of conversions is provided.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="report-taxreport-de">
+ <title>DE: Steuer-Bericht und <acronym>ElStEr</acronym> Export</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This report is only visible, if the language is set to <computeroutput>de |
+ deutsch</computeroutput>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+<!-- Umsatzsteuer-Voranmeldung …
+ siehe auch erweiterte Version in https://github.com/fellen/gnucash/tree/ESt -->
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="report-print">
+ <title>Printing or Exporting Reports and Charts</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Verify !!! How customize printing with Gnome?
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>&app; is able to print reports and to export the reports to <acronym>HTML</acronym> (web) pages. The
+ Print &app; Document dialog is accessed from the <guibutton>Print</guibutton> button on the
+ <emphasis>toolbar</emphasis> or go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ in the menu. To Export a report to a web page (<acronym>HTML</acronym>) select the
+ <guibutton>Export</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> and type in a file
+ name.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Most reports, being presented in HTML, can also be copied and pasted into a spreadsheet.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Print &app; Document dialog is used to select which Printer to send the print job to or to print
+ to a File. It also contains a Preview button to view the document before printing. Press Print
+ to send the job to the selected printer or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to dismiss the Print
+ dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Printing from an open register prints the Account Report, which is also called the Register Report.
+ This lists transactions in the account with a total. Other reports print as viewed in the
+ Report screen.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="report-create">
+ <title>Creating or Modifying Reports and Charts</title>
+
+ <para>It is possible to modify existing or write own reports, if the available ones are not suitable. To
+ do this you will need to know <application>Guile</application>, GNOME's implementation of
+ <emphasis>Scheme</emphasis>, which again is a <acronym>LISP</acronym>-like programming
+ language, and it is an excellent idea to have a copy of the &app; source code available.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <title>Introductory files in the source code</title>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><ulink url="&url-gh-gc-maint;gnucash/report/doc/report-html.txt">gnucash/report/doc/report-html.txt</ulink>
+ documents the <emphasis>reporting interface</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><ulink url="&url-gh-gc-maint;gnucash/report/reports/example/hello-world.scm">gnucash/report/reports/example/hello-world.scm</ulink>
+ is an example demonstrating different <emphasis>types of options</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-api">
+ <title>Accessing the &app; Application Programming Interface (<acronym>API</acronym>)</title>
+
+ <para>To get informations from your &app; book for your report it is also necessary to access data from
+ the &app; engine. This binding is generated by <application>Swig</application> and based on
+ a set of Scheme wrapper functions in
+ <ulink url="&url-gh-gc-maint;bindings/guile"><filename class='directory'>bindings/guile</filename></ulink>.
+ <footnote>
+ <para><emphasis>Up to version 2.0.5</emphasis> <application>G-Wrap</application> was used and the file was
+ <filename>src/g-wrap/gnc.html</filename>.
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Examine some of the other reports in
+ <ulink url="&url-gh-gc-maint;gnucash/report/"><filename class='directory'>gnucash/report/</filename></ulink>
+ for an indication of how they are used.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Some users started a table in <ulink url="&url-wiki-api-custom;" />.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>Because the above file only contains the syntax of the function you can use the nightly
+ <application>Doxygen</application> generated <acronym>API</acronym> documentation online for
+ the <ulink url="&url-doc-api-main;">bugfix branch</ulink> or
+ <ulink url="&url-doc-api-mast;">feature branch</ulink> to get more information about the
+ functions.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>After <ulink url="&url-wiki;Building">setting up a build environment</ulink> you can also generate
+ it locally by running
+<screen>
+# make users:
+make doc
+# ninja users:
+ninja doc
+</screen>
+ in your build directory and then open
+ <filename><replaceable>BUILDDIR</replaceable>/libgnucash/doc/html/index.html</filename> with
+ your preferred browser.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="report-render">
+ <title>Report Rendering</title>
+
+ <para>At present, reports are produced by calling a <acronym>HTML</acronym>-generation API, which outputs
+ a dialect of <acronym>HTML</acronym> and rendering this with a <acronym>HTML</acronym>
+ widget. This has limitations, particularly when trying to align objects precisely, as might
+ be necessary for printing onto pre-printed invoices for example.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>See also <xref linkend="report-print"/>.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/help/de/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml b/help/de/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bccd088
--- /dev/null
+++ b/help/de/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,6023 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter SYSTEM "gnc-docbookx.dtd">
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 2.0.x
+ Last modified: April 15th 2007
+ modified: August 12th 2006
+ modified: February 28th 2005
+
+ Maintainers:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
+
+ Author:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="ch_AccRegTools">
+ <title>Tools & Assistants</title>
+
+ <para>&untranslated-de;
+ </para>
+
+ <abstract>
+ <para>&app; offers many specialized <guimenu>Tools</guimenu>. These tools enable access to the enhanced
+ functionality of &app;. They are accessed via the <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> menu from any
+ window that displays the &app; standard menu. Some of these tools may be deactivated for
+ several reasons:
+ <itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+ <listitem>
+ <para>the tools is not appropriate for the current window,
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>the required software is not found on your system,
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>the package maintainer disabled it in the build process.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </abstract>
+
+ <sect1 id="tool-find">
+ <title>Find</title>
+
+ <para>The &app; <emphasis>Find</emphasis> assistant can be used to <link linkend="tool-find-txn">find
+ transactions</link> or to perform <link linkend="tool-find-bsnss">business related</link>
+ research on your data file.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-find-txn">
+ <title>Find Transaction</title>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> is used to search for transactions in &app; and display the
+ results in a register window. To open the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> dialog in
+ <guilabel>Split Search</guilabel> mode, you can type the keyboard shortcut
+ <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>f</keycap>
+ </keycombo>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Exactly which transactions are searched depends on where you invoke the tool from. If you start from
+ the main accounts hierarchy page, all transactions will be searched. If you start from an
+ individual account register, only transactions in that account will be searched. And if you
+ filter the transactions in a register using
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenuitem>View </guimenuitem><guimenuitem> Filter By... </guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ , then only transactions in that account and shown by the filter will be searched.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The first row of the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> dialog indicates that you are performing
+ a <guilabel>Split Search</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>There are two panes in the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel> dialog. The top pane contains the
+ <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> buttons and the bottom pane contains the <guilabel>Type
+ of Search</guilabel> selection.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are two buttons in the top of the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane. The left button
+ allows you to <guibutton>Add</guibutton> another criteria row to search for multiple
+ criteria. The existing criteria row needs to be completed before adding a new row. The right
+ button is used to <guilabel>Search for items where all criteria are met</guilabel> or
+ <guilabel>Search for items where any criteria are met</guilabel>. The <guilabel>all criteria
+ are met</guilabel> search requires all of the criteria rows to have at least one match. The
+ <guilabel>any criteria are met</guilabel> search requires only one of the criteria rows to
+ be matched.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The criteria row in the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane is used to combine different
+ criteria buttons (see table <xref linkend="tool-find-bttns" /> for a comprehensive list of
+ combinations)
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In the <guilabel>Type of Search</guilabel> pane there are five selections. The first option is
+ always enabled, the following three are available when you invoke the
+ <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem> option from a register window or after performing the
+ first <guibutton>Find</guibutton> if the <guimenuitem>Find...</guimenuitem> command was
+ invoked from any other window. The last option is available only for
+ <link linkend="tool-find-bsnss">Business search</link>.
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>New Search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Perform a new transaction search
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Refine current search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Search within the results of the previous search
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Add results to current search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Search based on the first set of criteria or the new criteria
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Delete results from current search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Discard any results that match the previous search results
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Search only if data are marked as active. This selector is greyed out for the <guilabel>Split
+ Search</guilabel> as it is meaningful only for
+ <link linkend="tool-find-bsnss">business related search</link>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>When selecting search criteria keep in mind that criteria are applied to individual splits or fields
+ in transactions, and that the entire transaction is included in the results. There is no
+ visual indication in the results to indicate which split or field met the search criteria.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>When search criteria are selected, you can press the <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button. You will be
+ presented with the search results in a new register tab. A report of the search results may
+ created and printed using
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu> Reports</guimenu><guimenuitem>Account Report</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . The Account Report has limited formatting options but, like all &app; reports, being in
+ html format, can be copied and pasted into a spreadsheet for further formatting.
+ Alternatively, the Account Report can be exported to an html file, and the html file may be
+ opened in a spreadsheet.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Press the <guibutton>Close</guibutton> button to close the <guilabel>Find Transaction</guilabel>
+ dialog.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-bttns">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Split Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Description
+ <footnote id="DMN">
+ <para>The Description, Memo, Number are common to all lines in a transaction.
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex
+ <footnote id="rgx">
+ <para><emphasis>regex</emphasis> means regular expression text search as used in various computer programs
+ such as <application>Perl</application>
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Memo<footnoteref linkend="DMN"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Number<footnoteref linkend="DMN"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Action
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Notes
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date Posted
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="17" valign="middle">
+ <para>Value
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>has credits or debits
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>less than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="17" valign="middle">
+ <para>Amount entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="17" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="17" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="17" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="17" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>less than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>not equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>greater than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>greater than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>has credits
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>less than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>less than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>not equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>greater than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>greater than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>has debits
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>less than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>less than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>not equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>greater than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>greater than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Shares
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is less than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Amount entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is less than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>equals
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is greater than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is greater than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Share Price
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is less than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Amount entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is less than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>equals
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is greater than
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is greater than or equal to
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Reconcile
+ <footnote>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> option applies the selected criteria to each line of a
+ transaction individually. Each transaction line may have only one of the
+ indicated values, but there is often a mix of values within a complete
+ transaction, so companion lines may not meet the selected criteria. See
+ separate note defining status values. For a detailed description of
+ transaction statuses see <xref linkend="trans-stts" />
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Not Cleared
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Cleared
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Reconciled
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Frozen
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Voided
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Balanced
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Account
+ <footnote>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Account</guilabel> option performs a search where the accounts selected in the
+ <guilabel>Choose Accounts</guilabel> dialog will both be searched individually
+ for results. This means that a match in any of the selected accounts will
+ either be displayed (matches any account) or discarded (matches no account).
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches any account
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Choose Accounts
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches no accounts
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>All Accounts
+ <footnote>
+ <para>The <guilabel>All Accounts</guilabel> option performs a search where accounts selected in the
+ <guilabel>Choose Accounts</guilabel> dialog will only return results that
+ match in both accounts.
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches all accounts
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Choose Accounts
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <sect3 id="tool-find-txn-criteria">
+ <title>Explanations of the Criteria</title>
+
+ <para>The <guibutton>Reconcile</guibutton> criterion deserves some more explanation. Think of the selected
+ reconciliation status buttons (<guibutton>Not Cleared</guibutton>,
+ <guibutton>Cleared</guibutton>, and so on) as a single group, joined with a logical
+ “or”. In other words, the selection “<guibutton>is </guibutton>”
+ or “<guibutton>is not</guibutton>” applies to the “or” of the
+ selected status buttons. The buttons which are left unselected are simply ignored.
+ (It’s not the same as saying the reconciliation status <emphasis>must not</emphasis>
+ be one of these.)
+ </para>
+
+ <para>For example: if you select <guibutton>Reconcile</guibutton> <guibutton>is</guibutton>
+ <guibutton>Cleared</guibutton> <guibutton>Reconciled</guibutton>, that means you’re
+ saying “I want all transactions which contain cleared splits OR reconciled
+ splits” (imagine an invisible “OR” between all the selected status
+ buttons). It’s the same as selecting <guibutton>Reconcile</guibutton>
+ <guibutton>is</guibutton> <guibutton>Cleared</guibutton>, then adding another search
+ criterion with the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, then on the new line selecting
+ <guibutton>Reconcile</guibutton> <guibutton>is</guibutton>
+ <guibutton>Reconciled</guibutton>, and finally selecting <guilabel>Search for items
+ where</guilabel> <guibutton>any criteria are met</guibutton>. In either case, &app; will
+ show you exactly the same set of transactions.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-find-bsnss">
+ <title>Find Customer, Invoice, Job, Vendor, Bill, Employee, Expense Voucher</title>
+
+ <para>The business find assistant is used to search for business related items (Customer, Invoice, Job,
+ Vendor, Bill, Employee, Expense Voucher). To open the business search dialog select the
+ desired item to <guimenuitem>Find</guimenuitem> from the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Business</guimenu><guisubmenu>Customer/Vendor/Employee </guisubmenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ submenus.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>The titlebar and the first row of the assistant dialog reports the item type you are searching for:
+ <guilabel>Customer, Invoice, Job, Vendor, Bill, Employee, Expense Voucher</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>There are two panes in the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> dialog. The top pane contains the
+ <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> buttons and the bottom pane contains the <guilabel>Type
+ of Search</guilabel> selection.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title><guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> section</title>
+
+ <para>There are two buttons in the top of the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane. The left button
+ allows you to <guibutton>Add</guibutton> another criteria row to search for multiple
+ criteria.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The existing criteria row needs to be completed before adding a new row.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The right button is used to <guilabel>Search for items where all criteria are met</guilabel> or
+ <guilabel>Search for items where any criteria are met</guilabel>. The <guilabel>all
+ criteria are met</guilabel> search requires all of the criteria rows to have at least one
+ match. The <guilabel>any criteria are met</guilabel> search requires only one of the
+ criteria rows to be matched.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The criteria row in the <guilabel>Search Criteria</guilabel> pane is used to combine different
+ criteria buttons (see tables <xref linkend="tool-find-cstmr" />,
+ <xref linkend="tool-find-nvc" />, <xref linkend="tool-find-jb" />,
+ <xref linkend="tool-find-vndr" />, <xref linkend="tool-find-bll" />,
+ <xref linkend="tool-find-mply" /> <xref linkend="tool-find-vx" /> for a comprehensive list
+ of combinations)
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title><guilabel>Type of Search</guilabel> section</title>
+
+ <para>In the <guilabel>Type of Search</guilabel> pane there are five selections. The first and alst
+ options are always selectable while the following three are available only when you
+ perform the first search by setting some search criteria and pressing the
+ <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>New Search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Perform a new search
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Refine current search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Search within the results of the previous search
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Add results to current search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Search based on the first set of criteria or the new criteria
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Delete results from current search</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Discard any results that match the previous search results
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Search only active data</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Search only if data are marked as active.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>The rest of the search dialog</title>
+
+ <para>When search criteria are selected, you can press the <guibutton>Find</guibutton> button. You will be
+ presented with the list of search results in the same <guilabel>Find</guilabel> dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Aside from the results, &app; gives you some buttons to manage the highlighted result.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>In the bottom right of the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> dialog there is a button that allows you to
+ create a <guibutton>New</guibutton> business item.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Press the <guibutton>Close</guibutton> button to close the <guilabel>Find</guilabel> assistant
+ dialog.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>List of search criteria buttons</title>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-cstmr">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Customer Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Company Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Customer ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Billing Contact
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Shipping Contact
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-nvc">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Invoice Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Invoice ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Company Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date Opened
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is Posted?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date Posted
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is Paid?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Billing ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Invoice Notes
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Invoice Owner
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="3" valign="middle">
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Select...
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Job
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="3" valign="middle">
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Job
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-jb">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Job Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Job Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Job Number
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Billing ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Only Active?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Owner's Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-vndr">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Vendor Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Company Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Vendor ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Billing Contact
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-bll">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Bill Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Bill ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Company Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Due Date
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date Opened
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is Posted?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date Posted
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is Paid?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Billing ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Bill Notes
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Bill Owner
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="3" valign="middle">
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Select...
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Job
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="3" valign="middle">
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Job
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-mply">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Employee Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Employee Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Employee Username
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Employee ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="tool-find-vx">
+ <title>Search criteria buttons - Expense Voucher Search</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="8" rowsep="1">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 1
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 2
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 3
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 4
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 5
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 6
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 7
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Button 8
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Voucher ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Employee Name
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Due Date
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date Opened
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is Posted?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date Posted
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Date selection field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="5" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is before or on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not on
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is on or after
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is Paid?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>set true
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="1" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Billing ID
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Voucher Notes
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>contains
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Is entry Case Insensitive?
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="2" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>matches regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>does not match regex<footnoteref linkend="rgx"/>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Voucher Owner
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="3" valign="middle">
+ <para>is
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Criteria entry field
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Select...
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para>Remove row
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows="7" valign="middle">
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Job
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows="3" valign="middle">
+ <para>is not
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Customer
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Vendor
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Employee
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>Job
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-sched-slr">
+ <title>Since Last Run Assistant</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> assistant is run automatically when &app; is started. It is
+ used to enter into the register any transactions that are due to be automatically entered (see
+ <xref linkend="trans-sched"></xref>). The run on &app; start can be altered in the
+ <link linkend="prefs-sched">Scheduled Transactions</link> tab of the <guilabel>&appname;
+ Preferences</guilabel>. To run the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> assistant manually, go
+ to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guilabel>Actions</guilabel><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Since Last Run...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> assistant window you can see three columns:
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist termlength="8">
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Transaction</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The name assigned in the <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guilabel> that identifies the
+ scheduled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>State</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guilabel>state</guilabel> column of the scheduled transaction can be one of the following:
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Click on the <guilabel>state</guilabel> field in the row of a transaction to change its state (this
+ option is available only if the <guilabel>state</guilabel> field is not
+ <emphasis>empty</emphasis>)
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <variablelist termlength="8">
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Ignored</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If a scheduled transaction is being displayed, either to be created or as a reminder, the user can
+ set the status to <guilabel>Ignored</guilabel> to skip this event. The scheduled
+ transaction will not be entered in the register and the next reminder for this
+ scheduled transaction will be the next occurrence. For instance, if you have a
+ scheduled transaction set up with a reminder to transfer $500 at the end of the
+ month to your <emphasis>savings</emphasis> account but you bought yourself a
+ computer this month and don’t have the money for this month’s transfer
+ then you would set the status to <guilabel>Ignored</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Postponed</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If a scheduled transaction has been listed with a status <guilabel>To-create</guilabel> but you want
+ to hold it and not have it entered to your register yet, then you can set it to
+ <guilabel>Postponed</guilabel>. When at some later time you change it back to
+ <guilabel>To-create</guilabel> it will be created with the original posted-date.
+ If you want to change that you must edit the transaction after it's created.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Reminder</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>You are <emphasis>n</emphasis> days from the scheduled transaction due date. The number of days
+ <emphasis>n</emphasis> to remind in advance, is set either in the
+ <guilabel>&appname; Preferences</guilabel> <link linkend="prefs-sched">Scheduled
+ Transactions</link> tab or in the <guilabel>Overview</guilabel> tab of the
+ <link linkend="sched-editor">Scheduled Transaction Editor</link>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>To-create</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This scheduled transaction will be automatically created when you press <guibutton>OK</guibutton>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><emphasis>Empty</emphasis></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>An empty field means that no operations are pending for the scheduled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <para>At the bottom of the window there are two buttons:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel>
+ window without creating the transactions scheduled to be entered.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button closes the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> window and
+ applies the pending operations.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>At the bottom right of the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel> window there is also an option that
+ allows to <guilabel>Review created transactions</guilabel>. If this option is enabled when
+ there are one or more transactions <guilabel>To-create</guilabel>, pressing
+ <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will open a register window in which are shown the details of the
+ scheduled transactions splits entered automatically by &app;.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-sched-loans">
+ <title>Mortgage & Loan Repayment Assistant</title>
+
+ <para>This assistant creates a loan repayment scheduled transaction. When used to setup a scheduled
+ transaction, the assistant creates a variable formula so that the compounding interest is
+ correctly calculated. To start this assistant manually go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guilabel>Actions</guilabel><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Mortgage and Loan Repayment...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <para>It does not support zero-interest loans, but one doesn't really need an assistant for that: Just
+ create a scheduled transaction for the principal divided by the number of payments that lasts
+ for the number of payments. For example, if one has borrowed $1200 for a year at no interest
+ and promised to pay it back in monthly installments, the repayment schedule is $100 monthly
+ for twelve months.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Mortgage and Loan Repayment assistant opens with a screen that briefly describes what this
+ assistant does. The three buttons at the very bottom of the screen will not change while using
+ the assistant.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the assistant and cancel creating the
+ scheduled transaction. Any selections you have made in this assistant up to this point
+ will be lost.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Back</guibutton> button will bring up the previous screen so you can change a
+ selection made on that screen.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button will bring up the next screen so you can continue though
+ the assistant.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen allows you to enter the basic loan information. This is usually the information
+ provided by the bank when loan and disclosure documents are given to the borrower. Here you
+ can also setup an account that the scheduled transaction will use to enter the payment
+ transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Loan Account:</guilabel> Choose an account for the loan payment transactions or use New...
+ to setup a new account for the transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Loan Amount:</guilabel> Enter the amount of the loan.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Interest Rate:</guilabel> Enter the loan interest rate in percent per compounding period.
+ The Assistant supports rates between .001% and 100%.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Type:</guilabel> Choose the type of loan. If an adjustable rate is used the frequency
+ screen is enabled.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Interest Rate Change Frequency:</guilabel> Choose the frequency for the rate change and
+ the start date of the rate change.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Start Date:</guilabel> Choose the date the loan is starting on.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Length:</guilabel> Enter the length of the loan with the number and period, e.g. 60 months
+ or 5 years.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Months Remaining:</guilabel> This tells the Assistant how many months remain on the loan.
+ The default value assumes that the loan is paid up through today. For example, if a 5-year
+ loan started on 1 January 2012 and today is 12 July 2015, the default months remaining is
+ 18. If you want to create past payment transactions you'll set the months remaining
+ accordingly: In our example, if you wanted to create all of the payments you'd set "months
+ remaining" to 60; if you wanted to start tracking the payments at the beginning of 2015
+ you'd enter 24.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen is used to set escrow, insurance and tax options for the loan. It is mainly used for
+ mortgage payments. When each of the options here is set, this enables additional pages in the
+ assistant to setup those portions of the payments. All of the pages will be described here,
+ even though some may not show if that option is not chosen.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>... utilize an escrow account for payments?: This selection enables the use of an account setup for
+ tracking escrow payments. If the mortgage or loan uses an escrow account to pay taxes,
+ insurance, etc then setup an account here.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>... pay "Taxes"?: adds an additional page to setup a scheduled transaction to pay taxes.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>... pay "Insurance"?: adds an additional page to setup a scheduled transaction to pay insurance
+ payments.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>... pay "PMI"?: adds an additional page to setup a scheduled transaction to pay PMI payments.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>... pay "Other Expense"?: adds an additional page to setup a scheduled transaction to pay other
+ expenses.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen is used to setup the details of the scheduled transaction for the Loan Repayment.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Transaction Memo: The name entered here will be used as the name for the scheduled transaction, the
+ description of the scheduled transaction and the memo.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment Amount: Shows the variable used to calculate the payment amount.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment From: Choose an account to pay the loan amount from.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Principal To: Choose an account to transfer the principal part of the loan to.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Interest To: Choose an account to transfer the interest part of the loan to.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Repayment Frequency: Select the Frequency and start date for loan repayments. Note that the start
+ date will be the posted date of the first scheduled transaction. This is not taken into
+ account for calculating the remaining duration of the loan, see <guilabel>Months
+ Remaining:</guilabel>. Make sure that you set both to reflect your intentions or you may
+ get surprising results.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen is used to setup the details of the scheduled transaction for the Tax payment.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Transaction Memo: The name entered here will be used as the name for the scheduled transaction, the
+ description of the scheduled transaction and the memo.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Amount: Enter the payment amount.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment From: Choose an account to pay the tax amount from.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment To: Choose an account to transfer the tax payment to.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Repayment Frequency: Select the Frequency and start date for tax payments.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen is used to setup the details of the scheduled transaction for the Insurance payment.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Transaction Memo: The name entered here will be used as the name for the scheduled transaction, the
+ description of the scheduled transaction and the memo.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Amount: Enter the payment amount.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment From: Choose an account to pay the insurance amount from.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment To: Choose an account to transfer the insurance payment to.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Repayment Frequency: Select the Frequency and start date for insurance payments.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen is used to setup the details of the scheduled transaction for the PMI payment.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Transaction Memo: The name entered here will be used as the name for the scheduled transaction, the
+ description of the scheduled transaction and the memo.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Amount: Enter the payment amount.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment From: Choose an account to pay the PMI amount from.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment To: Choose an account to transfer the PMI payment to.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Repayment Frequency: Select the Frequency and start date for PMI payments.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen is used to setup the details of the scheduled transaction for the Other Expense
+ payment.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Transaction Memo: The name entered here will be used as the name for the scheduled transaction, the
+ description of the scheduled transaction and the memo.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Amount: Enter the payment amount.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment From: Choose an account to pay the other expense amount from.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payment To: Choose an account to transfer the other expense payment to.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Repayment Frequency: Select the Frequency and start date for other expense payments.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The last screen gives you a list of three choices to finish the assistant.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the assistant and cancel creating a new
+ loan scheduled transaction. Any selections you have made in this assistant up to this
+ point will be lost.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The Back button will bring up the previous screen so you can change a selection made on that screen.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The Finish button creates the scheduled transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>You should now have the Mortgage or Loan Repayment scheduled transaction setup.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="stock-split">
+ <title>Recording a Stock Split</title>
+
+ <para>Stock splits commonly occur when a company decides its stock price is too expensive for individual
+ investors to buy the stock. Splits have the effect of lowering the price of a single share
+ while keeping the value of shares owned by investors who have already purchased shares.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="stock-split-assistant">
+ <title>Stock Split Assistant</title>
+
+ <para>&app; uses the Stock Split assistant to record stock splits. This provides a way of entering the
+ details of the stock split and also any change in stock price or cash disbursement as a
+ result of the stock split.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Stock Split assistant is accessed by going to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Stock Split...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Stock Split assistant opens with a screen that briefly describes what this assistant does. The
+ three buttons at the very bottom of the screen will not change while using the assistant.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the assistant and cancel entering the stock
+ split information. Any selections you have made in this assistant up to this point will
+ be lost.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Back</guibutton> button will bring up the previous screen so you can change a
+ selection made on that screen.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button will bring up the next screen so you can continue though
+ the assistant.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen allows you to select a Stock Account. Select an account from the list to record a
+ stock split or merger.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account:</guilabel> Lists the &app; account name for the stock.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Symbol:</guilabel> The stock symbol for the stock associated with this account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Shares:</guilabel> The amount of shares that have been purchased in the account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen lets you set the Stock Split Details. The top part of the screen contains details
+ used in creating the stock split transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date:</guilabel> Choose the date of the stock split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Share Distribution:</guilabel> Enter the amount of shares gained from the stock split. For
+ a stock merger enter a negative number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description:</guilabel> Enter a description or leave as the default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The bottom part of the screen contains details used to record a price for the split (optional).
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>New Price:</guilabel> Enter the price of the shares on the day of the stock split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Currency:</guilabel> Choose the currency of the shares.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The next screen lets you enter a transaction for a cash disbursement (Cash In Lieu) as a result of
+ the stock split (optional).
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Cash Amount:</guilabel> Enter the amount of the Cash disbursement.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Memo:</guilabel> Enter a memo or leave as the default.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Income Account:</guilabel> Choose an Income Account for the disbursement.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Asset Account:</guilabel> Choose an Asset Account for the disbursement.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The last screen gives you a list of three choices to finish the assistant.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the assistant and cancel creating the Stock
+ Split transactions. Any selections you have made in this assistant up to this point will
+ be lost.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Back</guibutton> button will bring up the previous screen so you can change a
+ selection made on that screen.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button creates the transactions for the Stock Split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>You should now have successfully entered the Stock Split or Merger.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="tools-on-line-banking">
+ <title>The Online Banking Setup Assistant</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Online Banking Setup</guilabel> Assistant is used to create or edit the configuration
+ to enable interaction with your bank. For this purpose the package
+ <package>
+ AqBanking
+ </package>
+ is used. It contains several modules with different abilities. Their availability depends on
+ the region. But all can fetch the current balance and recent transactions.
+ <table frame="all" id="tool-aqb-modules">
+ <title>AqBanking Supported Protocols</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="4">
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry align='center'>
+ <para>Module
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align='center'>
+ <para>Send Orders
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align='center'>
+ <para>Region
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry align='center'>
+ <para>Notes
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>EBICS
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows='1' rowsep="1" valign='middle' align='center'>
+ <para>Yes
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>AT, CH, DE, FR
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Usually available for business users.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>FinTS
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>DE
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Submodules: HBCI, PIN/TAN.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>OFX DirectConnect
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry morerows='1' valign='middle' align='center'>
+ <para>No
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>US
+ <footnote>
+ <para>If you know about banks in other countries, update the <ulink url="&url-wiki-ofx-banks;">wiki
+ table</ulink>.
+ </para>
+ </footnote>
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>Not to confuse with <quote>OFX WebConnect</quote>!
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+ <para>PayPal
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para>intl.
+ </para>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ <para></para>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If <guilabel>Online Banking Setup</guilabel> does not appear in your <guimenu>Tools</guimenu> menu,
+ verify that you are in an <guilabel>Account Tree</guilabel> or <guilabel>Register</guilabel>
+ tab.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The currently available instructions are still kept in the &app; wiki and depend on the used module:
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><acronym>EBICS</acronym></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>No users shared their expirience util now.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><acronym>FinTS</acronym></term>
+<!-- FixMe: define <para its-locale-filter-list="*-de">
+ <para its-locale-filter-list="*-de">Das Wiki gibt mit <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;Online-Banking"/> eine Ãœbersicht und
+ beschreibt die Verwendung des <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;Onlinebanking-Einrichtungsassistent"/>.
+ Die verschiedenen PIN/TAN-Methoden werden in <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;PIN/TAN"/> erklärt,
+ die Details zum klassischen HBCI in <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;HBCI"/>.</para>
+ <para its-locale-filter-list="*-us">Currently the best instruction for this process are in the &app; wiki at
+ <ulink url="&url-wiki-ofx;" />. </para> -->
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This module is only documented in German. Overview <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;Online-Banking"/>, usage
+ of the <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;Onlinebanking-Einrichtungsassistent"/>, and details of
+ the different <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;PIN/TAN"/> methods.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><acronym>OFX</acronym> DirectConnect</term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Instruction for this process are in English at <ulink url="&url-wiki-ofx;" />.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><acronym>PayPal</acronym></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This module is only documented in German <ulink url="&url-wiki-de;Paypal einrichten"/>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ </para>
+<!-- Example for other:
+ <div its-locale-filter-list="*-ca" its-locale-filter-type="exclude">
+ <p>Text for non-Canadian locales.</p>
+ </div> -->
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="tool-price">
+ <title>Price Editor</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>&app; uses the term <emphasis
+ role="Italic">commodity</emphasis> to mean anything that it
+ counts: Currencies, securities (i.e intangible assets like stock or mutual fund shares and
+ bonds), or tangible assets like trucks and computers. When valuing one commodity in terms of
+ another it uses the term <emphasis role="Italic">Exchange Rate</emphasis> between two
+ currencies and <emphasis
+ role="Italic">Price</emphasis> between a non-currency
+ commodity and a currency commodity. For the rest of this section we'll use "price" to mean
+ both price and exchange rate and "commodity" to mean any sort of commodity except where
+ currency behavior is different.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>The Price Editor is used to list and edit the price of one commodity in another commodity. New
+ prices can be added, existing prices can be edited, and prices can be retrieved from a variety
+ of sources on the World-Wide Web when the commodity is properly configured.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Each commodity pair can have one price per day. An existing price will be overwritten by a newer one
+ if the newer one has the same or a more preferred source. The order of source preference (1 is
+ most preferred) is:
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>user:price-editor: Prices created manually in the Price Editor
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Finance::Quote: Online quotes
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>user:price: Prices entered explicitly in the <guilabel>Exchange Rate</guilabel>entry of the
+ <guilabel>Transfer Funds</guilabel> dialog box or in the <guilabel>Price</guilabel>
+ column of a register for an account of types STOCK or MUTUAL
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>user:xfer-dialog: Prices calculated from an entry in the <guilabel>To Amount</guilabel> entry of the
+ <guilabel>Transfer Funds</guilabel> dialog box.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>user:split-register: Prices calculated from the <guilabel>Shares</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Debit</guilabel> or <guilabel>Credit</guilabel> columns of a register for an
+ account of types STOCK or MUTUAL
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>user:stock-split: Prices entered in the <guilabel>Stock Split Assistant</guilabel>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Prices created manually in the <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> are preferred over prices retrieved
+ via Finance::Quote so Finance::Quote will fail to update such manually-created prices.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> displays existing prices as follows:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Security: </emphasis>The Security/commodity being priced. The display is
+ sorted by the <guilabel>Namespace</guilabel> that the individual securities are listed
+ on. The list is expanded by clicking on the <guilabel>caret</guilabel> on the left of
+ the name.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Currency: </emphasis>The currency the price is recorded in.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Date: </emphasis>The date the price was recorded.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Source: </emphasis>The source of the commodities price quote, listed above.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Type: </emphasis>There are several different types of stock price quotes.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Bid: </emphasis>Indicates what a specialist dealer is prepared to pay for a
+ stock.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Ask: </emphasis>Indicates at what price the dealers are prepared to sell a
+ stock.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Last: </emphasis>Indicate the price at which the last trade in that
+ stock/security occurred at. This is the price most commonly quoted in the media.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Net Asset Value: </emphasis>Are typically used for mutual funds. They are
+ calculated on the net value of the fund’s assets each day around the time of
+ the market close and are in effect until the next recalculation.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Unknown: </emphasis>Use this if the type of price quoted is not known.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Price: </emphasis>The actual price of the commodity.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="invest-stockprice-manual">
+ <title>Adding a stock price manually</title>
+
+ <para>To add a new price, click on <guilabel>Add</guilabel>, and enter the details of the security and
+ price into the dialog box. To edit an existing price, select the price in the price list,
+ click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button, and edit the figures.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To remove just one price, select the price and click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button. If
+ you want to remove all prices older than a certain date, click on the <guilabel>Remove
+ Old</guilabel> button and enter the details in the dialog box.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A pop-up will display with the message <emphasis role="bold">"Delete all stock prices based upon the
+ criteria below:".</emphasis> Enter the date of the last price you wish to delete.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Two check-boxes are below the date field;
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Delete manually entered prices</guilabel> - If checked, delete manually entered stock
+ prices dated earlier than the specified date. Otherwise only stock prices added by
+ <application>Finance::Quote</application> will be deleted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Delete last price for a stock</guilabel> - If checked, delete all prices before the
+ specified date. Otherwise the last stock price dated before the date will be kept and
+ all earlier quotes deleted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="invest-stockprice-online1">
+ <title>Configuring for use of the <guibutton>Get Quotes</guibutton> button</title>
+
+ <para>To support on-line quotations for a particular stock or mutual fund account, you must first enable
+ on-line price quoting and select a price source in the Security. This is described in detail
+ in <xref linkend="invest-stockprice-online3"></xref>. Once on-line quotes are enabled, and
+ <application>Finance::Quote</application> is installed, you can update prices for your
+ stocks and mutual funds manually by clicking the <guibutton>Get Quotes</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="tool-security-edit">
+ <title>Security Editor</title>
+
+ <para>The Security Editor is used to create and edit commodities that are used by mutual fund and stock
+ type accounts. It also shows the details of National Currencies that are used by &app;.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To show the details for National Currencies click the <guilabel>Show National Currencies</guilabel>
+ check-box at the bottom of the screen.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Each entry in the editor shows the details used by the security/currency:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Type:</emphasis> Categories for organizing securities. &app; has the following
+ built in:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>CURRENCY</guilabel> or <guilabel>ISO4317</guilabel>: These are used for national
+ currencies and are not editable with the <guilabel>Security Editor</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>FUND</guilabel>: Ordinarily used for open-ended mutual funds, i.e., those that one
+ purchases from and sells to only the issuing company and that are priced daily at
+ their net asset value.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>AMEX</guilabel>, <guilabel>ASX</guilabel>, <guilabel>EUREX</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>NASDAQ</guilabel>, and <guilabel>NYSE</guilabel>: These represent a few of
+ the exchanges on which stocks, closed-end mutual funds, and exchange-traded funds
+ are traded.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Template</guilabel>: This is a reserved word. It will not normally appear in the
+ <guilabel>Security Editor</guilabel> unless you type it in, and if you do it will
+ cause problems. Don't use it.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If your investment doesn't fit into one of these categories, for example if you trade stocks on
+ the DAX or LSE, you can easily create your own type simply by typing it into the field.
+ The type of security has no meaning to Gnucash (except <guilabel>Template</guilabel>,
+ don't use that!), it's there only to make it easier for you to find the security
+ from the selection lists.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Symbol:</emphasis> Indicates the symbol or abbreviation for the commodity.
+ This is usually the ticker symbol (for stocks) or other unique abbreviation for the
+ commodity. If the commodity is traded on any public exchange, it is important to use the
+ same identifier used on that exchange. For national currencies the symbol is the ISO-4217
+ currency code.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Name:</emphasis> The full name of the commodity is a recognizable name such as
+ <emphasis>US Dollars</emphasis> or <emphasis>IBM Common Stock</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Code:</emphasis> This is any numeric or alphanumeric code that is used to
+ identify the commodity. The CUSIP code is a unique identifying numeric string that is
+ associated with every stock, bond or mutual fund, and most kinds of traded options,
+ futures and commodities. This code is not required.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Fraction:</emphasis> This is the smallest traded unit of the commodity,
+ expressed as a fraction of a single nominal unit. This unit is used by &app; accounts as
+ the default fraction for trades in the commodity.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-commodity">
+ <title>Adding or Editing a Commodity</title>
+
+ <para>To add a new commodity (stock, or mutual fund), click on <guilabel>Add</guilabel>, and enter the
+ details of the commodity into the <emphasis role="bold">New Security</emphasis> dialog box.
+ To edit an existing commodity, select the commodity from the Commodities list, click the
+ <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button, and edit the <emphasis role="bold">Edit
+ Security</emphasis> dialog box. To remove a commodity, select the commodity and click the
+ <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The fields in the New/Edit Security screens are the same as defined for the Security Editor
+ <xref linkend="tool-security-edit"></xref>. Below these fields are the options for Online
+ Quotes.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="invest-stockprice-online3">
+ <title>Configuring Securities/Currencies for On-Line Retrieval of Prices</title>
+
+ <para>To support on-line quotations for a particular stock or mutual fund account, you must first enable
+ on-line price quoting and select a price source in the Security Editor. Online currency
+ quotes require only that the check-box for Online quotes and the timezone be selected, and
+ that the <quote>Get Quotes</quote> box be checked in the Security Editor.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Detailed instructions are in the section on Creating New Accounts.
+ <xref linkend="Online-price-setup"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="tool-calc">
+ <title>Loan Repayment Calculator</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Loan Repayment Calculator</guilabel> is used to calculate compound interest. It
+ provides a way of entering four of the five parameters of a compound interest calculation and
+ then calculating the remaining figure.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The calculator is split into two panes. The left pane has five fields with a
+ <guilabel>Calculate</guilabel> button and a <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button. The
+ <guibutton>Calculate</guibutton> button is used to select the figure to calculate. The
+ <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button is used to clear any amount in the field.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Payment Periods:</emphasis> This field is used to select the number of
+ payments you wish to use in the calculation.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Interest Rate:</emphasis> This field is used for the interest rate percentage.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Present Value:</emphasis> This field usually contains the amount you have
+ borrowed. It is the base amount you wish to compound.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Periodic Payment:</emphasis> This field contains the amount that is the
+ payment for the period selected (IE monthly, weekly, etc). If it is for repaying a loan it
+ should be a negative number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Future Value:</emphasis> This field contains the final value at the end of the
+ periods above. If we are repaying a loan in full it would be <emphasis>0</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The right pane contains buttons to select what sort of payments and compounding is used for the left
+ pane calculations.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Compounding:</guibutton> This button allows you to select the interval used if the
+ <guilabel>Discrete Compounding</guilabel> button is selected.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Payments:</guibutton> This button allows you to select the interval used for the Payment
+ Periods field.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>End of Period Payments:</guibutton> Use this button if the payment is at the end of the
+ period.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Beginning of Period Payments:</guibutton> Use this button if the payment is at the
+ beginning of the period.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Discrete Compounding:</guibutton> This button is used where interest is charged at a
+ discrete interval defined by the <guibutton>Compounding</guibutton> button above.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Continuous Compounding:</guibutton> This button is used when the interest is charged
+ continuously.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Payment Total:</guibutton> This field shows the total amount paid.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>Examples of using the <guilabel>Loan Repayment Calculator</guilabel> are given in the Tutorial and
+ Concepts Guide. <ulink url="&url-docs-build-C;guide/loans_calcs1.html"> &app; Tutorial and
+ Concepts Guide’s Chapter on Loans</ulink>
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="tool-close-book">
+ <title>Close Book</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Close Book</guilabel> dialog box is used for “closing the books,”--an
+ accounting process that resets the balances of the income and expense accounts. In this
+ process, income account balances are transferred into an income equity account, while expense
+ account balances are transferred into an expense equity account. You must specify both these
+ accounts, which may be the same. You must also specify the date for the closing transfer.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-close-book-anatomy">
+ <title>Dialog Box Details</title>
+
+ <para>The dialog box has the following parts:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Closing Date:</guilabel> Specify the date for the closing transfer. You can type in a date
+ or choose one from the drop-down.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Income Total:</guilabel> Specify the account into which the total balance of all income
+ accounts will be transferred. Optionally you can create a new account to receive the
+ transfer using the <guibutton> New</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Expense Total:</guilabel> Specify the account into which the total balance of all expense
+ accounts will be transferred. Again, you can optionally create a new account to receive
+ the transfer using the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description:</guilabel> Specify the description that will be entered in the closing entry.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-close-book-workings">
+ <title>How It Works</title>
+
+ <para>&app; closes books by creating one transaction per currency for income accounts, and one transaction
+ per currency for expense accounts. The transactions all use the date selected by the user,
+ and each transaction may contain any number of splits. Each split moves the balance out of
+ one income or expense account. The last split in each closing transaction moves the total
+ offsetting debit/credit balance into the specified equity account.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Each transaction will use the description provided by the user in the
+ <guilabel>Description:</guilabel> entry.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The fact that &app; just uses transactions to close the books makes it very simple to undo a book
+ closing: just delete the closing transactions.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-close-book-not">
+ <title>What It Doesn’t Do</title>
+
+ <para>The book closing tool does not delete any accounts or transactions; create any new files; or hide
+ any accounts.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-close-book-need">
+ <title>Necessity</title>
+
+ <para>Note that closing the books in &app; is unnecessary. You do not need to zero out your income and
+ expense accounts at the end of each financial period. &app;’s built-in reports
+ automatically handle concepts like retained earnings between two different financial
+ periods.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>In fact, closing the books reduces the usefulness of the standard reports because the reports
+ don’t currently understand closing transactions. So from their point of view it simply
+ looks like the net income or expense in each account for a given period was simply zero.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-close-book-conclusion">
+ <title>Conclusion</title>
+
+ <para>If you close your books, be prepared to see inaccuracies in the standard reports. On the other hand,
+ you will see current-period income and expense figures in the chart of accounts.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="tool-lots">
+ <title>Lots in Account</title>
+
+ <para>&app; uses <emphasis>lots</emphasis> in 2 ways:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To link security buy transactions to sell transactions so the real cost of the sold securities can
+ be used to calculate capital gain or loss. See <xref linkend="tool-lots-cap" />.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To link payments or credit notes to the invoices to which they apply in the Business Features. See
+ <xref linkend="tool-lots-bus" />.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-lots-cap">
+ <title>Lots for Security Capital Gains</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Lots in Account SSSS</guilabel> window, where SSSS is the security account, is used to
+ manually or automatically link security transaction splits to lots and create capital
+ gain/loss transactions to account for the difference between the costs of buying a security
+ and the value received by selling it.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To open the <guilabel>Lots in Account</guilabel> window, open the security account register, then
+ select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> <guimenuitem>View Lots</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>Lots in Account window for Security Capital Gains</title><screenshot id="tool-lotsInAcctStk">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Tool_LotsStk.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Chris Good" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Tool_LotsStk.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Chris Good" ></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Example of Lots in Account window for a security account </phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>An image of the <emphasis>Lots in Account </emphasis> window for a security account.
+ </para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <sect3 id="tool-lots-cap-scr">
+ <title>Screen Elements</title>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Adjusting the Size of Screen Elements</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>As well as adjusting the size of the whole window, it is possible to adjust the proportions of the
+ window elements both horizontally and vertically.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are 2 bars for adjusting the window horizontally. One between the <guilabel>Title</guilabel>
+ and the <guilabel>Lots in This Account</guilabel> panel, and the other between the
+ <guilabel> Splits free</guilabel> panel and the <guilabel>>></guilabel> and
+ <guilabel><<</guilabel> buttons.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The window proportions may be adjusted vertically by dragging the vertical bar located to the right
+ of <guilabel>Show only open lots</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>These resizing bars can be hard to see, so move the mouse pointer until it changes to the resize
+ pointer then click and drag the bar. The resize pointers are different depending on your
+ operating system and theme. Here are some examples of resize pointers:
+ </para>
+
+ <para><inlinemediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Tool_Lots_h_double_arrow.png"
+ format="PNG" width="48px" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase><-></phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </inlinemediaobject>
+
+ <inlinemediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Tool_Lots_v_double_arrow.png"
+ format="PNG" width="48px" />
+ </imageobject>
+ </inlinemediaobject>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>It is not possible to individually adjust the size of panel columns.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Fields</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Shows the title for the highlighted (selected) lot in the <guilabel>Lots
+ in This Account </guilabel> panel. When a new lot is created by clicking the
+ <guilabel>New Lot </guilabel> button, it has a default title of <emphasis>Lot n
+ </emphasis> where n is a number starting at 0 (for each security account) and
+ incrementing by 1. Deleting a lot does not reset the next number to be used, but the
+ title can be changed as required.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Notes:</guilabel> Notes for the highlighted lot. Users are free to enter anything they
+ wish and the notes can be changed as required.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Panels</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The order of the items in all the panels in this window can be adjusted by clicking on the column
+ headings.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Lots in This Account panel</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This panel shows lots for this security account.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If <guilabel>Show only open lots</guilabel> is checked, only lots that have not been completely sold
+ are shown.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Columns</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Type:</guilabel> Always blank for security lots. This window is also used for business
+ lots (which link payments to invoices) when coming from an Accounts Payable or
+ Receivable account and in that case, <guilabel>Type</guilabel> will be
+ <emphasis>I</emphasis> for invoice. Credit Notes are also Type I.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Opened:</guilabel> <emphasis>Open </emphasis> if there are no splits in the lot, otherwise
+ the date of the earliest split in this lot.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Closed:</guilabel> <emphasis> Open</emphasis> if the lot is not fully sold, otherwise the
+ date of the last sell split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Title:</guilabel> Lot Title.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Balance:</guilabel> Number of unsold securities in this lot.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Gains:</guilabel> Calculated gains or losses for this lot.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+<!-- end of Columns in Lots in This Account -->
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Splits free panel</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This panel shows buy and sell splits for this security account which are not linked to a lot.
+ Capital Gains splits (Shares and Price are 0) are not shown.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Columns</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date:</guilabel> Transaction Date Posted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Num:</guilabel> Transaction Num.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description:</guilabel> Transaction Description.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Amount:</guilabel> Number of shares bought or sold from the transaction split. Positive
+ for buys, negative for sells. If the security transaction split has been split
+ into multiple subsplits (because a split may only be linked to 1 lot), this amount
+ will not be the full transaction amount, but only the amount for this split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Value:</guilabel> Amount x split price.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Gain/Loss:</guilabel> For sell splits, shows calculated gain or loss. This will be
+ recalculated during scrubbing.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Balance:</guilabel> Cumulative number of unsold shares for free splits.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+<!-- end Splits free panel -->
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Splits in Lot panel</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This panel shows splits linked to the highlighted lot in the <guilabel>Lots in This
+ Account</guilabel> panel. This panel will be empty until a lot is highlighted in the
+ <guilabel>Lots in This Account</guilabel> panel. Capital Gains splits (Shares and
+ Price are 0) are not shown.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Columns</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date:</guilabel> Transaction Date Posted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Num:</guilabel> Transaction Num.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description:</guilabel> Transaction Description.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Amount:</guilabel> Split number of shares bought or sold. Positive for buys, negative for
+ sells. If the security transaction split has been split into multiple subsplits
+ (say by scrubbing because a split may only be linked to 1 lot), this amount will
+ not be the full transaction amount, but only the amount for this split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Value:</guilabel> Amount (No of Shares) x split price.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Gain/Loss:</guilabel> For sell splits, shows calculated gain or loss. This will be
+ recalculated during scrubbing.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Balance:</guilabel> The number of unsold shares in this lot after this transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+<!-- end Splits in Lot panel -->
+ </itemizedlist>
+<!-- end Panels -->
+ <para><emphasis>Buttons</emphasis>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel> >>:</guilabel> Links a free split (buy or sell) to a lot. This button is not
+ enabled until both a lot and a free split are highlighted. The split moves from the
+ <guilabel>Splits free</guilabel> panel to the <guilabel> Splits in lot</guilabel>
+ panel.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Multiple buy splits and multiple sell splits may be linked to the same lot. Refer to following
+ section about the <guilabel> Scrub Account</guilabel> button for details of the
+ capital gains transactions created in these situations.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel> <<:</guilabel> Unlinks a split from a lot. The split moves from the
+ <guilabel>Splits in lot </guilabel> panel to the <guilabel>Splits free</guilabel>
+ panel. This button is not enabled until a split in the <guilabel>Splits in
+ lot</guilabel> panel is highlighted. When the last split is unlinked from a lot, the
+ lot is automatically deleted if there is no capital gain/loss transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>New Lot:</guilabel> Creates a new lot which shows in the <guilabel>Lots in This
+ Account</guilabel> panel. The new lot is not linked to any split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Scrub Account:</guilabel>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Creates a lot for each buy transaction split that is not already linked to a lot.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A new lot is created for each unlinked buy transaction split because gains on investments, in some
+ jurisdictions, may be taxed at different rates depending on how long they were
+ held before being sold. As a separate capital gains transaction is created for
+ each lot, this makes it easier to determine tax on the capital gains based on the
+ lot opened and closed dates.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If you know that the capital gains from a sale are all to be taxed at the same rate, you can
+ manually link multiple buys to a lot so scrubbing will only create 1 capital gains
+ transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>It is also possible to manually link multiple sell transaction splits to a lot. In this case
+ scrubbing creates a capital gains transaction per sell transaction split based on
+ the average cost of securities held at the time of each sale, assuming
+ acquisitions are allocated to sales using the security account costing method
+ (currently only FIFO). As this makes it complicated to manually verify the costs
+ are correct, it may be wise to limit this to specific situations, say for example
+ if there are multiple sales on the same day.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Links buy and sell transaction splits to lots using FIFO method.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Calculates gain/loss and creates a separate capital gain/loss transaction for each lot that does not
+ already have one.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If gain/loss splits have been manually entered as part of a sell transaction, scrubbing does not
+ recognize them, so if manually adding gain/loss, always separate the gain/loss
+ splits from the transaction that reduces the <guilabel>No of Shares</guilabel>,
+ by putting them in a separate transaction.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Scrub:</guilabel> Scrub only the highlighted lot. This button is only enabled if a lot is
+ highlighted. If no buy splits are linked to the highlighted lot, nothing is done. The
+ <guilabel>Scrub</guilabel> button will link any free sell splits to the lot as
+ required until the sum of the sell split amounts equals the sum of the buy split
+ amounts. If the sum of the sell split amounts is greater than the sum of the buy split
+ amounts, a sell split will itself be split into 2 splits, with the remaining amount in
+ an unlinked split.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>For both the <guilabel>Scrub Account</guilabel> and the <guilabel>Scrub</guilabel> buttons:
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Gain/Loss for each lot is recalculated and a capital gain transaction is created if needed. The
+ transaction has 1 split for the security account and the other with account
+ <emphasis>Orphaned Gains-CCC</emphasis> where CCC is the security currency. The
+ <emphasis>Orphaned Gains-CCC </emphasis> account is used because &app; doesn't know
+ which capital gain or loss account should be used, so the user must change it to the
+ required income (or expense) gain or loss account.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Delete:</guilabel> Delete the highlighted lot. Any linked splits are automatically freed
+ (unlinked). This button is only enabled if a lot is highlighted.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Close:</guilabel> Close the <guilabel> Lots in Account SSSS</guilabel> window.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>See Tutorial and Concepts Guide,
+ <ulink
+url="&url-docs-build-C;guide/invest-sell1.html#invest-sellLots"> Automatic
+ Calculation of Capital Gain or Loss Using Lots</ulink> for more details.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="tool-lots-bus">
+ <title>Lots for Business Features</title>
+
+ <sect3 id="tool-bots-bus-intro">
+ <title>Introduction</title>
+
+ <para>For business features, lots are used to link payments or credit notes to the invoices to which they
+ apply. This is for both customer invoices and vendor bills.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>There are 2 main uses for the <guilabel>Lots in Account</guilabel> window in relation to the
+ business features:
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To enquire about which payments or credit notes offset particular invoices. For each invoice and
+ credit note, &app; automatically creates 1 (and only 1) lot. By selecting the lot for
+ the invoice or credit note in the <guilabel> Lots in This Account</guilabel> panel,
+ all the transaction splits for that lot show in the <guilabel>Splits in Lot</guilabel>
+ panel.
+ </para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Alternatively, print the invoice and check the <guilabel> Payments</guilabel> option on the Display
+ tab in the report options. The Tax Invoice always shows payments so does not have
+ the Payments option.
+ </para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To correct mistakes that are hard to correct otherwise (either due to bugs in past versions of
+ gnucash or due to unintended use of said features). Some of these use cases are found
+ on <ulink url="&url-wiki-bus-feat;">this wiki page</ulink>. In the context of the
+ normal operation of business features , the <guilabel>Lots in Account</guilabel>
+ window is <emphasis>not</emphasis> used to create, delete, link or unlink lots. Lots
+ are usually generated and manipulated internally only by the business features
+ programs.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>To open the <guilabel>Lots in Account AAAA</guilabel> window, where AAAA is the <emphasis>Accounts
+ Receivable</emphasis> (AR) or <emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis> (AP) account, open the
+ <emphasis>AR</emphasis> or <emphasis>AP</emphasis> account register, then select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> <guimenuitem>View Lots</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>Lots in Account window for business features</title><screenshot id="tool-lotsInAcctBus">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Tool_LotsBus.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Chris Good" width="510px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Tool_LotsBus.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Chris Good" ></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Example of Lots in Account window for an Accounts Receivable account
+ </phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>An image of the <guilabel>Lots in Account </guilabel> window for an Accounts Receivable account.
+ </para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="tool-lots-bus-scr">
+ <title>Screen Elements</title>
+
+ <para>The screen elements of the <guilabel>Lots in Account</guilabel> window for an AR or AP account are
+ the same as for a security account, although the actions and data are different. As this
+ window is only used for creating, deleting, linking or unlinking lots in <emphasis>
+ exceptional</emphasis> circumstances, the differences are not described. See
+ <xref linkend="tool-lots-cap-scr" /> for a description of the screen elements and what the
+ buttons do when used with the lots of a security account.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/help/de/Help_ch_Transactions.xml b/help/de/Help_ch_Transactions.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bae035f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/help/de/Help_ch_Transactions.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,3368 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+<!DOCTYPE chapter SYSTEM "gnc-docbookx.dtd">
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 3.5
+ Last modified: March 30th 2019
+ modified: April 15th 2007
+ modified: August 12th 2006
+ modified: February 28th 2005
+
+Maintainers:
+ Frank H. Ellenberger
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Neil Williams <linux at codehelp.co.uk>
+
+Author:
+ Chris Lyttle <chris at wilddev.net>
+ Translators:
+(translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<!--
+ Common Transaction Operations Items Here !!!
+-->
+<chapter id="ch_Common_Trans_Ops">
+ <title>Common Transaction Operations</title>
+
+ <para>&untranslated-de;
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A <emphasis>transaction</emphasis> represents the movement of money from one account to another
+ account. Whenever you spend or receive money, or transfer money between accounts, that is a
+ transaction. In <application>&appname;</application> transactions always involve at least two
+ accounts.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><application>&appname;</application> uses accounts as a way of grouping or organizing the recording
+ of transactions. This section describes the methods <application>&appname;</application> has to
+ help enter transactions quickly into the register.
+ </para>
+
+ <para></para>
+
+ <para><application>&appname;</application> has several methods available for entering transactions.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Entering directly into the register window is the most common way of entering transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Using the <guilabel>Transfer Funds</guilabel> window .
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Importing transactions either from a file or via on-line banking.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+<!--
+ <note>
+ <para>Where should the Importing of data from downloaded files" and "On-line" banking be covered?.
+ </para></note>
+ -->
+ <sect1 id="trans-win-enter">
+ <title>Transfer Funds Dialog Box</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Transfer Funds Dialog Box</guilabel>, accessed via
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Transfer...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ or its shortcut or by pressing the <guibutton>Transfer</guibutton> icon from the account
+ register tab, serves two purposes in <application>&appname;</application>:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>A way to create a simple (i.e. two-split) transaction between arbitrary accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Collect exchange rate or amount information in a multi-currency transaction (see
+ <xref
+ linkend="trans-currency-enter"/>).
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Basic Information</guilabel> and <guilabel>Transfer Accounts</guilabel> panes will be
+ disabled in the <guilabel>Transfer Funds</guilabel> dialog when it is being used only to
+ collect exchange rate or amount information.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Basic Information</title>
+
+ <para>The Basic Information section collects the entries for constructing a transaction: Date,
+ description, amount, etc.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Amount:</guilabel> The amount of the transaction in the <guilabel>Transfer
+ From</guilabel>account's commodity.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date:</guilabel> The posting date for the transaction, i.e. the date that you want to
+ record it in your book.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Num:</guilabel> A reference number for the transaction, often a check number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description:</guilabel> The description of the transaction, often the payer or payee.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Memo:</guilabel> Additional information you might want to note about the transaction.
+ Anything entered here will be added to the <guilabel>Memo</guilabel> fields of
+ <emphasis>both</emphasis> splits.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Transfer Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Transfer From</guilabel> and <guilabel>Transfer To</guilabel> tree views are used to
+ select the accounts which will participate in the transaction. They normally show only Asset
+ and Liability accounts. If you need to use an Income or Expense account in one of them,
+ check the <guilabel>Show Income/Expense</guilabel> checkbox below the appropriate view.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Choose the <guilabel>Transfer From</guilabel> account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Choose the <guilabel>Transfer To</guilabel> account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-win-price">
+ <title>Currency Transfer</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Currency Transfer</guilabel> pane is used to collect the needed information to enter
+ the amount of the <guilabel>Transfer To</guilabel> split. You may enter either a price or an
+ amount and <application>&appname;</application> will compute the other. If you have Online
+ Price Retrieval installed (see <xref linkend="Online-price-setup"/>) you can use the
+ <guilabel>Fetch Rate</guilabel> button to retrieve a current quote.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Currency Transfer</guilabel> pane is enabled only if the selected accounts use
+ different commodities or the <guilabel>Transfer Funds</guilabel> dialog was launched to
+ collect price or amount information from editing a transaction in the register.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Currency Transfer</guilabel> pane is organized as a radio group with two selections,
+ <guilabel>Exchange Rate</guilabel> and <guilabel>To Amount</guilabel>. Each consists of a
+ radio button and a numeric entry.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If a relevant price is available in the price database (see
+ <xref linkend="invest-stockprice-manual"/>) the <guilabel>Exchange Rate</guilabel> will have
+ that as a default entry.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select the <guilabel>Exchange Rate</guilabel> radio button if you want to enter a price or use the
+ <guilabel>Fetch Rate</guilabel> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select the <guilabel>To Amount</guilabel> radio button if you want to enter the amount of the
+ <emphasis>To Account</emphasis> split.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Enter the price/exchange rate or the amount in the numeric entry corresponding to radio button you
+ selected. <application>&appname;</application> will calculate the other amount for you
+ when you exit the field. If it's enabled you can use the <guilabel>Fetch Rate</guilabel>
+ button to retrieve a current quote.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you have created a price in the <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> (see
+ <xref
+ linkend="invest-stockprice-manual"/>) for the current date quote retrieval
+ will not update that price. You must first delete the manually-created price in the
+ <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> before you
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ on the <guibutton>Fetch Rate</guibutton> button.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Fetch Rate</guibutton> button will immediately create or replace a price in the
+ <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> unless there is an existing manually-created price for
+ today.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Finishing Up</title>
+
+ <para>Select <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to commit the transaction (or confirm the price/amount) or
+ <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to dismiss the dialog without entering the transaction.
+ <note>
+ <para>When committing a transaction or confirming an exchange rate the price on the transaction date in
+ the <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> may be updated. See
+ <xref
+ linkend="tool-price"/> for details.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-enter">
+ <title>Enter Transaction via register</title>
+
+ <para>When the Account Register Window for an account is opened the list of transactions for that account
+ is shown. This window has the name of the account on its tab. The menus contain several
+ functions that alter the display of transactions. The <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> also
+ contains several functions that are often used when entering or manipulating transactions.
+ These are described in the <xref linkend="account-register"></xref> section of this document.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-reg-enter">
+ <title>Entering Directly in the Register Window</title>
+
+ <para>The register window will look slightly different depending on the style options you have chosen. The
+ following describes entering simple transactions in the basic ledger style. The cursor is
+ placed in the <guilabel>date</guilabel> field by default when the register window is opened.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>When working on transactions in <application>&appname;</application>, be aware that the
+ <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key and the <keycap function="tab">Tab</keycap>
+ key behave differently, and perform different actions.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key moves to the first field of the next split,
+ regardless of which field you are in. If there is no next split, proceeds to the next
+ transaction. In any case, <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> finishes the transaction
+ edit, and any imbalance is posted to <emphasis>Imbalance-CUR</emphasis>, where
+ <emphasis>CUR</emphasis> is the currency of the transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <keycap function="tab">Tab</keycap> key moves to the next field in the current split. If it's
+ the last field, moves to the next split, creating a new one if there isn't one. If the
+ split is blank, the <keycap function="tab">Tab</keycap> key finishes the transaction and
+ posts any imbalance to <emphasis>Imbalance-CUR</emphasis>, as above.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Selecting the small icon on the right of the date field drops down a date selection calendar. Use
+ the arrows to select the correct month and year for the transaction then select the
+ date. Selecting the icon once more will close the date selection calendar. It is also
+ possible to type in the date or part of the date and let
+ <application>&appname;</application> fill the rest.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press <keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to or select the <guilabel>Num</guilabel> field. Here you can
+ enter a check or transaction number. Pressing <keycap>+</keycap> (plus) will
+ automatically advance the number by one from the last transaction to have a number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press <keycap>Tab</keycap> to move or select the <guilabel>Description</guilabel> field. This field
+ is used to enter either a payee or other description for the transaction. It will
+ automatically attempt to fill the payee name as you type.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>At this stage one of two things will happen if tab is pressed. If
+ <application>&appname;</application> matches an existing transaction the cursor will
+ jump to one of the amount fields, automatically filling in the transfer account.
+ Selecting any field with the mouse instead of tabbing will not automatically fill the
+ transferring account field. If there is no matching (existing) transaction,
+ <application>&appname;</application> will move the cursor to the
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field with only one line of the transaction supplied.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Accounts may be selected either by typing them in or by pressing the small button on the right of
+ the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field, which will display a pick list of all
+ non-placeholder accounts. Note that this pick list will still display hidden accounts.
+ If you have hidden an account in your chart of accounts, you may want to set the account
+ also to be a placeholder account so that it doesn't display here.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>When typing, <application>&appname;</application> will fill in available accounts as you type. For
+ example, if you have <emphasis>Equity</emphasis> and <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>
+ top-level accounts, typing <keycap>E</keycap> will fill in
+ <emphasis
+ role="bold">Equity</emphasis> because it sorts before
+ <emphasis role="bold">Expenses</emphasis>. Continuing to type <keycap>x</keycap> will
+ present <emphasis
+ role="bold">Expenses</emphasis> the account separator
+ (<keycap>:</keycap> by default, see
+ <xref
+ linkend="prefs-accounts"></xref>Account Preferences about changing it)
+ will accept the currently offered account so that you can start typing the name of a
+ child account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The next field <guilabel>R</guilabel> is used for reconciliation. This is described in the
+ <guimenu>Reconcile an Account to a Statement</guimenu> section.
+ <xref linkend="acct-reconcile"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press the <keycap>Tab</keycap> key to move to the first of the amount fields. The names of the next
+ two columns are different according to what type of account is opened. For example,
+ <emphasis>Bank</emphasis> accounts show <guilabel>Deposit</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Withdrawal</guilabel> here, <emphasis>Credit Card</emphasis> accounts show
+ <guilabel>Payment</guilabel> and <guilabel>Charge</guilabel>, and
+ <emphasis>Stock</emphasis> accounts show <guilabel>Shares</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Price</guilabel>, <guilabel>Buy</guilabel> and <guilabel>Sell</guilabel>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Enter an amount for the transaction in the correct fields. When the transaction is "balanced"
+ pressing the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, selecting the
+ <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon or going to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ will finish the transaction. Selecting the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> icon or going
+ to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Cancel Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ will erase the transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Transactions with just one transfer account will show the name of that account in the
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field in completed transactions. (The
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field is the fourth (4) from the left in the register
+ display.)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To move to the blank transaction at the bottom of the register, press the
+ <guibutton>Blank</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> icon or go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Blank Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-assoc">
+ <title>Associating an External File with a Transaction.</title>
+
+ <para>Some users find it helpful to associate external files or URLs, perhaps images of store reciepts,
+ cancelled checks, or vendor invoices, with their transactions. &app; provides a facility for
+ doing just that.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Select a transaction in the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> and right-click it to present the
+ <guimenu>Context Menu</guimenu> and select <guimenuitem>Update Association for
+ Transaction</guimenuitem>. You will be presented with the <guilabel>Change a Transaction
+ Association</guilabel> dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>Change a Transaction Association Dialog</title><screenshot>
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Trans_Assoc_Dialog.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger" />
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>At the top is a radio button with two choices <guilabel>File Association</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Location Association</guilabel>. If there's an item associated then the radio button
+ will have the appropriate selection. At the bottom, 3 buttons: <guilabel>Remove</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel>, and <guilabel>OK</guilabel>. <guilabel>Remove</guilabel> will
+ remove the current association and close the dialog box; the other two do the usual actions.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If the <guilabel>File Association</guilabel> radio button is selected the control beneath it is a
+ file chooser button. It will display the name of the selected file if there is one or
+ <guilabel>None</guilabel> if there isn't. Clicking the button will bring up a file chooser
+ dialog from which one may select the file to associate.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If the <guilabel>Location Association</guilabel> radio button is selected there is a text entry
+ beneath it in which you may type a URL.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>When you have finished click the <guilabel>OK</guilabel> button to confirm your choice or the
+ <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> button to dismiss the dialog without making a change.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><guimenuitem>Open Association for Transaction</guimenuitem> is enabled if there is a file or URL
+ associated with the selected transaction. Selecting it will open a file in the operating
+ system's default viewer for the file type and a URL in the default browser
+ </para>
+
+ <para><guimenuitem>Remove Association from Transaction</guimenuitem> is enabled if there is a file or URL
+ associated with the selected transaction and does exactly what you'd expect.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure float="1">
+ <title>Chain and Paperclip</title><screenshot>
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Trans_Assoc_Symbols.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Frank H. Ellenberger" />
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>When the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> is in <guilabel>Double Line</guilabel> mode the cell
+ underneath the <guilabel>Reconciliation</guilabel> cell is the
+ <guilabel>Association</guilabel> cell and displays
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>a <emphasis>paperclip symbol</emphasis> if there is a file associated with the transaction and
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>a <emphasis>chain-link symbol</emphasis> if there is a URL associated with it
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ as long as those symbols are supported by the current font for the cell. Hovering over the
+ cell will display the file path or URL in a tooltip and clicking in it will open the file or
+ URL as the <guimenuitem>Open Transaction</guimenuitem> context menu item would.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-multi-enter">
+ <title>Multiple Split Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>The register window will look slightly different depending on the style options you have chosen. The
+ following describes entering transactions with multiple splits in the basic ledger style.
+ <application>&appname;</application> describes as a <quote>Split</quote> when money is
+ transferred to or from more than two accounts in a transaction. The cursor is placed in the
+ date field by default when the register window is opened.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The multiple account lines will not be displayed in the Basic Ledger unless the
+ <guibutton>Split</guibutton> icon or the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Action</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ option have been selected.
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Selecting the triangle icon on the right of the date field drops down a date selection dialog. Use
+ the arrows to select the correct month and year for the transaction then select the date.
+ Selecting the icon once more will close the date selection calendar. It is also possible
+ to type in the date or part of the date and let <application>&appname;</application> fill
+ the rest.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press <keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to or select the <guilabel>Num</guilabel> field. Here you can
+ enter a check or transaction number. Pressing <keycap>+</keycap> (plus) will automatically
+ advance the number by one from the last transaction to have a number.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press <keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to or select the <guilabel>Description</guilabel> field. This
+ field is used to enter either a payee or other description for the transaction. It will
+ automatically attempt to fill the payee name as you type.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>At this stage one of two things will happen if tab is pressed. If
+ <application>&appname;</application> matches an existing transaction the cursor will jump
+ to one of the amount fields, automatically filling in the transfer account. Selecting any
+ field with the mouse instead of tabbing will not automatically fill the transferring
+ account field. If there is no matching (existing) transaction,
+ <application>&appname;</application> will move the cursor to the
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field with only one line of the transaction supplied.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>When typing in the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field <application>&appname;</application> will
+ also attempt to automatically match the account. It does this alphabetically, so typing
+ <userinput>Ex</userinput> will match the <computeroutput>Expenses</computeroutput> section
+ of the account list. When the section is matched, it is possible to move to a child
+ account by pressing <keycap>:</keycap> (colon). If after typing <emphasis>Ex</emphasis>
+ you press <keycap>:</keycap> then the cursor will move to the first child account in the
+ list. Typing combinations of letters and <keycap>:</keycap> will allow movement down the
+ tree of accounts quickly. The small icon on the right of the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel>
+ field can be used as an alternate way of selecting accounts.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The next field is used for reconciliation. This is described in
+ <xref linkend="acct-reconcile"></xref>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press <keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to the first of the amount fields. The names of the next two
+ columns are different according to what type of account is opened. For example, Bank
+ accounts show Deposit and Withdrawal here, Credit Card accounts show Payment and Charge,
+ and Stock accounts show Shares, Price, Buy and Sell.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Enter the total amount for the transaction in the correct field. Before pressing
+ <keycap>Tab</keycap> or <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> read next step.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To enter the additional splits, press the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the
+ <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . Transactions with more than one split show the text <emphasis>--Split
+ Transaction--</emphasis> and the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button will need to be used
+ to show the details.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The display will expand, the titles of the amount columns will be renamed and the
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column name will be blank. The first line contains the
+ description and the amount of the transaction. The second line contains the currently
+ opened account name in the <guilabel>Account</guilabel> field and the amount of the
+ transaction. The third line contains the transfer account name in the
+ <guilabel>Account</guilabel> field. If the amount is not balanced,
+ <application>&appname;</application> will indicate this by placing gray check-boxes in the
+ amount columns with the unbalanced amount in a blank last row.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>When one of the short lines is selected, the column titles will change. The very first and last
+ (<guilabel>Date</guilabel> and <guilabel>Balance</guilabel>) columns will have blank
+ titles. <guilabel>Num</guilabel> will change to <guilabel>Action</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Description</guilabel> to <guilabel>Memo</guilabel>, the now blank
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will change to <guilabel>Account</guilabel>. The last
+ two amount columns will show the name described in step seven.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Action</guilabel> and <guilabel>Memo</guilabel> columns are optional to fill out at
+ this stage. <guilabel>Action</guilabel> is used to describe what kind of account transfer
+ is involved. <guilabel>Memo</guilabel> is an additional description of the transfer.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Move to the missing amount field on the third line and fill in the amount. Pressing the
+ <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, selecting the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton>
+ icon or going to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ will now move the cursor to the next line.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Account</guilabel> column contains the list of transfer accounts. This column is the
+ one that is used to add splits. The method described in step five can be used to select
+ another account on a blank line. Add as many additional splits as needed.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>When the transaction is balanced the gray check-boxes will disappear and the last blank line will
+ not have an amount.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Pressing <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> as described above will jump to the next
+ transaction. Selecting the next transaction will close the split or it can be manually
+ closed by pressing the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> icon or selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-currency-enter">
+ <title>Multiple Currency/Commodity Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>Any transaction that has splits whose accounts are denominated in different commodities (currencies
+ are a subset of commodities) requires an exchange rate to convert between the two. For more
+ information please see Chapter 10 of the <emphasis role="italic">Tutorial and Concepts
+ Guide</emphasis>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Registers for accounts of type STOCK or FUND display four columns, <guilabel>Shares</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Price</guilabel>, <guilabel>Buy</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Sell</guilabel> (the last
+ two will be <guilabel>Credit</guilabel> and <guilabel>Debit</guilabel> respectively if you've
+ enabled <guilabel>Use formal accounting labels</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel>
+ tab of <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>). Enter any two and
+ <application>&appname;</application> will calculate the other for you; if you enter 3 and the
+ result doesn't balance <application>&appname;</application> will ask which one to change to
+ make the split balance.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Registers of other types have only <guilabel>Credit</guilabel> and <guilabel>Debit</guilabel> (the
+ names will be different depending on the account type if you haven't enabled <guilabel>Use
+ formal accounting labels</guilabel>) and so use the <guilabel>Transfer Dialog</guilabel> with
+ most of the fields disabled to collect either an <guilabel>Exchange Rate</guilabel> or a
+ <guilabel>To Amount</guilabel> (the amount in the other currency/comodity). Please see
+ (<xref
+ linkend="trans-win-price"></xref>) for details of using this dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>When committing a transaction or confirming an exchange rate the price on the transaction date in
+ the <guilabel>Price Editor</guilabel> may be updated. See <xref
+ linkend="tool-price"/>
+ for details.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-edit">
+ <title>Editing a Transaction</title>
+
+ <para>Editing a transaction involves just selecting the part of the transaction that needs to be changed.
+ Once the changes are complete pressing the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key,
+ selecting the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon or going to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Enter Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ will now move the cursor to the next line or transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To see a more detailed view of a transaction for editing in Basic Ledger, press the
+ <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-delete">
+ <title>Deleting a Transaction</title>
+
+ <para>If a transaction needs to be removed from the register, select the transaction and press either the
+ <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> icon on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Delete Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . A window will appear to confirm the delete, unless the preference has been changed. The
+ window presents two options; "Remember and don’t ask again", and "Remember and
+ don’t ask again this session". The response will be set according to the selected
+ checkbox. The preference can also be reset via
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reset Warnings</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . <xref linkend="reset-warning"></xref>.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Parts of a transaction can also be removed by pressing the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on
+ the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or selecting
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . The part of the transaction that needs to be deleted can be then selected for deletion.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-reverse">
+ <title>Add Reversing Transaction</title>
+
+ <para>In formal accounting, transactions should never be deleted or altered. Instead, when a mistake is
+ made, the original transaction remains in the ledger, and a reversing transaction is added to
+ the ledger. This <emphasis>reversing transaction</emphasis> restores the ledger to its state
+ before the error, allowing the user to enter the transaction again correctly.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>While a user can certainly enter reversing transactions manually,
+ <application>&appname;</application> includes a menu option (
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add Reversing Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ ) that can quickly create the reversing transaction for you. This option only appears when you
+ are in an account register. When you are in the transaction that needs to be reversed, all you
+ need to do is select this menu item, and a duplicate transaction that reverses the active
+ transaction is immediately created.
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Once you choose the menu item, a reversing transaction is immediately created in the account using
+ the current date. You may wish to locate the new transaction at the end of the register, and
+ add explanatory notes to it.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-split-remove">
+ <title>Removing Transaction Splits</title>
+
+ <para>Removing Transaction Splits involves erasing all splits except the one for the account that is
+ opened. This is a useful way of reusing a previous transaction that has multiple splits that
+ need to be changed. (Note this can be done without opening the split, but doing so makes the
+ effect more visible)
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If in Basic Ledger, press the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button on the
+ <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Split Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ to open the transaction. If in other modes select transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Remove Transaction Splits</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+
+ <para>A window will appear to confirm the delete, unless the preference has been changed. The window
+ presents two options; "Remember and don’t ask again", and "Remember and don’t
+ ask again this session". The response will be set according to the selected checkbox. The
+ preference can also be reset via
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Reset Warnings</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . <xref linkend="reset-warning"></xref>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>All Accounts and their related details will be removed except for the currently opened account.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The amount is not balanced and <application>&appname;</application> will indicate this by placing
+ gray check-boxes in the amount columns with the unbalanced amount in the blank last row.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Edit the transaction to fill in the new details.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-copy">
+ <title>Copying a Transaction</title>
+
+ <para>Copying Transactions is available from the <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu> menu. The
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu> menu has <guimenu>Cut Transaction</guimenu>, <guimenu>Copy
+ Transaction</guimenu> and <guimenu>Paste Transaction</guimenu> which allows a whole
+ transaction to be cut or copied and pasted to a new transaction line. This way of copying a
+ transaction will use the date showing in the new transaction blank line.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Duplicate Transaction...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ or the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> <guimenu>Duplicate</guimenu> which, unlike the Copy
+ method, allows for choosing a different date.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select the transaction to duplicate.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Duplicate Transaction...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>A dialog called <emphasis role="bold">Duplicate Transaction</emphasis> will prompt for a new Date
+ and Num for the transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Press <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add the transaction to the register.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-stts">
+ <title>Setting the reconcile status (<guilabel>R</guilabel> field) of a transaction</title>
+
+ <para>In the <application>&appname;</application> register there is a column labeled
+ <guilabel>R</guilabel>. This field indicates the status of a transaction. Possible values are:
+ </para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>n</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>No. This is the default status when a transaction is created.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>c</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Cleared. Status may be assigned either manually or by an import process.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>y</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Yes, reconciled. This status is solely assigned by the reconciliation process (see
+ <xref linkend="acct-reconcile" />). Places limits optionally requiring confirmation on
+ editing fields in that line of a transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>f</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Frozen. Not implemented at this time
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>v</guilabel></term>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Voided. Status is assigned or released manually through the transaction menu
+ (<xref linkend="Trans-transaction-menu" />) to a transaction and applies to every line
+ in the transaction. It hides most of the transaction details but does not delete them.
+ When a transaction is voided a reason entry is required that appears to the right of the
+ transaction notes. The notes and void reason will only be visible when you have enabled
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="acct-jump">
+ <title>Jump to another Account Register</title>
+
+ <para>When using the Account Register Window it is frequently useful to be able to view another account
+ and also the transfer account at the same time. <application>&appname;</application> allows
+ you to do this quickly by using the <guibutton>Jump</guibutton> button available in the
+ <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Jump</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ menu item in the Account Register Window.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Select the transaction in the Account Register Window and either click the
+ <guibutton>Jump</guibutton> icon or select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Jump</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ to open the Account Register Window target. If the transaction is split between more than one
+ transfer account then you will need to show all the split transfer accounts first and select
+ the transfer account to jump to.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-sched">
+ <title>Scheduling Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>Scheduled Transactions provide the ability to have reminders scheduled or transactions scheduled to
+ be entered at a specified date. This is combined with the <guilabel>Since Last Run</guilabel>
+ assistant (<xref linkend="trans-sched-slr"></xref>) to review and enter the transactions. The
+ <guilabel>Mortgage & Loan Repayment</guilabel> assistant
+ (<xref linkend="trans-sched-loans"></xref>) is used to setup a scheduled transaction to repay
+ a compounding interest loan. The Scheduled Transaction Editor
+ (<xref linkend="sched-editor"></xref>) is used to create and edit transactions that are to be
+ added to the register in an automated way.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The easiest way to setup a scheduled transaction is to use an existing transaction in an account
+ register as a template. Select the transaction you wish to use as a template and then either
+ select the <guibutton>Schedule</guibutton> icon on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>Schedule...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . This will bring up the <emphasis role="bold">Make Scheduled Transaction</emphasis> dialog.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Name:</guilabel> Enter a name to use for the scheduled transaction. This will be used in
+ the <guilabel>Description</guilabel> field of the transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Frequency:</guilabel> Choose the time period you want between scheduled entries. The dates
+ that the transactions will be entered will show in the mini calendar pane to the right.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Start Date:</guilabel> Choose a date for the scheduled transaction to start.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Never End:</guilabel> This scheduled transaction has no finish date.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>End Date:</guilabel> Choose a date for the scheduled transaction to end.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Number of Occurrences:</guilabel> Enter the number of times you wish the scheduled
+ transaction to be added to the register.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Advanced...</guilabel> button brings up the Scheduled Transaction Editor’s
+ dialog to Edit the Scheduled Transaction. This is described in the section Scheduled
+ Transaction Editor. <xref linkend="sched-editor"></xref>
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="sched-trans-win">
+ <title>Scheduled Transactions Window</title>
+
+ <para>The Scheduled Transactions Window is used to access the list of scheduled transactions and create,
+ edit or remove them. It also provides a calendar which displays upcoming scheduled
+ transactions. Clicking on the calendar view and hovering over any date will pop up a small
+ dialog that shows the transactions scheduled for that day. The yellow highlight in the
+ calendar indicates which days have scheduled transactions. To dismiss the hover dialog click
+ once more.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The top pane of the Scheduled Transaction Window contains the list of scheduled transactions that
+ are currently setup. This window lists the Name of the transaction, if the transaction is
+ enabled for scheduling, the Frequency (month and day) that the transaction is to be entered,
+ the last time the transaction was entered and the next time the transaction will be entered.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The right side of this pane contains a down arrow button that when clicked will pull-down a window
+ to allow selection of the characteristics displayed in the list. Unchecking the appropriate
+ box will remove the characteristic from the display.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> of this window contains three buttons to create, delete and edit
+ scheduled transactions. <guibutton>New</guibutton> and <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> buttons
+ opens the Edit Scheduled Transaction dialog. <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> removes the
+ selected scheduled transaction. The same options are available thru
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Schedule</guimenu><guimenuitem>New/Edit/Delete</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ , from the Scheduled Transaction Tab.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Below the list of scheduled transactions is the Upcoming calendar. This calendar displays up to the
+ next year and highlights the dates that the scheduled transactions are scheduled to occur so
+ it is easy to see when the transactions are scheduled. Clicking on a date in the calendar
+ brings up a list of scheduled transactions for that date. Moving the mouse over other dates
+ changes to the list of transactions on those dates. Clicking once more on the calendar
+ removes the transaction list.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Scheduled Transaction Window is activated from the Account tab or the Transaction Register via
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transaction</guisubmenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Scheduled Transaction Editor...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ .
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="sched-editor">
+ <title>Edit Scheduled Transaction Window</title>
+<!-- Todo: has been redesigned -->
+ <para>The Edit Scheduled Transaction Window is divided into a Name area, Options area, Occurrences area,
+ Recurrence Frequency area, mini calendar and Template Transaction pane.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field is used to enter the name for the scheduled transaction. This
+ will be used in the <guilabel>Description</guilabel> of the transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Options</guilabel> area contains check-boxes to set if the transaction is
+ automatically created and how many days in advance the transaction is created and/or a
+ reminder posted.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Occurrences</guilabel> area contains selections to set for dates limits on
+ transactions to be entered or the number of transactions to be entered.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Recurrence Frequency</guilabel> area contains selections to set how often the
+ transaction is scheduled to be added and on what dates this occurs.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The mini calendar provides a visual indication of what transactions are already scheduled.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> pane allows you to setup the transaction as you would
+ like it to be entered into the register.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>These options are described in more detail in <xref linkend="trans-sched"></xref>
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>From the Scheduled Transaction tab selecting a transaction from the list and pressing the
+ <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> or <guibutton>New</guibutton> buttons will bring up the Edit
+ Scheduled Transaction Editor.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="print-check">
+ <title>Printing Checks</title>
+
+ <para>Checks are printed in <application>&appname;</application> from the account register.
+ <application>&appname;</application> provides the ability to print to several standard Quicken
+ Checks (including US Letter) or to make a custom check format. Check position and Date formats
+ are also customizable.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To print a single check in <application>&appname;</application>, select the transaction to print a
+ check for and go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print Checks</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . This will open the Print Checks properties dialog to print the selected transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To print multiple checks in <application>&appname;</application> execute a search to find the
+ transactions you wish to print. With the search results window as the front window go to
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Print Checks</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ . This will open the Print Checks properties dialog to print all the transactions in the
+ search results window.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Print Checks dialog has two tabs. The first tab, Options, is used to setup the most common
+ options to print a check. The second tab, Custom format, is used to setup the position of
+ various fields on the check. It is useful to print a test check to a plain piece of paper
+ first and use that to make any adjustments needed.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The default selection in Options is for Quicken/Quickbooks (tm) US-Letter checks.
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Check format: Test with Quicken first then use custom if the position is incorrect.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Check position: This sets if the Top, Middle or Bottom check is printed. Custom is used if the
+ position of the checks on the page is incorrect.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Date format: The default here is set in the Preferences International section. Choose a date format.
+ This can also be adjusted by the Use of the Months: and Years: lines. Custom allows the
+ date format to be set in the Format: box (%m means month, %d means day, %Y means year) A
+ Sample of the format chosen is displayed below.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Address: This sets the address of the Payee, if the check format includes a space for it and you are
+ printing a single check.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The Custom format tab has two sections. The top half of the window (above the dividing line) allows
+ you to position the fields in each check. It contains two columns to enter in the X and Y
+ co-ordinates of the field position on the check. Positions in the Custom Check Format entry
+ area are specified with x = 0 at the left edge of the check with x increasing to the right,
+ and y = 0 at the top edge of the check with y increasing as you travel down. (If you are using
+ a version of GTK prior to 2.10, then y = 0 is at the bottom of the page and y increases as you
+ travel up.)
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Payee:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Date:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Amount (words):
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Amount (numbers):
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Address:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Notes:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Memo:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Splits Amount:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Splits Memo:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Splits Account:
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The part of the custom format tab below the dividing line contains fields to position the entire
+ check correctly on the page. The Translation field is the distance from the top left corner
+ and the Rotation field rotates the check clockwise by the indicated amount.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The Units field in the bottom half of the window specifies the units used in all the fields in both
+ halves of the window.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Once <guibutton>OK</guibutton> is pressed on the Print Check dialog the Print
+ <application>&appname;</application> Document dialog is presented. Press
+ <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to print the check.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-import">
+ <title>Importing Transactions from Files</title>
+
+ <para>Imported transactions will generally be to a specific account in your account tree. In the following
+ this will be referred to as the <emphasis role="bold">import</emphasis> or
+ <emphasis role="bold">base</emphasis> account. It may or may not be specified in the data
+ being imported depending on the import format. It is usually the first split of a transaction
+ being imported.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>All transactions will also need to have a <emphasis role="bold">destination</emphasis> account for
+ any other splits associated with the tansaction. These may or may not be supplied in the
+ imported data, depending upon the data source and the format of the data. If it is not,
+ <application>&appname;</application> may be able to assign an account on the basis of the
+ previous import history by matching infomation in the imported data to data associated with
+ previous account assignments in the importer. The user may always over-ride this automatic
+ assignment or where no assignment can be made automatically assign an account manually.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Multi-split data exported from <application>&appname;</application> in CSV format will normally have
+ both the import and destination accountsfor transaction splits specified in the data file.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-import-formats">
+ <title>Import Formats</title>
+
+ <para><application>&appname;</application> allows transactions to be imported in a number of structured
+ formats for the exchange of financial data as well as in the unstructured CSV format, a
+ plain text tabular format commonly used for the import and export of data to and from
+ spreadsheets:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="trans-import-qif">QIF</link></emphasis> (.qif) Quicken
+ Interchange format - import data from Quicken financial software;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="trans-import-ofx">OFX/QFX</link></emphasis> (.ofx,.qfx) Open
+ Financial eXchange format (QXF is an Intuit/Quicken proprietary version of OFX);
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="trans-import-csv">CSV</link></emphasis> (.csv) Comma Separated
+ Values;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="trans-import-MT940-MT942-DTAUS">MT940</link></emphasis> SWIFT
+ MT940 Customer End of Day Statement Message;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="trans-import-MT940-MT942-DTAUS">MT942</link></emphasis> SWIFT
+ MT942 Customer Intra-day Transaction Report;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="trans-import-MT940-MT942-DTAUS">DTAUS</link></emphasis>
+ (.DTAUS) Banking data Exchange File;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Files using these formats do not necessarily use the file extensions shown above.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>These import methods can be accessed from the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Import </guisubmenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ sub-menu entry, along with methods for importing other types of data. Select the appropriate
+ entry from the
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ sub-menu to initiate importing transactions.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-import-prefs">
+ <title>Import Preference</title>
+
+ <para>User preferences set in the <link linkend="prefs-online">Online Banking tab</link> of the user
+ preferences accessed by
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu>
+ </menuchoice>
+ from the menu will affect the importing of transactions from the files described below.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-import-qif">
+ <title>Import QIF</title>
+
+ <para>To import data from Quicken®, MS Money®, or other programs that use QIF(Quicken® Interchange
+ Format), you must first export your data to a QIF file. One way to do this is to export each
+ account as a separate QIF file. An easier way, available in Quicken® 98 and beyond, is to
+ export all accounts at once into a single QIF file. Check your program's manual to determine
+ if this option is available.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>To import QIF files:</title>
+
+ <para>Select
+ <menuchoice>
+ <guimenu>File</guimenu> <guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Import
+ QIF...</guimenuitem>
+ </menuchoice>
+ from the menu to open the QIF Import dialog box illustrated below.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>The Import QIF Files Assistent</title><screenshot id="ImportQIFDruid">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_QIF_Druid.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_QIF_Druid.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <formalpara>
+ <title>Dialog Navigation</title>
+
+ <para>The right hand pane will display some or all of the following navigation buttons:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton></emphasis>: Exit the dialog;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Back</guibutton></emphasis>: Go back to the previous step;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis>: Proceed to the next step.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ The buttons displayed are determined by whether navigation to the destination step is
+ valid from the current step.
+ </para>
+ </formalpara>
+
+ <formalpara>
+ <title>Import Dialog Steps</title>
+
+ <para>The left hand pane lists the steps in the import dialog process. The right hand pane contains
+ instructions and/or controls for performing the operations in the step selected and
+ highlighted in the left hand pane. The import process steps are:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Import of QIF files</guilabel></emphasis>: Initial informational
+ panel. Click <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> to
+ proceed;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Select a QIF file to load</guilabel></emphasis>: Open a file
+ selection dialog. Navigate to and select the file you wish to import and click
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Import</guibutton></emphasis>. Then click
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Load QIF files</guilabel></emphasis>: Click the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Start</guibutton></emphasis> button to load the
+ file. The file will be parsed and loaded. If errors or warnings occur you may have
+ to remove the file, edit it and reimport it. If there are no errors click
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Set a date format for the file</guilabel></emphasis>: Select a date
+ format (m-d-y or d-m-y) appropriate to the locale of the source of your QIF file.
+ In the US this is generally m-d-y and in Europe d-m-y;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Set the default QIF account name</guilabel></emphasis>: If the QIF
+ file does not specify an account name, enter an account name. If importing data
+ from another accounting program you should use the name used in that program;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>QIF files you have loaded</guilabel></emphasis>: This step allows
+ you to edit the list of files to be imported and to load additional files. To
+ remove a file, click on the row and then click on
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Unload selected file</guibutton></emphasis>. To
+ load another file click the <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Load another
+ file</guibutton></emphasis>. When you have all the files you wish to import
+ loaded, click <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Accounts and stock holdings</guilabel></emphasis>: Information
+ panel. Click <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> to
+ proceed;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match QIF accounts with &appname; accounts</guilabel></emphasis>:
+ QIF account names are matched to <application>&appname;</application> accounts if
+ possible. New <application>&appname;</application> accounts are created if no
+ matching accounts are found. For stock, the required account structures are also
+ created. Created accounts are indicated by checking the checkbox in the New
+ column. Assigned accounts may be edited by selecting the appropriate the row and
+ clicking on the <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Change &appname;
+ Account</guibutton></emphasis> button to to run the account selection dialog;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Income and Expense categories</guilabel></emphasis>: Information
+ panel. Click <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> to
+ proceed;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match QIF categories to &appname; accounts</guilabel></emphasis>:
+ QIF categories are matched to <application>&appname;</application> accounts where
+ possible. New <application>&appname;</application> accounts are created where no
+ matching <application>&appname;</application> account is found. Created accounts
+ are indicated by the checkbox in the New column being checked. If you are not sure
+ what changes are needed, it is safe to accept the
+ <application>&appname;</application> account names. These may be changed later in
+ <application>&appname;</application>. Assigned accounts may be edited by selecting
+ the appropriate row and clicking on the <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Change
+ &appname; Account</guibutton></emphasis> button to run the account selection
+ dialog;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Payees and Memos</guilabel></emphasis>: Information page. Click
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> to proceed;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match payees/memos to &appname; accounts</guilabel></emphasis>: QIF
+ payees and memos are matched to &appname; accounts where possible and new accounts
+ are created where this is not possible again indicated by the checkbox in the New
+ column. The assigned account may be changed by selecting a row and clicking on the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Change &appname; Account</guibutton></emphasis>
+ button to to run the account selection dialog;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Choose the QIF file currency</guilabel></emphasis>: Select the
+ required currency from the dropdown list and click on
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> to continue;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Tradable commodities</guilabel></emphasis>: Not yet implemented;
+ </para>
+<!--FIXME when implemented.-->
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>QIF Import</guilabel></emphasis>: Click on
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Start</guibutton></emphasis> to begin the import.
+ <application>&appname;</application> currently proceeds to the Update your
+ <application>&appname;</application> accounts tab if the import is successful;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match existing transactions</guilabel></emphasis>: Not yet
+ implemented;
+ </para>
+<!--FIXME when implemented.-->
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Select possible duplicates</guilabel></emphasis>: Not yet
+ implemented;
+ </para>
+<!--FIXME when implemented.-->
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Update your &appname; accounts</guilabel></emphasis>: Click
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Apply</guibutton></emphasis> to complete the
+ import. Depending upon the size of your file, the import might take a few minutes
+ to complete, so a progress bar displays the percentage finished. When the import
+ process is complete, <application>&appname;</application> will return you to the
+ main window, which should now display the names of the accounts you imported.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Other features are not currently implemented;
+<!--FIXME when implemented.-->
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>QIF Import Summary</guilabel></emphasis>: Click on
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Close</guibutton></emphasis> to exit the wizard.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </formalpara>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-import-ofx">
+ <title>Import OFX/QFX</title>
+
+ <para><guimenu>File</guimenu>-><guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>-><guimenuitem>Import OFX/QFX
+ transactions</guimenuitem> opens a file selection dialog. Navigate to the file you wish to
+ import, select a file with the appropriate extension (.ofx or .qfx), then press the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Import</guibutton></emphasis> button.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><application>&appname;</application> then opens an Account Selection dialog to select an account in
+ your CoA to match to an account name in the import file. Select the appropriate account from
+ the account tree and press the <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>OK</guibutton></emphasis>
+ button. On subsequent import of files from the same source account, the mapped
+ <application>&appname;</application> account is remembered and the account selection dialog
+ is not displayed.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The generic import transaction matcher dialog is opened next. See the
+ <link linkend="trans-import-matcher"> Import Matcher</link> section (common to both OFX/QFX
+ and CSV import formats) following the Import CSV section to continue the import process.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-import-csv">
+ <title>Import CSV</title>
+
+ <para>Clicking on
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guimenu>File</guimenu>-><guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>-><guimenuitem>Import
+ Transactions from CSV</guimenuitem></emphasis> will bring up the CSV Transaction Import
+ Assistant dialog illustrated below.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>The CSV Transaction Import Assistant - Introduction</title><screenshot id="CSV_Transaction_Import_Assistant">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_CSV_Transaction_Import_Assistant.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" width="515px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata width="515px" fileref="figures/Help_CSV_Transaction_Import_Assistant.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The CSV Transaction import Assistant is largely self explanatory with information panes which
+ describe the functionality.
+ </para>
+
+ <formalpara>
+ <title>Dialog Navigation</title>
+
+ <para>Each pane displays a selction of the following navigation buttons at the bottom right:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton></emphasis> Exit the CSV Transaction Import
+ Assistant;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Back</guibutton></emphasis> Return to the previous step in the
+ assistant;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> Proceed to the next step in the
+ assistant.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ The buttons displayed are determined by the validity of the traget step from the current
+ step.
+ </para>
+ </formalpara>
+
+ <formalpara>
+ <title>CSV Import Process Steps</title>
+
+ <para>The steps in the CSV import process are listed in the left hand pane with the current step
+ highlighted. Explanatory text and the widgets to setup and carry out the step are
+ displayed in the right hand pane. The function of the controls in each step is explained
+ below, in the explanatory information in the panes or in tooltips on some controls. The
+ steps in the CSV import process are:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Transaction Import Assistant</emphasis>: Introductory information panel. Click
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> to continue;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Select File for Import</guilabel></emphasis>: Display the File
+ selection dialog. Navigate to the file you wish to import then click the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> button;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Import Preview</emphasis>: The Import Preview pane controls set options for
+ the import of CSV data and provides a preview of the data to be imported.
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>The CSV Import Preview Pane</title><screenshot id="CSV_Import_Preview">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_CSV_Import_transactions_Preview.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" width="515px"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_CSV_Import_transactions_Preview.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" ></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ The CSV Import Preview Pane with settings to import the shown data.
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <title>Import preview Controls</title>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para id="trans-import-csv-save"><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Load and Save Settings</guilabel></emphasis>: Once you have set all
+ the import parameters, you can save these settings by typing in a setting a
+ unique name in the <guilabel>Load and Save Settings Entry</guilabel> combo box
+ and clicking the Save icon just to the right of the box. A previously defined
+ settings group can be retrieved by selecting the appropriate setting group
+ name from the dropdown list activated by the down arrow at the right end of
+ the text box. This will set all other settings to the stored values.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The delete/trashcan icon to the right of the Save icon can be used to remove the saved settings
+ group selected from the drop down list for the box.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The settings group <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>&appname; Export Settings</guilabel></emphasis>
+ defines a setting group for used for the export and reimport of
+ <application>&appname;</application> transaction data - use this if importing
+ data previously exported from <application>&appname;</application>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account</guilabel></emphasis>: If the data you are importing does
+ not specify the source account for the transaction an account can be selected
+ from the drop down list will import all transactions to the selected account.
+ Leave blank if your imported data specifies a source account;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>File Format</guilabel></emphasis>:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Separators</guilabel></emphasis>: Selecting this radio button will
+ allow you to define characters which will be used to distinguish columns
+ in the input file. The default is comma separated. In countries using
+ the comma as decimal separator the semicolon is common as column
+ separator. However spaces, tabs, colons or semicolons or any combination
+ of them may be used to separate columns in the input file by selecting
+ the appropriate check boxes. You may also define custom separators by
+ typing the required characters into the text box and selecting the
+ <guilabel>Custom</guilabel> checkbox. This may be used in combination
+ with any of the predefined separators;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Fixed-Width</guilabel></emphasis>: Selecting this radio button will
+ allow you to define column boundaries by double clicking at the
+ appropriate positions in the sample records displayed in the panel
+ below. Single clicking in a column will narrow, widen or merge the
+ column.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Multi-split</guilabel></emphasis>: Selecting this check box allows
+ the splits for a single transaction to be defined on consecutive lines within
+ the file with each line defining a single split. If not selected each line is
+ assumed to contain the information for a single transaction including one or
+ two splits;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Miscellaneous</guilabel></emphasis>: The miscellaneous settings
+ allow you to set:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Encoding</guilabel></emphasis>: This is usually UTF-8, but may
+ differ for files from other sources;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Date Format</guilabel></emphasis>: This does not default to the
+ Locale setting so check it matches the data you are importing;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Currency Format</guilabel></emphasis>: Select the format of the
+ decimal separator (full stop or comma or other) for the currency if the
+ correct value is not supplied by Locale;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Leading Lines to Skip</guilabel></emphasis>: Select the number of
+ header lines to skip in the imported file;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Trailing Lines to Skip</guilabel></emphasis>: Select the number of
+ trailing lines to skip in the import file;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Skip alternate lines</guilabel></emphasis>: Use to skip every second
+ line in the import file.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ to match the settings for the file you are importing. Tooltips may also
+ contain information on the setting and options.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The import panel shows the data being imported as it is interpreted using the settings chosen to
+ define columns and formats. The dropdown lists in the headers for each column of the
+ import allow you to associate a specific column in the imported data with a specific
+ field in the display of a transaction in an account register. At a minimum to import
+ data, columns in the imported data containing the following information
+ <emphasis>must</emphasis> be specified:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Date</guilabel>: of transaction;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Account</guilabel>: into which transaction is to be imported (or alternatively set the
+ base account as above);
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Description</guilabel>: of the transaction;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Deposit or Withdrawal</guilabel>: column.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The dropdown list of <application>&appname;</application> transaction data fields which may be
+ associated with a column of the imported data contains the following:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>None</guilabel></emphasis>: The column is not assigned to a
+ transaction data field and is not imported;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Date</guilabel></emphasis>: Ensure the date format in the column
+ matches the Miscellaneous date Format Setting;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Num</guilabel></emphasis>: Transaction Num field - Use for check
+ numbers etc.;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Description</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Notes</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transaction Commodity</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Void Reason</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Action</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account</guilabel></emphasis>: This header should be matched to a
+ column specifying the source account for a transaction if it is present.
+ Otherwise, set the source account in the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account</guilabel></emphasis> combo box;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Deposit</guilabel></emphasis>: Apply this header to a column
+ containing the amount of the transaction. Positive amounts in the column
+ generally represent an increase in the account balance and negative amounts a
+ decrease in the balance (asset accounts: Checking, Savings). In external
+ statements supplied by a bank for a check or savings account, a credit (Cr) is
+ normally an increase in the account balance and a debit (Dr) a decrease in the
+ account balance. In the banks eyes, your savings or checking account is a
+ Liability to them;
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If the amount data is in separate columns for debits and credits you will have to apply both this
+ heading and the Withdrawal heading.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Withdrawal</guilabel></emphasis>: Apply this header to a column with
+ the amount of the transaction where positive amounts in the column represent a
+ decrease in the account balance and negative amounts an increase in the
+ balance (e.g. Liability account: credit card).
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Where separate columns are used for debits and credit to the account apply it to the opposite to the
+ column to which Deposits is applied;
+ </para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Some experimentation may be necessary to determine the correct allocation of the Deposit and
+ Withdrawal headings.
+ </para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Price</guilabel></emphasis>: The price for commodity transactions
+ and/or transactions involving currency exchange;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Memo</guilabel></emphasis>: Additional column containing descriptive
+ information relevant to one split of a transaction. If in the first line of a
+ multi-split import it will apply to the source account. In subsequent
+ lines/splits it is applied to the transfer account defined in that line or
+ allocated to it in the matcher;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel></emphasis>: Apply to a column indicating the
+ reconciliation status of the transaction. This generally only applies to data
+ exported from <application>&appname;</application>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Reconcile Date</guilabel></emphasis>: Apply to a column which
+ specifies the date of reconciliation, generally only for
+ <application>&appname;</application> exported data;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transfer Action</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transfer Account</guilabel></emphasis>: This header should be
+ applied to a column which specifies the transfer account for the second split
+ of a single line import and/or for subsequent splits in multiline exported
+ transactions;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transfer Memo</guilabel></emphasis>: Apply to a column with
+ descriptive information relevant to a split to a transfer account specified by
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transfer Account</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transfer Reconciled</guilabel></emphasis>: Apply to a column with
+ reconciliation status information relevant to a split to a transfer account
+ specified by <emphasis role="bold"> <guilabel>Transfer
+ Account</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transfer Reconcile Date</guilabel></emphasis>: Apply to a column
+ containing a reconciliation date relevant to a split to a transfer account
+ previously specified in <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transfer
+ Account</guilabel></emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Skip Errors</guilabel> check box will skip trying to import any rows with errors in
+ matching the columns.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>When you are happy with all the import settings, <link linkend="trans-import-csv-save">save</link>
+ them if you will use the same settings again, then press the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> button.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Match Import and <application>&appname;</application> accounts</emphasis>:
+ This window allows you to map the accounts identified in the account columns
+ (Account and Transfer Account) with accounts in the
+ <application>&appname;</application> account tree (Account name). Double click on a
+ row to bring up a dialog to select the matching <application>&appname;</application>
+ account. If you have previously imported transactions to this account and account
+ mappings can be matched automatically, this window will not be displayed. When you
+ have selected a match for all accounts, click on the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> button;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Transaction Information</emphasis>: The Transaction Information panel allows
+ review of data entry settings so far. Clicking Next will perform checks on the data.
+ If there are errors you will be returned to the <emphasis role="bold">Import
+ Preview</emphasis> pane to edit the settings. For no errors you proceed to the next
+ step;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Match Transactions</emphasis>: Clicking on Match Transactions will then bring
+ up the main <link linkend="trans-import-matcher">Import Matcher</link> window. The
+ Import Matcher is described in a separate section;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Import Summary</emphasis>: <application>&appname;</application> displays a
+ summary of the imported data. Click on the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Close</guibutton></emphasis> to exit the wizard.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </formalpara>
+
+ <caution>
+ <para>Multi-split imports of multicurrency transactions and commodity transactions are experimental and
+ may currently experience some errors. Please experiment and report any bugs encountered.
+ </para>
+<!--FIXME remove when bug fixes are incorporated.-->
+ </caution>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-import-MT940-MT942-DTAUS">
+ <title>Import MT940 and MT942 SWIFT and DTAUS format files</title>
+
+ <para>The SWIFT MT940 format is used for an end of day statement by banks using the SWIFT network for data
+ exchange. MT942 is used for an intra-day statement in the same system. DTAUS is a format
+ used with 9 track magnetic tapes since 1976 and later with other removable media (floppy
+ disks). DTAUS has not been supported by banks since 1 February 2016.
+ </para>
+<!--FIXME replace with link to glossary if and when extended to help -->
+ <para>When you select
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guimenu>File</guimenu>-><guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu>-></emphasis>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guimenuitem>Import MT940</guimenuitem></emphasis> or;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guimenuitem>Import MT942</guimenuitem></emphasis> or;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guimenuitem>Import DTAUS</guimenuitem></emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ from the menu, <application>&appname;</application> opens a file selection dialog. Navigate
+ to the MT940, MT942 or DTAUS format file you wish to import and then click on the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Import</guibutton></emphasis> button. On the first import
+ of data to a given account specification in the import file,
+ <application>&appname;</application> will bring up an account selection dialog to select an
+ appropriate account into which to import the transactions in the file.
+ <application>&appname;</application> will map the account description in the import file
+ onto the selected account and use it for future imports from the same account. The imported
+ transactions will then be displayed in the
+ <link linkend="trans-import-matcher"><emphasis role="bold"><guimenuitem>Generic Import
+ Transaction Matcher</guimenuitem></emphasis></link> for review.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-import-matcher">
+ <title>Generic Transaction Import Matcher</title>
+
+ <figure id="fig-fil-imp-match" pgwide="1">
+ <title>The Generic Transaction Import Matcher Window</title><screenshot id="ImportMatcherScreenShot">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_Transaction_matcher_1.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_Transaction_matcher_1.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ This is an image of the import transaction matcher window after opening a file to
+ import.
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The Import Matcher checks whether an imported transaction matches an existing transaction already
+ recorded in <application>&appname;</application> within a predefined time window (~+_42
+ days) for the account into which the transactions are being imported. A match probablity is
+ calculated based on the Date, Amount, Transaction ID's(if present), Check numbers (if
+ present) and the Description and split Memo fields. Exact matches will generate a high match
+ probability and flag a transaction as matching an existing transaction and therefore not to
+ be imported. If there is a lower quality match to an existing transaction, the imported
+ transaction may be flagged for updating of non-matching information in the
+ <application>&appname;</application> record of the matching transaction. These decisions can
+ be overridden by the user.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If no matching transaction can be identified the transaction will be flagged for import. The matcher
+ will attempt to assign a transfer account based on matches between tokenized information for
+ previously imported transactions stored in lists associated with the transfer accounts which
+ were assigned to them on import.
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If a good match is obtained, the transfer account is assigned and the transaction is flagged as
+ ready to import.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If a transfer account cannot be assigned, the transaction will be flagged for import and manual
+ assignment of the transfer account by the user. By default, if no transfer account is
+ assigned, transactions will be assigned to an Imbalance account on import. This is to
+ indicate that they need an appropriate account assigned to them.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The generic import transaction matcher is invoked when transaction data is imported using any of the
+ following import formats:
+ <itemizedlist spacing="compact">
+ <listitem>
+ <para>QIF;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>OFX/QXF;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>CSV;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>MT940;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>MT942;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>DTAUS.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>This window has the following
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <title>Controls:</title>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>List of downloaded transactions</guilabel></emphasis>: Table
+ containing information from the imported transactions.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Show the Source Account column</guibutton></emphasis>: Checkbox to
+ displays the account into which the transactions are being imported. This is the
+ second column labelled Account in the screenshot;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Help</guibutton></emphasis>: Display a popup help window;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton></emphasis>: Close this window without importing
+ transaction data;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>OK</guibutton></emphasis>: Close this window importing transaction
+ data;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>List of downloaded transactions</guilabel> has the following columns which display the
+ following information for each of the downloaded transactions:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <title id="trans-match-col">Columns in <quote>List of Downloaded Transactions</quote></title>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Date</guilabel></emphasis> - The date supplied with the downloaded
+ transaction;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account</guilabel></emphasis> - The import or base account to which
+ the transactions will be imported (optional see above);
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Amount</guilabel></emphasis> - The amount of the transaction (split
+ to the import or base account);
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Description</guilabel></emphasis> - The description of the
+ transaction;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Memo</guilabel></emphasis> - The memo for the split to the import or
+ base account of the transaction;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>A</guilabel></emphasis> - Checkbox which indicates that the
+ transaction is to be imported as a new transaction;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>U+C</guilabel></emphasis> - Checkbox which indicates that the
+ transaction matches an existing transaction but has some differences and the existing
+ transaction will be updated with the different information
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>C</guilabel></emphasis> - Checkbox which indicates that the
+ transaction matches an existing transaction and will not be imported;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Info</guilabel></emphasis> - For transactions which have been
+ matched to an existing transaction displays a bar indicating the quality of the match
+ and text indicating whether the transaction is to be imported.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>In addition to the checkboxes, the import status of each transaction is indicated by the background
+ color of the transaction row. The checkbox state, background colors and their meaning are
+ described in <xref linkend="match_status"/>.
+ </para>
+
+ <table id="match_status" frame="all" >
+ <title>Import Status of Transactions</title>
+
+ <tgroup cols="3" rowsep="1" >
+ <colspec colwidth="1*+ 1cm" align="center" colsep="1" />
+
+ <colspec colwidth="15*" align="left" colsep="1" />
+
+ <colspec colwidth="26*" align="left" colsep="1" />
+
+ <thead>
+ <row rowsep="1">
+ <entry>
+ Checked Box
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ Background
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+ Meaning
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows='1' valign='middle'>
+ <emphasis role="strong">A</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#FFD700"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#FFD700"?>
+ Gold
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#FFD700"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#FFD700"?>
+ No matches, flagged for input and no transfer account matched – Import as a
+ new transaction. Intervention required to select a transfer account.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ DarkSeaGreen1
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ No matches detected, flagged for input and a transfer account is matched –
+ Import as a new transaction. Reconciliation status will be set as cleared (c) on
+ import. Intervention is not required.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry valign='middle'>
+ <emphasis role="strong">U+C</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ DarkSeaGreen1
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ Matches an existing transaction but not exactly on date and/or amount –
+ Intervention not required, import and update. Reconciliation status will be set as
+ cleared (c) on import.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry valign='middle'>
+ <emphasis role="strong">C</emphasis>
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ DarkSeaGreen1
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ Matches an existing transaction: – Not to be imported. The existing
+ transaction reconciliation status will be as cleared (c) on import. Intervention is
+ not required
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry></entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#FF4040"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#FF4040"?>
+ Brown1
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#FF4040"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#FF4040"?>
+ Transaction has poor matches and no action was set: – Not to be imported.
+ Intervention required.
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry></entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+ Cornflower Blue
+ </entry>
+
+ <entry>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+ Row is selected
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The colors illustrated here are the defaults for <application>&appname;</application> specified in
+ <ulink url="https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash/blob/maint/gnucash/gnucash-fallback-310.css">gnucash-fallback-310.css</ulink>.
+ You may experience different colors if the gtk-3.0 CSS files have been modified
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>You may always intervene manually to
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>change the import action by selecting another checkbox (or none) and/or
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>manually assign a different transfer account
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ after reviewing the matched transactions and accounts and the automatically selected
+ actions.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Multi row selection is enabled for the list of downloaded transactions. The following operations can
+ be performed on the list of downloaded transactions:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Click <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton> on a row</emphasis>: Select this row
+ (row is displayed with a blue background);
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Double-click <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton> on a row</emphasis>: If the
+ transactions is flagged for import (see below) this will open an account selection
+ dialog to select a destination/transfer account to be used in the second split of the
+ imported transaction. You may create a new account if necessary in this dialog using the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>New Account</guibutton></emphasis> buttonIf the
+ transaction is flagged as matching an existing transaction either for import or
+ updating, the match picker dialog is opened to allow the matched transactions to be
+ examined and a correct match selected;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">
+ <keycombo action="simul">
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ on a row</emphasis>: Add the row to a selection of rows (displayed with a blue
+ background) to which a single destination/transfer account may be applied;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">
+ <keycombo action="simul">
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ on a row</emphasis>: Select all rows between the last selected row and this row and add
+ them to the current selection of rows;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Click <mousebutton>Button2</mousebutton> in the window</emphasis>: Display a
+ popup menu which when clicked in turn opens a dialog to select a single
+ destination/transfer account which will be applied to all rows currently selected.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <important>
+ <para>It is important to assign a transfer account to each transaction prior to import of the
+ transactions. Otherwise the tokenized information from the imported transaction will not
+ be appended to the list of tokens for an assigned account for use in future matching of
+ transactions to transfer accounts.
+ </para>
+ </important>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Note that "reconciled" in this context does not mean the same as "reconciled" in the process of
+ reconciling an account to an external statement. The reconciliation status of an imported
+ transaction is set to cleared (c) on import of a new transaction
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>Where a row has been matched to an existing transaction or is to update an existing transaction it
+ will have a DarkSeaGreen background. <emphasis role="bold">Double-clicking
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton></emphasis> on the row will bring up the Match Picker
+ dialog which displays detail of the imported. If you, feel the wrong transfer account has
+ been assigned or the matcher has not produced a valid result, you may change the checkbox
+ selection if you disagree with the matcher decisions and you may reassign an assigned
+ transfer account (see below).
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Double-clicking <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton></emphasis> on a row marked
+ as New with a <phrase>DarkSeaGreen1</phrase> background and a transfer account assigned to
+ it will bring up the account selection dialog to allow you to choose a different transfer
+ account for the second split.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Double-clicking <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton></emphasis> on a row marked
+ New with no transfer account matched with a <phrase>Gold</phrase> background will also bring
+ up the account selection dialog to allow you to assign a suitable transfer account to the
+ transaction.
+ </para>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Assign a Destination Account to a Single Transaction</title>
+
+ <para>The currently selected row is selected by <mousebutton>left</mousebutton> clicking it. It is
+ displayed with a <phrase>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+ Cornflower Blue</phrase> background color.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Double <mousebutton>left</mousebutton> clicking on a row will select it and open an Account
+ Selection dialog to allow you to assign a transfer account. Select the desired transfer
+ account in the dialog and click
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>OK</guibutton></emphasis>. The dialog has a
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>New Account</guibutton></emphasis> button which will
+ allow you to create a suitable account if there is no existing account which can be
+ applied as the transfer account.The row background will change to a <phrase>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ DarkSeaGreen1</phrase> and the assigned destination account will be displayed in the Info
+ column.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>or alternatively, <mousebutton>left</mousebutton> click on a row to select it followed by a
+ <mousebutton>right</mousebutton> click to bring up a popup menu then select
+ <guimenuitem>Assign a transfer account</guimenuitem> to display the <guilabel>Account
+ Selection</guilabel> dialog, select the destination account and click the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>OK</guibutton></emphasis> button.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Assign a Destination Account to Multiple Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>Sometimes you will have several transactions which can have the same destination account.
+ <application>&appname;</application> allows you to select multiple transactions and apply
+ the same destination account to all transactions in the selection.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Rows in a selection are displayed with a <phrase>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#6495ED"?>
+ Cornflower Blue</phrase> background.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Only rows which have the <emphasis role="strong">A</emphasis> checkbox checked and either a <phrase>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#CFFFCB"?>
+ DarkSeaGreen1</phrase> or <phrase>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#FFD700"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#FFD700"?>
+ Gold</phrase> background colour can be selected for inclusion in a multiple selection.
+ Rows with a <phrase>
+<?dbhtml bgcolor="#FF4040"?>
+<?dbfo bgcolor="#FF4040"?>
+ Brown1</phrase> background or with the <emphasis role="strong">U+C</emphasis> or
+ <emphasis role="strong">C</emphasis> checkboxes checked cannot be selected in a multiple
+ selection.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>To select rows and add rows to a selection either:
+ </para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Click <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton></emphasis> on first row and then
+ <emphasis role="bold">
+ <keycombo action='simul'>
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ </emphasis> on other rows to add to the selection; or
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Click <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton></emphasis> on first row and then
+ <emphasis role="bold">
+ <keycombo action='simul'>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap> <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ </emphasis> on another row to select all rows between them.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Rubber banding is also enabled so you may also <emphasis role="bold"> hold
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton> and drag</emphasis> over rows to create a
+ selection. To add more rows, <emphasis role="bold">
+ <keycombo action="press">
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ and drag</emphasis> over more rows.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>then <emphasis role="bold">
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <mousebutton>Button2</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ </emphasis> to display a popup menu and then select <guimenuitem>Assign a transfer
+ account</guimenuitem> to open the Account Selection dialog. Select the desired destination
+ account (create a new account if necessary) and click the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>OK</guibutton></emphasis> button in the Account Selection
+ dialog.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Completing the Import</title>
+
+ <para>Once you have assigned destination accounts for all the imported transactions using the above
+ methods (all row backgrounds will be a light green colour), check that the assigned
+ destination acounts are correct and then press the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the
+ bottom of <xref linkend="fig-fil-imp-match"/>. The transactions selected for import will
+ have their splits added to the selected source and destination accounts.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The tokenized data from the transactions assigned to a given transfer account is stored on exiting
+ from the matcher and is used to match transactions to the appropriate transfer account in
+ future imports.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans_match_picker">
+ <title>Match Picker</title>
+
+ <para>The Match Picker allows you to review and edit existing <application>&appname;</application>
+ transactions which have been matched to a transaction being imported.
+ <keycombo action ="double-click">
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ on a row with the <guilabel>C</guilabel> checkbox checked to bring this dialog up.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>The Match Picker Dialog</title><screenshot id="ImportMatcherPicker">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_MatchPicker.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_MatchPicker.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ The Match Picker dialog window showing existing &appname; transactions matching an
+ imported transaction.
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The top pane of the Match Picker displays details of the first split of the transaction to be
+ imported. The column labels:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Date</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Amount</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Description</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Memo</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Balanced</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+<!--FIXME ????-->
+ </itemizedlist>
+ are the same and have the same meaning as in <xref linkend="trans-match-col"/> with the
+ exception of the Balanced column which gives the amount of the balancing split for the
+ transaction.
+<!--FIXME not sure what happens here with multisplit transactions -->
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The lower pane displays the details of existing <application>&appname;</application> transactions
+ which match this transaction. If no transactions are displayed check the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Show Reconciled</guilabel></emphasis> checkbox at the bottom
+ of the panel. The first row in this pane will normally be the auto-matched transaction with
+ the best match score. Other rows will display other existing transactions which might also
+ be matches for the transaction being imported. The columns in this pane are:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Confidence</guilabel></emphasis>: This column indicateds the
+ confidence of the individual match as both a bar chart and a numerical value. Where
+ the bar extends into the green, the match is good. If the bar only extend to the red
+ or yellow setions the quality of match is more doubtful.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Date</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Amount</guilabel></emphasis>: If this does not match exactly the
+ amount of the transaction being imported but otherwise the match is good, the amount
+ of the imported transactions is used to update the existing transaction matching it.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Description</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Memo</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Reconciled</guilabel></emphasis>: Indicates the reconciliation
+ status of a matching existing transaction.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Pending Action</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+<!--FIXME not sure what this column really indicates. Doesn't seem to display the actual action proposed i.e. whether it is to skip importing or to update an existing transaction.-->
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>If you are not happy with the existing transaction that was auto-matched,
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ on your preferred match to select it and then
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ the <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>OK</guibutton></emphasis>. The transaction will then be
+ marked as a (manual) match in the Info column of the Import Matcher. To exit the dialog
+ without changing the auto-match
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ on the <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton></emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="ImportMatchEditor">
+ <title>Import Match Editor</title>
+
+ <para>The Import Match Editor allows you to edit the data used by <application>&appname;</application> to
+ automatically assign a transfer account in the Import Matcher. It can be used to edit the
+ data used by the Bayesian matcher, the Non-Bayesian matcher and online ID's. To open it
+ select <emphasis role="bold"> <guimenu>Tools</guimenu>-><guimenuitem>Import Map
+ Editor</guimenuitem></emphasis> from the menu.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>The Import Map Editor</title><screenshot>
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_Map_Editor.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Import_Map_Editor.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ The Import Map Editor illustrating typical entries for the Bayesian matcher.
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The three radio buttons at the top of the dialog select the type of data being displayed and edited:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Bayesian</guilabel></emphasis>: The Bayesian matcher matches a
+ transfer or destination account using the frequency of association of a token string
+ with an assigned transfer/destination account in the Import matcher for a specific
+ source account (the account that the first split of the imported transactionis
+ directed to);
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Non-Bayesian</guilabel></emphasis>: The Non Bayesian matcher matches
+ the transfer account on the basis of the occurrence of a token string in transactions
+ assigned to a transfer/destination account and does not record the frequency of
+ association. This was the original <application>&appname;</application> matching
+ process and has now been superceeded by the Bayesian matcher in more recent versions;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>OnlineiD</guilabel></emphasis>: Online ids are specific strings
+ which identify specific accounts in information downloaded from online sources. they
+ may include account numbers and specific instiution identifiers.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Bayesian</guilabel></emphasis> matcher data columns are:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Source Account</guilabel></emphasis>: This is the account into which
+ a transaction has been imported and is normally the first split in an imported record.
+ It may either be specified in the record itself or during the import setup for all
+ transactions to be imported. The arrow control at the left of each entry in this
+ column may be used to display all the data used in matching a transfer or destination
+ account for transactions which have this account as their source split;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match String</guilabel></emphasis>: This column displays a specific
+ token string that has been associated with the allocation of the account in the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Mapped to Account Name</guilabel></emphasis> column as
+ a transfer/destination account for transfers to the <guilabel>Source
+ Account</guilabel>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Mapped to Account Name</guilabel></emphasis>: The account name in
+ this column is a <application>&appname;</application> account name which has been
+ allocated as a transfer/destination account in association with the token string in
+ the <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match String</guilabel></emphasis> column;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Count of Match String Usage</guilabel></emphasis>: This is the
+ number of times the token string in the <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match
+ String</guilabel></emphasis> column has occurred in association with the
+ transfer/destination account specified in the <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Mapped
+ to Account Name</guilabel></emphasis> column for transactions imported to
+ <application>&appname;</application>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Non-Bayesian</guilabel></emphasis> matcher displays the same
+ first three columns as the Bayesian matcher having the same usage. It does not store data on
+ the frequency with which a particular token is associated with the assignement of a given
+ transfer/destination account. It has an additional column which specifies the type of the
+ imported data process in which the assignment occurred.It has the following columns:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Source Account</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Based on</guilabel></emphasis>: This identifies the import process
+ in which the <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match String</guilabel></emphasis> was
+ associated with the transfer destination account in the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Mapped to Account Name</guilabel></emphasis> column;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match String</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Mapped to Account Name</guilabel></emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Online ID</guilabel></emphasis> displays the same columns with the
+ same data as the Non-Bayesian matcher.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Filter</guilabel></emphasis> textbox at the bottom of the dialog
+ allows filtering of the displayed data matching the entered string in either the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Match String</guilabel></emphasis> column or the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Mapped to Account Name</guilabel></emphasis> column.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Expand All</guibutton></emphasis> and
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Collapse All</guibutton></emphasis> buttons expand or
+ collapse the data in the other columns for the accounts in the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Source Account</guilabel></emphasis> column.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Delete</guibutton></emphasis> button will delete any selected
+ rows in the displayed matcher data.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Close</guibutton></emphasis> button closes the Import Match
+ Editor dialog.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-export">
+ <title>Exporting Transactions</title>
+
+ <para><application>&appname;</application> allows transaction data to be exported in CSV format with the
+ optional use of alternative column separators. Transactions can be exported in either a single
+ line format (simple layout) which can only be used for transactions with two splits and may
+ not allow all the data associated with a transaction to be exported or in a multiline format
+ where two or more lines are used for transactions with two or more splits with each splits
+ information on separate lines. Transaction data can be exported either from the currently
+ selected active register or from selected accounts. The menu commands to export transactions
+ are:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guimenu>File</guimenu>-><guisubmenu>Export</guisubmenu>-><guimenuitem>Export
+ Transactions to CSV</guimenuitem></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guimenu>File</guimenu>-><guisubmenu>Export</guisubmenu>-><guimenuitem>Export
+ Active Register to CSV</guimenuitem></emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ These commands start the wizard illustrated in
+<!--FIXME -->
+ to setup the export. They differ only in that in the latter case the
+ <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account Selection</guilabel></emphasis> step is not available
+ in the left hand pane.
+ </para>
+
+ <figure pgwide="1">
+ <title>The Export Transactions Wizard.</title><screenshot id="export-transactions-wizard">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Choose_Export_Settings.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/Help_Choose_Export_Settings.png" format="PNG" srccredit="David Cousens"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </figure>
+
+ <para>The Export transaction wizard opens at the first step and performs the steps listed in the left hand
+ pane:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Choose Export Settings</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account Selection</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Choose File Name for export</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Export Now...</guilabel></emphasis>;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Export Summary</guilabel></emphasis>.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Navigation between the steps uses the buttons displayed in the right hand lower corner of the
+ wizard. Which of the following buttons are displayed will depend on what is permissible from
+ the step:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Cancel</guilabel></emphasis>: Exit the wizard without exporting any
+ transactions;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Back</guilabel></emphasis>: Return to the previous step in the
+ wizard;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Next</guilabel></emphasis>: Proceed to the next step.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-export-settings">
+ <title>Choose Export Settings</title>
+
+ <para>This step allows you to choose various options in the formattig of the transactions being exported.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Options</guilabel></emphasis> checkboxes may be selected singly
+ or both may be selected together:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Quotes</guilabel></emphasis>: Surround each data field in quotes;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Simple layout</guilabel></emphasis>: If checked, the ouput
+ transaction data will be as displayed in the single row register view option and some
+ of the transfer detail may be lost.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The column headers for data exported in <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Simple
+ layout</guilabel></emphasis> format are:
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Date</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account Name</guilabel></emphasis>: name of the source account;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Number</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Description</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Full Category Path</guilabel></emphasis>: full account name for
+ transfer/destination account;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Amount with Sym</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Amount NUm</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Rate/Price</guilabel></emphasis>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>If <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Simple layout</guilabel></emphasis> is not checked the
+ transaction data will be exported in a multi-line format.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The column headers for a multiline output for a transaction are:
+ </para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Date</guilabel></emphasis>: first line only;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Transaction ID</guilabel></emphasis>: first line only;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Number</guilabel></emphasis>: first line only;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Description</guilabel></emphasis>: first line only
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Notes</guilabel></emphasis>: first line only;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Commodity/Currency</guilabel></emphasis>: first line only;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Void Reason</guilabel></emphasis>: first line only;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Action</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Memo</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Full Account Name</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent
+ lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Account Name</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Amount with SYm</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent
+ lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Amount Num</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Reconcile Date</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent
+ lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Rate/Price</guilabel></emphasis>: first line and subsequent lines;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>Each line contains the data relevant to a single split with the first line also having transaction
+ data relevant to all splits in the first 7 columns.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Separators</guilabel></emphasis> radio buttons allow the choice
+ of an alternative column separator:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Comma(,)</guilabel></emphasis>: This is the default separator;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Colon(:)</guilabel></emphasis>: Use a colon to separate the columns;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Semicolon(;)</guilabel></emphasis>: Use a semicolon to separate the
+ columns;
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Custom</guilabel></emphasis>: Define a custom character to separate
+ the columns by entering it in the textbox.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ on <guibutton>Next</guibutton></emphasis> to go to the next step.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-export-account-select">
+ <title>Account Selection</title>
+
+ <para>This step allows selection of one or more accounts and the specification of the date range
+ containing the transactions to be exported.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Accounts</guilabel></emphasis> panel displays an account tree
+ which allows one or more accounts to be selected for export. (
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><mousebutton>Button1></mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ and
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap><mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ may be used to select accounts). The <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Select
+ Subaccounts</guibutton></emphasis> button will select all subaccounts of a selected account.
+ The <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Select All</guibutton></emphasis> button will select
+ all accounts in the account tree for export. The number of accounts which have been selected
+ is indicated.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold"><guilabel>Dates</guilabel></emphasis> panel allows selection of either all
+ transactions or only those within a selected date range in the selected accounts to be
+ exported.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-export-choosefile">
+ <title>Choose File Name for export</title>
+
+ <para>A file selection dialog is presented allowing specification of a file name and a path to the
+ directory/folder in which it is to be stored.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-export-now">
+ <title>Export Now...</title>
+
+ <para>The filename and path of the file to be exported and the number of accounts to be exported is
+ displayed. To continue with the export
+ <keycombo action="click">
+ <mousebutton>Button1</mousebutton>
+ </keycombo>
+ the <emphasis role="bold"><guibutton>Apply</guibutton></emphasis> button.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="trans-export-summary">
+ <title>Export Summary</title>
+
+ <para>Displays a message if the file is successfully exported or an error message and debugging
+ suggections if not.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="trans-online">
+ <title>Online Actions ...</title>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>This section is "under construction - any input will be welcome !!".
+ </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Get Balance</title>
+ <para></para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Get Transactions ...</title>
+ <para></para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Issue Transaction</title>
+ <para></para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2>
+ <title>Direct Debit</title>
+ <para></para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+ <sect1 id="general-journal">
+ <title>General Journal</title>
+
+ <para>The General Journal is an advanced register used to enter transactions without needing to open
+ individual accounts. The General Journal shows the transaction entries for all accounts on one
+ register.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Entering transactions in the General Journal is more complicated than entering them in the
+ individual account registers. The advantage is the General Journal provides a more
+ comprehensive view of the transactions you have entered in all your accounts.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>The General Journal defaults to showing only the previous month of transactions. This is changeable
+ by using the "Filter By..." on the View menu.
+ </para>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/help/de/Makefile.am b/help/de/Makefile.am
index f18550b..34ceb55 100644
--- a/help/de/Makefile.am
+++ b/help/de/Makefile.am
@@ -5,6 +5,13 @@ omffile = $(docname)-de.omf
entities = \
Help_ch_Intro.xml \
Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml \
+ Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml \
+ Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml \
+ Help_ch_Transactions.xml \
+ Help_ch_Business.xml\
+ Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml \
+ Help_ch_Reports.xml \
+ Help_ch_Customize.xml \
Help_fdl-appendix.xml \
Help_legal.xml \
Help_chartofaccts.xml \
diff --git a/help/de/gnucash-help.xml b/help/de/gnucash-help.xml
index c7f2b4e..44db915 100644
--- a/help/de/gnucash-help.xml
+++ b/help/de/gnucash-help.xml
@@ -47,7 +47,9 @@
<publisher>
<publishername>&appname; Documentation Team</publishername>
-<address><email>gnucash-user at gnucash.org</email></address>
+<address>
+ <email>gnucash-user at gnucash.org</email>
+ </address>
</publisher>
<xi:include href="Help_legal.xml" />
@@ -403,7 +405,7 @@
<surname>Translator 1</surname>
<affiliation>
<orgname>Latin Translation Team</orgname>
- <address><email>translator at gnome.org</email></address>
+ <address> <email>translator at gnome.org</email> </address>
</affiliation>
<contrib>Latin translation</contrib>
<email>email at address.com</email>
@@ -443,10710 +445,20 @@
<xi:include href="Help_ch_Intro.xml" />
<!--xi:include href="Help_ch_GettingHelp.xml" /-->
<xi:include href="Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml" />
-<!--xi:include href="Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml" /-->
-<!--xi:include href="Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml" /-->
-<!--xi:include href="Help_ch_Transactions.xml" /-->
-<!--xi:include href="Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml" /-->
-<!--xi:include href="Help_ch_Reports.xml" /-->
-<!--xi:include href="Help_ch_Customize.xml" /-->
- <chapter id="appendix">
- <title>Anhang</title>
- <sect1>
-<!-- id="tip-of-the-day"-->
- <title>Tipp des Tages</title>
+ <xi:include href="Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml" />
- <para />
+ <xi:include href="Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml" />
- <para>Die <guilabel>Tipp des Tages</guilabel>-Box wird bei jedem Start von GnuCash angezeigt und gibt
- Hinweise zur Benutzung von GnuCash. Verwenden Sie die drei Knöpfe an der unteren Seite der
- Box um die Tipps durchzusehen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Schließen Sie die Box mit dem <guibutton>Schließen</guibutton>-Knopf
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Benutzen Sie den <guibutton>Zurück</guibutton>-Knopf, um sich den vorherigen Tipp anzusehen
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Benutzen Sie den <guibutton>Vor</guibutton>-Knopf um sich den nächsten Tipp anzusehen
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Entfernen Sie den Haken vor <guilabel>"Tipps beim Programmstart anzeigen"</guilabel>, um beim Start
- von GnuCash keine Tipps angezeigt zu bekommen. Diese Option kann auch unter
- <guimenu>Bearbeiten</guimenu> -> <guimenu>Einstellungen</guimenu> ->
- <guimenuitem>Allgemein</guimenuitem> geändert werden. Unter <guimenu>Hilfe</guimenu> ->
- <guimenuitem>Tipp des Tages</guimenuitem> erhalten Sie ebenfalls Zugang zur <guilabel>Tipp
- des Tages</guilabel>-Box.
- </para>
- </sect1>
-<!--/sect1-->
- <sect1 id="usage">
- <title>Benutzung</title>
-
- <sect2 id="windows">
- <title>GnuCash Fenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In den einzelnen GnuCash-Fenstern werden Ihre Konten sowie einige Hilfsmittel für die Arbeit mit
- Ihren Finanzdaten dargestellt. In diesem Abschnitt erhalten Sie einen Überblick über die
- verschiedenen Fenster, die Ihnen in GnuCash begegnen.
- </para>
-
- <sect3 id="account-tree">
- <title>Kontenhierarchie</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Fenster "Konten" enthält eine Übersicht über sämtliche Konten und deren Salden. Die Konten
- werden hier entsprechend der buchhalterischen Praxis in Kontoarten gruppiert. Das
- Fenster ermöglicht den Zugriff auf andere häufig genutzte Fenster und kontenbezogene
- Hilfsmittel.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um die Kontenhierarchie neu zu öffnen - falls Sie sie geschlossen haben, oder um eine zusätzliche
- Kontenhierarchie zu erhalten -, wählen Sie "Ansicht" -> "Neue Kontenhierarchie".
- Damit wird die Kontenhierarchie innerhalb des bestehenden Fensters geöffnet.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 3 beschreibt die einzelnen Bestandteile des Kontenhierarchie-Fensters.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table2">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bestandteil
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält die Menüs für das Kontenhierarchie-Fenster.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält Knöpfe für den Zugriff auf typische kontenbezogene Funktionen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zusammenfassungs-Leiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält eine Kurzzusammenfassung der Finanzdaten.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kontenhierarchie
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält den Kontenplan.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Statusleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält eine Kurzbeschreibung der Menüpunkte sowie einen Fortschrittsbalken.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="tree-menus">
- <title>Menüs</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In den folgenden Tabellen werden die Menüs des Kontenhierarchie-Fensters beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 4: Menü "Datei" - Datei- und Kontenfunktionen sowie Druckfunktion.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table3">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neue Datei
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Startet den Wizard "Neuen Kontenplan erstellen" und erzeugt eine neue Datei.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neues Konto
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Erstellt ein neues Konto und öffnet die Kontoeigenschaften.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neue Konto-Hierarchie
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Öffnet ein neues Exemplar der Kontenhierarchie-Ansicht.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Öffnen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Öffnet eine andere GnuCash-Datei. Menütastenkürzel: F3.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto öffnen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Sofern ein Konto ausgewählt ist, wird das Kontobuch für dieses Konto geöffnet.
- Menütastenkürzel: STRG-O.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Unterkonten öffnen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Sofern ein Konto ausgewählt ist, wird eine Hauptbuch-Ansicht für dieses Konto und alle Unterkonten
- geöffnet.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>In neuem Fenster öffnen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Öffnet ein neues Kontenhierarchie-Fenster. Dabei wird die aktuelle Kontenhierarchie bzw. der
- aktuelle Bericht verwendet.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zuletzt Geöffnet
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Öffnet eine Datei aus der Liste der vier zuletzt geöffneten Dateien.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Speichern
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Speichert die aktuell geöffnete Datei. Menütastenkürzel: STRG-S.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Speichern unter...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Speichert die aktuell geöffnete Datei unter einem anderen Namen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Import -> QIF-Datei importieren
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Startet den Wizarden "QIF-Datei importieren", um Dateien aus anderen Finanzprogrammen zu
- importieren.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Export -> Konten exportieren...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Exportiert die Kontenhierarchie in eine neue Datei. Daten werden nicht exportiert.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Drucken
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Druckt Berichte.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Eigenschaften
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Ermöglicht die Pflege von Optionen für die aktuelle Datei.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Schließen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Schließt die aktuell geöffnete Kontenhierarchie bzw. den aktuell geöffneten Bericht.
- Menütastenkürzel: STRG-W.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beenden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beendet GnuCash. Menütastenkürzel: STRG-Q.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 5: Menü "Bearbeiten" - Bearbeitungsfunktionen für Dateien und Konten sowie Einstellungen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table4">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Ausschneiden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kopieren
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Einfügen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto bearbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto löschen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Einstellungen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Stilvorlagen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Steuerrelevante Optionen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 6: Menü "Ansicht" - Ändern der Ansicht des Kontenhierarchiefensters.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table5">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktualisieren
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zusammenfassung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Statuszeile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 7: Menü "Aktionen" - Anlegen terminierter Buchungen, Überprüfen von Konten, Durchführen
- von Aktienteilungen, Buchen und Abgleichen von Geschäftsvorgängen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table6">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Terminierte Buchungen -> Terminierte Buchungen Editor
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Terminierte Buchungen -> Seit letztem Aufruf...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Terminierte Buchungen -> Hypothek & Darlehen Wizarde...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abgleichen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktienteilung...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Überprüfen -> Konto überprüfen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Überprüfen -> Unterkonten überprüfen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Überprüfen -> Alle überprüfen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 8: Menü "Geschäft" - GnuCash-Funktionen für Kleinunternehmen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table7">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kunden -> Neuer Kunde
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kunden -> Kunde suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kunden -> Neue Rechnung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kunden -> Rechnung suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kunden -> Neuer Auftrag
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kunden -> Auftrag suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kunden -> Zahlung verarbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zulieferer -> Neuer Zulieferer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zulieferer -> Zulieferer suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zulieferer -> Neue Rechnung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zulieferer -> Rechnung suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zulieferer -> Neuer Auftrag
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zulieferer -> Auftrag suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zulieferer -> Zahlung verarbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Steuertabellen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zahlungsbedingungen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 9: Menü "Berichte" - Berichte und Diagramme.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table8">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kontenübersicht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Steuer-Bericht & TXF Export
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsbericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beispiel & Benutzerdefiniert -> Einführungs-Beispielbericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beispiel & Benutzerdefiniert -> Benutzerdefiniert Mehrspaltig
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beispiel & Benutzerdefiniert -> Benutzerdefiniert Internet
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beispiel & Benutzerdefiniert -> Beispielbericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Erweitertes Portfolio
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Aktiva Balkendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Aktiva Tortendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Durchschnittlicher Kontostand
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Bilanz
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Portfolio
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Passiva Balkendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Passiva Tortendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Reinvermögen Balkendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva & Passiva -> Preisdiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge & Aufwendungen -> Aufwendungen Balkendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge & Aufwendungen -> Aufwendungen Tortendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge & Aufwendungen -> Erträge/Aufwendungen Diagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge & Aufwendungen -> Erträge Balkendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge & Aufwendungen -> Erträge Tortendiagramm
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge & Aufwendungen -> Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftliche Berichte -> Kundenbericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftliche Berichte -> Entwicklung Verbindlichkeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftliche Berichte -> Druckbare Rechnung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftliche Berichte -> Entwicklung Forderungen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftliche Berichte -> Zuliefererbericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 10: Menü "Werkzeuge" - Verschiedene Hilfsmittel und Editoren.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table9">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Hauptbuch
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Preis-Editor
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktien Editor
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Finanzrechner
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftsvorgänge suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 11: Menü "Hilfe" - Diese Hilfe sowie das Dokument "GnuCash-Kurs und Konzepte".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table10">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>GnuCash-Kurs und Konzepte
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Tipp des Tages
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Hilfe
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Info...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tree-toolbar">
- <title>Werkzeugleisten-Knöpfe</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Kontenhierarchie-Fenster besitzt eine Werkzeugleiste für den schnellen Zugriff auf häufig
- genutzte kontenbezogene Funktionen. Mit dem Menübefehl "Werkzeugleiste" im Menü
- "Ansicht" kann die Werkzeugleiste ein- und ausgeblendet werden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 12: Werkzeugleiste im Kontenhierarchie-Fenster
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table11">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleisten-Knopf
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Speichern
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Schließen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Öffnen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bearbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Optionen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neu
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Löschen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beenden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tree-summary">
- <title>Zusammenfassungs-Leiste</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Zusammenfassungs-Leiste zeigt Ihr aktuelles Nettovermögen und Ihren aktuellen Gewinn auf einen
- Blick an. Mit dem Menübefehl "Zusammenfassung" im Menü "Ansicht" kann die
- Zusammenfassungs-Leiste ein- und ausgeblendet werden.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tree-main">
- <title>Kontenhierarchie</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Kontenhierarchie zeigt eine Liste Ihrer Konten in einer Baumstruktur an. Dies ermöglicht, dass
- Sie Ihre Konten nach Kontoart organisieren können.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Kästchen mit dem Pluszeichen dient zum Öffnen und Schließen eines Zweiges der
- Kontenhierarchie. Wenn Sie das Kästchen anklicken, ändert sich das Pluszeichen in
- ein Minuszeichen, was darauf hinweist, dass der Zweig geöffnet ist. Direkt unter der
- Kontobezeichnung erkennen Sie dann eine Linie, welche entweder zum Unterkonto oder zu
- einem weiteren Kästchen führt. Dies kennzeichnet die zugehörige nächsttiefere
- Ebene der Kontenhierarchie.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Standardmäßig wird das Kontenhierarchie-Fenster im Karteikarten-Modus angezeigt. Dies erkennen Sie
- an dem Reiter auf der linken Seite. Wenn Sie Berichte oder weitere
- Kontenhierarchie-Fenster öffnen, erscheinen dort zusätzliche Reiter.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tree-status">
- <title>Statusleiste</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Statusleiste zeigt kurze Hilfetexte zu den Menüs an, welche den jeweiligen Menüpunkt näher
- erläutern. Weiterhin erscheint hier beim Öffnen oder Speichern einer Datei ein
- Fortschrittsbalken. Mit dem Menübefehl "Statuszeile" im Menü "Ansicht" kann die
- Statusleiste ein- und ausgeblendet werden.
- </para>
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="account-register">
- <title>Kontobuch-Fenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Fenster "Kontobuch" dient zur Eingabe und Bearbeitung der Buchungsdaten für ein Konto. Es
- stellt auch Hilfsmittel für die Terminierung zukünftiger Geschäftsvorgänge, für die
- Suche nach Geschäftsvorgängen, für die Erstellung von Berichten sowie für das
- Drucken von Schecks zur Verfügung.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um das Kontobuch für ein bestimmtes Konto zu öffnen, wählen Sie das Konto in der Kontenhierarchie
- aus und wählen Sie "Datei" -> "Konto öffnen" oder drücken Sie STRG-O. Damit wird
- ein neues Fenster mit dem Kontobuch geöffnet. Weitere Möglichkeiten sind Die
- Schaltfläche "Öffnen" in der Werkzeugleiste und Die Schaltfläche "Gegen" in einem
- anderen Kontobuch-Fenster.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Abbildung ? zeigt ein Kontobuch-Fenster. [FIXME: Abbildung hier einfügen]
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die einzelnen Bestandteile des Kontobuch-Fensters sind in Tabelle 13 beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table14">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bestandteil
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält die Menüs für das Kontobuch-Fenster.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält Knöpfe für den Zugriff auf typische kassenberichtsbezogene Funktionen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zusammenfassungs-Leiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält eine Kurzzusammenfassung der Finanzdaten.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Liste der Geschäftsvorgänge
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Der Bereich, in dem Geschäftsvorgänge eingegeben und bearbeitet werden.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Statusleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält eine Kurzbeschreibung der einzelnen Bereiche in der Liste der Geschäftsvorgänge.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="reg-menus">
- <title>Menüs</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In den folgenden Tabellen werden die Menüs des Kontobuch-Fensters beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 14: Menü "Datei" - Datei- und Kontenfunktionen sowie Druckfunktion.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table15">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neues Konto
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Erstellt ein neues Konto und öffnet die Kontoeigenschaften.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Speichern
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Speichert die aktuell geöffnete Datei. Menütastenkürzel: STRG-S.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Speichern unter...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Speichert die aktuell geöffnete Datei unter einem anderen Namen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Drucken
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Druckt den Kontenbericht.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Scheck drucken
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Druckt den angegebenen Scheck.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Schließen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Schließt das Fenster. Menütastenkürzel: STRG-W.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beenden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beendet GnuCash. Menütastenkürzel: STRG-Q
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 15: Menü "Bearbeiten" - Bearbeitungsfunktionen für Konten und Geschäftsvorgänge sowie
- Suche nach Geschäftsvorgängen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table16">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Ausschneiden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kopieren
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Einfügen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto bearbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftsvorgang ausschneiden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftsvorgang kopieren
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Geschäftsvorgang einfügen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Suche
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 16: Menü "Ansicht" - Ändern der Ansicht des Kontobuch-Fensters.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table17">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zusammenfassung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Statuszeile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungen auswählen -> Datumsbereich -> Alle anzeigen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungen auswählen -> Datumsbereich -> Bereich festlegen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Standardreihenfolge
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Datum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Eingabe-Datum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Datum des Kontoauszugs
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Nummer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Betrag
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Buchungstext
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Sortierreihenfolge -> Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Stil -> Vereinfachtes Hauptbuch
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Stil -> Auto-Mehrteiliges Hauptbuch
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Stil -> Amerikanisches Journal
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Stil -> Zwei Zeilen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 17: Menü "Aktionen" - Eingeben, Löschen, Duplizieren von Geschäftsvorfällen, Erfassung
- von mehrteiligen Vorgängen, terminierten Buchungen und Aktienteilungen, Überprüfen
- von Konten, Buchen und Abgleichen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table18">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abgleichen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktienteilung...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Ãœbernehmen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abbrechen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Löschen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neue Buchung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchung duplizieren...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Mehrteiliger Vorgang
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Terminiert...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Gegenbuchung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Überprüfen -> Alle Geschäftsvorgänge
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Überprüfen -> Dieser Geschäftsvorgang
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 18: Menü "Berichte" - Berichte und Diagramme
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table20">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kontenbericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsbericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 19: Menü "Werkzeuge" - Verschiedene Hilfsmittel und Editoren.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table21">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Hauptbuch
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Preis-Editor
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktien Editor
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Finanzrechner
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Table 19: Menü "Hilfe" - Diese Hilfe sowie das Dokument "GnuCash Kurs und Konzepte".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table22">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>GnuCash-Kurs und Konzepte
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Tipp des Tages
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Hilfe
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Info...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="reg-toolbar">
- <title>Werkzeugleisten-Knöpfe</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Kontobuch-Fenster besitzt eine Werkzeugleiste für den schnellen Zugriff auf häufig genutzte
- Funktionen im Zusammenhang mit der Liste der Geschäftsvorgänge. Mit dem Menübefehl
- "Werkzeugleiste" im Menü "Ansicht" kann die Werkzeugleiste ein- und ausgeblendet
- werden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 21: Werkzeugleiste im Kontobuch-Fenster
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table12">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleisten-Knopf
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Schließen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Eingeben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abbrechen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Löschen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Duplizieren
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Terminiert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Mehrteilig
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neu
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Gegen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Suchen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bericht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Drucken
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="reg-summary">
- <title>Zusammenfassungs-Leiste</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Zusammenfassungs-Leiste zeigt verschiedene Salden, die zum aktuell geöffneten Konto gehören,
- auf einen Blick an. Im Normalfall werden zu einem Konto der tagesaktuelle Saldo, ein
- möglicher zukünftiger Saldo, ein Saldo für bestätigte Einträge und ein
- abgeglichener Saldo angezeigt. Eine Ausnahme bilden Aktienkonten, hier erscheint
- stattdessen die Summe der Anteile und deren aktueller Wert. Mit dem Menübefehl
- "Zusammenfassung" im Menü "Ansicht" kann die Zusammenfassungs-Leiste ein- und
- ausgeblendet werden.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="reg-main">
- <title>Liste der Geschäftsvorgänge</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In der Liste der Geschäftsvorgänge erscheinen die von Ihnen eingegebenen Geschäftsvorgänge sowie
- der fortlaufende Saldo. Außerdem steht eine leere Zeile zur Eingabe neuer
- Geschäftsvorgänge zur Verfügung. Die Spaltentitel können je nach Kontoart des
- geöffneten Kontos unterschiedlich sein. Allgemein gleichlautende Spalten sind
- "Datum", "Beschreibung", "Buchen" und "Saldo".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Sie können das Menü "Ansicht" verwenden, um das Erscheinungsbild der Liste zu verändert.
- Beispielsweise ist es möglich, die Anzahl der angezeigten Geschäftsvorgänge
- einzuschränken, eine andere Sortierreihenfolge zu verwenden oder den Anzeigestil zu
- ändern, um Geschäftsvorgänge übersichtlicher darzustellen. Darüber hinaus
- gestattet Die Schaltfläche "Mehrteilig" einen schnellen Zugriff auf alle
- Buchungsbestandteile.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="reg-status">
- <title>Statusleiste</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Statusleiste zeigt jeweils eine kurze Beschreibung an, wenn ein bestimmtes Feld in der Liste der
- Geschäftsvorgänge ausgewählt ist. Mit dem Menübefehl "Statuszeile" im Menü
- "Ansicht" kann die Statusleiste ein- und ausgeblendet werden.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="reg-gl">
- <title>Hauptbuch</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Hauptbuch stellt ein erweitertes Kontobuch dar, mit dem Sie Geschäftsvorgänge eingeben
- können, ohne einzelne Konten öffnen zu müssen. Die Buchungseinträge aller Konten
- werden hier in einem einzigen Kontobuch dargestellt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Eingabe von Geschäftsvorgängen im Hauptbuch ist etwas komplizierter als die Eingabe im
- Kontobuch des jeweiligen Kontos. Der Vorteil ist jedoch, dass das Hauptbuch eine
- umfassendere Sicht auf die Geschäftsvorgänge in allen Konten bietet.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Standardmäßig werden im Hauptbuch nur die Geschäftsvorgänge des letzten Monats angezeigt. Sie
- können dies über den Menüpunkt "Buchungen auswählen -> Datumsbereich" im Menü
- "Ansicht" ändern.
- </para>
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="report-win">
- <title>Berichtsfenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Berichtsfenster erscheint immer dann, wenn Sie einen Bericht oder ein Diagramm aus dem Menü
- "Berichte" aufrufen. Es besitzt eine Anzeige ähnlich einem Web-Browser, in der Sie
- beispielsweise Hyperlinks zu den Kontendaten anklicken können.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Derzeit werden sämtliche Funktionen des Berichtsfensters über Werkzeugleisten-Knöpfe aufgerufen.
- </para>
-
- <sect4 id="report-toolbar">
- <title>Werkzeugleisten-Knöpfe</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Berichtsfenster besitzt eine Werkzeugleiste für den schnellen Zugriff auf berichtsbezogene
- Funktionen. Mit dem Menübefehl "Werkzeugleiste" im Menü "Ansicht" kann die
- Werkzeugleiste ein- und ausgeblendet werden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 22: Werkzeugleiste im Berichtsfenster
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table13">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleisten-Knopf
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Speichern
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Schließen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Zurück
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Vorwärts
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erneut laden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abbrechen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Exportieren
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Optionen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Drucken
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beenden
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="report-main">
- <title>Bericht</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Dies ist der Bereich, in dem der von Ihnen gewählte Bericht bzw. das von Ihnen gewählte Diagramm
- angezeigt wird. Die Eigenschaften dieses Fensters können auf zweierlei Art verändert
- werden: Mit dem Knopf "Optionen" in der Werkzeugleiste können Sie einstellen, was
- genau der Bericht anzeigt und aus welchen Konten die Information bezogen wird. Mit dem
- Menübefehl "Bearbeiten" -> "Stilvorlagen..." können Sie die Eigenschaften der
- Web-Seite, in welcher der Bericht angezeigt wird, auswählen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Falls Ihr Bericht Hyperlinks zu externen Web-Seiten enthält, kann sich das Berichtsfenster wie ein
- Web-Browser verhalten. Mithilfe der Werkzeugleisten-Knöpfe können Sie sich zwischen
- Web-Seiten zurück und vorwärts bewegen. Wenn Sie bestimmte Hyperlinks im Bericht,
- welche auf ein Konto verweisen, anklicken, öffnen sich die dazugehörigen Kontendaten
- im Kontobuch-Fenster.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Sie können einen Bericht als Datei speichern oder drucken. Verwenden Sie auch hierzu die
- entsprechenden Werkzeugleisten-Knöpfe.
- </para>
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="tool-win">
- <title>Weitere Werkzeuge</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In GnuCash gibt es eine Reihe von Fenstern für bestimmte Spezialzwecke. Diese Fenster stellen
- zusätzliche Funktionen gegenüber dem Grundfenster "Konten" zur Verfügung.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um den Editor für terminierte Buchungen aufzurufen, wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Terminierte
- Buchungen" -> "Terminierte Buchungen Editor". Um das Abgleichen-Fenster zu öffnen,
- wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Abgleichen..." (Menütastenkürzel: STRG-R). Alle anderen
- hier beschriebenen Werkzeuge erreichen Sie über das Menü "Werkzeuge".
- </para>
-
- <sect4 id="tool-sched">
- <title>Terminierte Buchungen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Editor für terminierte Buchungen ermöglicht das Anlegen und Bearbeiten von
- Geschäftsvorgängen, die automatisch in das Kontobuch aufgenommen werden sollen. Dies
- erfolgt in Kombination mit dem Wizarden "Seit letztem Aufruf", mit dem die
- Geschäftsvorgänge überprüft und eingegeben werden können.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect5 id="sched-win">
- <title>Terminierte Buchungen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der obere Bereich des Fensters "Terminierte Buchungen" enthält eine Liste der terminierten
- Buchungen, die derzeit eingerichtet sind. Hier sind jeweils der Name des
- Geschäftsvorgangs, die Häufigkeit der regelmäßigen Erfassung und der nächste
- Erfassungstermin aufgelistet.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Auf der rechten Seite dieses Fensters befinden sich drei Knöpfe zum Anlegen und Bearbeiten
- terminierter Buchungen. Die Knöpfe "Neu" und "Bearbeiten" öffnen das Dialogfenster
- "Terminierte Buchungen bearbeiten". Die Schaltfläche "Löschen" entfernt die
- ausgewählte terminierte Buchung.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Unterhalb der Liste befindet sich der Kalenderbereich "Geplante terminierte Buchungen". Dieser
- Mini-Kalender zeigt die Termine an, an denen terminierte Buchungen anstehen, so dass
- Sie leicht erkennen können, wann eine Buchung das nächste Mal auftritt. Wenn Sie
- im Kalender ein Datum anklicken, so öffnet sich eine Liste der terminierten
- Buchungen für dieses Datum. Wenn Sie danach die Maus über andere Datumsfelder
- bewegen, ändert sich die angezeigte Liste entsprechend dem gerade berührten Datum.
- Ein weiterer Mausklick auf den Kalender schließt die Liste.
- </para>
- </sect5>
-
- <sect5 id="sched-edit">
- <title>Terminierte Buchungen bearbeiten</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Fenster "Terminierte Buchungen bearbeiten" unterteilt sich in Namensfeld, Optionen-Bereich,
- Ende-Bereich, Häufigkeitsbereich, Mini-Kalender und Buchungsvorlagen-Bereich.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Bereich "Optionen" enthält Kontrollkästchen, mit denen Sie angeben, ob die Buchung automatisch
- erstellt werden soll und wieviel Tage im Voraus die Buchung erstellt bzw. eine
- Erinnerung eingeblendet werden soll.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Bereich "Ende" enthält Einstellungen, wie lange oder wie oft die Buchung regelmäßig erfasst
- werden soll.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Bereich "Häufigkeit" enthält Einstellungen, in welchem zeitlichen Abstand und zu welchen
- Terminen die Buchung erfasst wird.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Mini-Kalender visualisiert die Termine der bereits eingerichteten terminierten Buchungen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Im Bereich "Buchungsvorlage" wird der Geschäftsvorgang angelegt, welcher in das Kontobuch
- eingegeben werden soll.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Einzelheiten zu diesen Optionen finden Sie im Abschnitt "Buchungen terminieren".
- </para>
- </sect5>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tool-reconcile">
- <title>Abgleichen-Fenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Fenster "Abgleichen" dient zum Abgleich von Kontoauszügen der Bank mit einem Gnucash-Konto. Es
- ermöglicht den Zugriff auf eine Reihe von GnuCash-Funktionen, welche die Eingabe und
- Überarbeitung der Kontendaten während des Abgleichs erleichtern.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Sie öffnen das Abgleichen-Fenster aus dem Fenster "Konten" über den Menübefehl "Aktionen" ->
- "Abgleichen..." (Menütastenkürzel: STRG-R). Aus dem Fenster "Kontobuch" erreichen
- Sie es ebenfalls über "Aktionen" -> "Abgleichen...".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Abbildung ? zeigt ein Abgleichen-Fenster. [FIXME: Abbildung hier einfügen]
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 23 beschreibt die einzelnen Bestandteile des Abgleichen-Fensters.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table26">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bestandteil
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält die Menüs für das Abgleichen-Fenster.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleiste
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält Knöpfe für den Zugriff auf häufig benötigte abgleichsbezogene Funktionen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Haben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält eine Liste der Zugänge auf dieses Konto.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält eine Liste der Abgänge von diesem Konto.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Saldoanzeige
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Enthält einige Salden, die für den Abgleich benötigt werden.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect5 id="rec-menus">
- <title>Menüs</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In den folgenden Tabellen werden die Menüs des Abgleichen-Fensters beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 24: Menü "Abgleichen" - Informationen zum Abgleich sowie Fertigstellen und Unterbrechen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table27">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Informationen zum Abgleich...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Fertig
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Unterbrechen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abbrechen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 25: Menü "Konto" - Kontenfunktionen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table28">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto öffnen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto bearbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchen...
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Überprüfen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 26: Menü "Geschäftsvorgang - Funktionen zur Bearbeitung von Geschäftsvorgängen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table29">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neu
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bearbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Löschen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 27: Menü "Hilfe" - Hilfefunktion.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table30">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Menüpunkt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Hilfe
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
- </sect5>
-
- <sect5 id="rec-toolbar">
- <title>Werkzeugleisten-Knöpfe</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Abgleichen-Fenster besitzt eine Werkzeugleiste für den schnellen Zugriff auf häufig genutzte
- Funktionen im Zusammenhang mit dem Abgleich.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 28: Werkzeugleiste im Abgleichen-Fenster
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table31">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Werkzeugleisten-Knopf
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Neu
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bearbeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Löschen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Öffnen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Fertig
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
- </sect5>
-
- <sect5 id="rec-main">
- <title>Abgleichen-Fenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Bereich "Haben" listet alle nicht abgeglichenen Zugänge des Kontos auf.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Datum: Das Datum des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Nr: Die Nummer des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Beschreibung: Die Beschreibung des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Der Betrag des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>J: Zeigt ein grünes Häkchen an, falls der Geschäftsvorgang nach dem Fertigstellen abgeglichen
- sein würde.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Bereich "Soll" listet alle nicht abgeglichenen Abgänge des Kontos auf.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Datum: Das Datum des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Nr: Die Nummer des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Beschreibung: Die Beschreibung des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Der Betrag des nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgangs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>J: Zeigt ein grünes Häkchen an, falls der Geschäftsvorgang nach dem Fertigstellen abgeglichen
- sein würde.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Saldenanzeige zeigt die zum Abgleichen verwendeten Salden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Anfangssaldo: Der Saldo zum Ende des letzten Abgleichs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Schlusssaldo: Der eingegebene Saldo aus dem Kontoauszug.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Abgeglichener Saldo: Der Saldo der gewählten Geschäftsvorgänge.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Differenz: Die Differenz zwischen abgeglichenem Saldo und Schlusssaldo.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect5>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tool-price">
- <title>Preis-Editor</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Preis-Editor dient zur Pflege der Werte für Währungs-, Investmentfonds- und Aktienkonten. Er
- besitzt eine einheitliche Oberfläche zur Aktualisierung der Kurswerte und ermöglicht
- die Aktualisierung sowohl manuell als auch durch Online-Kurse.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Jeder Eintrag im Preis-Editor repräsentiert einen Kursdatensatz eines Wertpapiers bzw. einer
- Währung:
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Währung/Aktie: </emphasis>Die bewertete Währung bzw. das bewertete Wertpapier.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Währung: </emphasis>Die Währung, in der die Bewertung erfolgt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Datum: </emphasis>Das Datum, zu dem die Bewertung erfolgt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Quelle: </emphasis>Die Quelle des Kurses für das Wertpapier bzw. die Währung.
- Normalerweise lautet diese entweder "Anwender:Preis-Editor", was bedeutet, dass
- Sie den Kurs direkt eingegeben haben, oder "Finance::Quote", was bedeutet, dass
- der Kurs durch das Modul "Finance::Quote" aus einer Online-Börsenkursquelle
- gelesen wurde.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Art: </emphasis>Eine von mehreren unterschiedlichen Aktienkursarten:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Bid: </emphasis>Gibt an, was ein professioneller Händler für eine Aktie bezahlen würde.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Ask: </emphasis>Gibt an, zu welchem Preis ein Händler eine Aktie verkaufen würde.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Last: </emphasis>Gibt den Kurs an, zu welchem der letzte Handel des Wertpapiers stattfand.
- Dies ist der Kurs, der meistens in den Medien angegeben wird.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Net Asset Value: </emphasis>Wird üblicherweise bei Investmentfonds verwendet. Errechnet
- sich aus dem Nettowert des Fondsvermögens.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Unknown: </emphasis>Benutzen Sie dies, falls die Art des Kurses nicht bekannt ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis>Preis: </emphasis>Der zugehörige Kurs des Wertpapiers bzw. der Währung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um einen neuen Kurs einzugeben, wählen Sie "Hinzufügen" und geben Sie im Dialogfenster die
- Detailinformationen zum Kurs ein. Um einen bestehenden Kurs zu bearbeiten, markieren
- Sie ihn in der Liste "Preise", wählen Sie "Bearbeiten" und bearbeiten Sie die
- Angaben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um einen einzigen Kurs zu entfernen, markieren Sie den Kurs und wählen Sie "Entfernen". Wenn Sie
- alle Kurse entfernen wollen, die älter als ein bestimmtes Datum sind, wählen Sie
- "Alte entfernen..." und geben Sie im Dialogfenster das Datum ein.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um für ein bestimmtes Aktien- oder Investmentfonds-Konto Online-Kurse zu verwenden, müssen Sie
- zunächst die Online-Aktualisierung aktivieren und eine Preisquelle auswählen.
- Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie im Unterabschnitt "Neues Konto erstellen" des
- Abschnitts "Konten erstellen und bearbeiten". Sobald Online-Kurse aktiviert sind,
- können Sie mit dem Knopf "Kurse abrufen" die Kurse für Aktien und Investmentfonds
- aktualisieren.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tool-commodity">
- <title>Währungs-/Aktien-Editor</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Währungs-/Aktien-Editor dient zum Anlegen und Bearbeiten von Wertpapieren, welche von
- Investmentfonds- und Aktienkonten verwendet werden. Weiterhin kann er die Details der
- nationalen Währungen, die von GnuCash verwendet werden, anzeigen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Jeder Eintrag repräsentiert ein Wertpapier mit den folgenden Detailinformationen:
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Art: Geben Sie bei einer Aktie die Börse an, an der sie gehandelt wird. Für Investmentfonds
- verwenden Sie die Art "FUND". Wenn Ihr Wertpapier keiner dieser Arten entspricht,
- können Sie eine neue Art anlegen, indem Sie eine Bezeichnung in das Feld
- eingeben. Bei nationalen Währungen lautet die Art "ISO4217". ISO-4217 ist ein
- internationaler Standard, welcher für jede Währung ein eindeutiges, aus drei
- Buchstaben bestehendes Kürzel definiert. Nationale Währungen können nicht vom
- Benutzer bearbeitet werden.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Symbol: Gibt das Symbol bzw. das Kürzel für das Wertpapier/die Währung an. Dies ist entweder das
- Ticker-Symbol (bei Aktien) oder ein anderes eindeutiges Kürzel für das Papier.
- Wenn das Papier an einer öffentlichen Börse gehandelt wird, ist es wichtig, dass
- Sie dasselbe Symbol verwenden, welches auch an der Börse verwendet wird. Bei
- nationalen Währungen erscheint als Symbol das Währungskürzel nach ISO-4217.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Name: Der vollständige Name des Wertpapiers/der Währung, z.B. "US Dollar" oder "SAP AG
- Stammaktie".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Code: Ein beliebiger numerischer oder alphanumerischer Code zur Identifikation des Wertpapiers. In
- den USA gibt es mit der CUSIP eine eindeutige Ziffernfolge je Aktie, Anleihe,
- Investmentfonds sowie für die meisten handelbaren Optionen, Futures und anderen
- Papiere. In Deutschland ist dies die WKN, zukünftig die ISIN. Die Angabe eines
- Codes ist nicht zwingend notwendig.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Stückelung: Dies ist die kleinste handelbare Einheit des Wertpapiers, angegeben als Bruchteil einer
- einzelnen Nominaleinheit. Die GnuCash-Konten verwenden diese Einheit als
- Standardstückelung für den Handel mit dem Wertpapier.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um ein neues Wertpapier anzulegen, wählen Sie "Hinzufügen" und geben Sie im Dialogfenster "Neue
- Währung/Aktie" die Detailinformationen ein. Um ein bestehendes Wertpapier zu
- bearbeiten, markieren Sie das Wertpapier in der Liste, wählen Sie "Bearbeiten" und
- bearbeiten Sie die Angaben im Dialogfenster "Neue Währung/Aktie". Um ein Wertpapier
- zu löschen, markieren Sie es und wählen Sie "Entfernen".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um die Detailinformationen zu den nationalen Währungen einzublenden, wählen Sie die Option
- "Nationale Währungen anzeigen".
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tool-calc">
- <title>Finanzrechner</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Finanzrechner dient zum Rechnen mit Zinseszinsen. Es ermöglicht es, vier von fünf Parametern
- einer Zinseszinsrechnung einzugeben und daraus die fünfte Größe berechnen zu
- lassen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Rechner ist in zwei Bereiche unterteilt. Auf der linken Seite befinden sich fünf Felder,
- jeweils mit einem "Berechnen"- und einem "Zurücksetzen"-Knopf. Die Schaltfläche
- "Berechnen" dient zum Festlegen der Größe, die berechnet werden soll. Die
- Schaltfläche "Zurücksetzen" dient zum Löschen des Betrags in dem Feld.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungsintervalle: In diesem Feld können Sie die Anzahl der Zahlungen angeben, die für die
- Rechnung verwendet werden soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zinssatz: In diesem Feld können Sie den Zinssatz angeben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aktueller Wert: In diesem Feld können Sie den Barwert eingeben. Bei einem Darlehen ist dies
- üblicherweise der Betrag, den Sie geliehen bekommen. Dies ist der Basisbetrag
- für die Verzinsung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Periodische Zahlung: In diesem Feld können Sie den Betrag eingeben, in dessen Höhe die Zahlung
- für die gewählte Periode (z.B. monatlich, wöchentlich) erfolgt. Bei der
- Rückzahlung eines Darlehens sollte dies ein negativer Betrag sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zukünftiger Wert: In diesem Feld können Sie den Endwert, d.h. den Wert zum Ende der
- Zahlungsintervalle, eingeben. Bei der vollständigen Rückzahlung eines Darlehens
- würde dieser Wert Null sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Im rechten Fensterbereich kann eingestellt werden, in welcher Weise Zahlungen erfolgen, und welcher
- Verzinsungsmodus für die Berechnungen im linken Bereich zur Anwendung kommt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Zinsen: Mit diesem Knopfmenü können Sie das Intervall für die periodenbezogene Verzinsung
- auswählen, falls die Option "Periodenbezogene Verzinsung" gewählt ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungen: Mit diesem Knopf wählen Sie das Intervall für die Zahlungen, welches für das Feld
- "Zahlungsintervalle" maßgebend ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung am Ende der Periode: Verwenden Sie diese Option, wenn die Zahlung jeweils am Ende des
- Zahlungsintervalls stattfindet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung am Anfang der Periode: Verwenden Sie diese Option, wenn die Zahlung jeweils am Anfang des
- Zahlungsintervalls stattfindet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Periodenbezogene Verzinsung: Verwenden Sie diese Option, wenn Zinsen jeweils für eine Periode
- (entsprechend der Einstellung "Zinsen") anfallen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Kontinuierliche Verzinsung: Verwenden Sie diese Option, wenn Zinsen fortlaufend anfallen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungsbetrag: In diesem Feld wird der insgesamt gezahlte Betrag ausgegeben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Beispiele für die Benutzung des Finanzrechners finden Sie im Dokument "GnuCash-Kurs und Konzepte".
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="tool-find">
- <title>Geschäftsvorgänge suchen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Funktion "Geschäftsvorgänge suchen" gestattet die Suche nach Geschäftsvorgängen in GnuCash,
- wobei die Ergebnisse in einem Kontobuch-Fenster angezeigt werden. Das Dialogfenster
- trägt den Titel "Suchen nach...", und zeigt in der ersten Zeile die Bezeichnung
- "Mehrteilig suchen". In anderen Suchfenstern von GnuCash lautet diese Bezeichnung
- anders, doch der grundsätzliche Aufbau unterscheidet sich nicht.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um das Dialogfenster "Geschäftsvorgänge suchen" aus dem Fenster "Konten" heraus aufzurufen,
- wählen Sie im Menü "Werkzeuge" den Menüpunkt "Geschäftsvorgänge suchen" oder
- verwenden Sie das Menütastenkürzel STRG-F. Um das Dialogfenster aus dem Fenster
- "Kontobuch" heraus aufzurufen, wählen Sie im Menü "Bearbeiten" den Menüpunkt
- "Suche" oder verwenden Sie das Menütastenkürzel F6.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Suchfenster teilt sich in zwei Bereiche. Der obere Bereich enthält die Steuerelemente zur
- Einstellung der Suchkriterien, und der untere Bereich enthält die Auswahloptionen
- für den Suchtyp.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Im Bereich "Suchkriterium" befinden sich ganz oben zwei Knöpfe. Mit dem linken Knopf "Kriterium
- hinzufügen" können Sie eine weitere Zeile hinzufügen, so dass die Suche nach
- mehreren Kriterien durchgeführt wird. Eine neue Zeile kann erst hinzugefügt werden,
- wenn die bestehende Zeile vollständig ausgefüllt ist. Der rechte Knopf enthält ein
- Menü, mit dem ausgewählt werden kann, ob nach Einträgen gesucht werden soll, für
- die alle Kriterien erfüllt sind, oder nach Einträgen, für die mindestens ein
- Kriterium erfüllt ist. Die Suche mit der Option "Alle Kriterien werden erfüllt"
- verlangt, dass jede Kriterium-Zeile mindestens einmal mit dem Geschäftsvorgang
- übereinstimmt. Die Suche mit der Option "Irgendeines der Kriterien wird erfüllt"
- verlangt nur, dass eine der Kriterium-Zeilen mit dem Geschäftsvorgang übereinstimmt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Kriterium-Zeile kombiniert mehrere Elemente (Knopfmenüs, Eingabe-/Auswahlfelder und Knöpfe) zu
- einem Kriterium. Die folgende Tabelle beschreibt die möglichen Kombinationen der
- Elemente. (Hinweis: "reg. A." = regulärer Ausdruck)
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Table 29: Suchkriterienelemente.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table19">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="8">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Element 1
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Element 2
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Element 3
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Element 4
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Element 5
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Element 6
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Element 7
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Element 8
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält nicht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht nicht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungstext
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungstext
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält nicht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungstext
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungstext
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht nicht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Nummer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Nummer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält nicht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Nummer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Nummer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht nicht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktion
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktion
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>enthält nicht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktion
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktion
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht nicht reg. A.
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Groß-/Kleinschreibung ignorieren?
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsdatum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>vor
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Datumsauswahlfeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsdatum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>vor oder am
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Datumsauswahlfeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsdatum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>am
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Datumsauswahlfeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsdatum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>nicht am
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Datumsauswahlfeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsdatum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>nach
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Datumsauswahlfeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Buchungsdatum
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>nach oder am
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Datumsauswahlfeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben oder Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>kleiner
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben oder Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>kleiner oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben oder Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben oder Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>ungleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben oder Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben oder Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>kleiner
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>kleiner oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>ungleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Haben
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>kleiner
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>kleiner oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>ungleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Wert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>hat Soll
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Anteile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>weniger als
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Anteile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>weniger als oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Anteile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Anteile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>nicht gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Anteile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer als
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Anteile
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer als oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Share Price (Stückkurs)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>weniger als
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Share Price (Stückkurs)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>weniger als oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Share Price (Stückkurs)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Share Price (Stückkurs)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>nicht gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Share Price (Stückkurs)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer als
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Share Price (Stückkurs)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>größer oder gleich
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eingabefeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abgleichen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>ist
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Unbestätigt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Bestätigt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Abgeglichen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Fixiert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Storniert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Abgleichen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>ist nicht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Unbestätigt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Bestätigt
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Abgeglichen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Fixiert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Storniert
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Balanced (Ausgeglichen)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>ist
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>auf wahr setzen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Balanced (Ausgeglichen)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>ist nicht
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>auf wahr setzen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht irgendeinem Konto
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Konten wählen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Konto
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht keinem Konto
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Konten wählen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>All Accounts (Alle Konten)
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>entspricht allen Konten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Konten wählen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Entfernen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para />
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Bei einer Suche mit der Einstellung "Konto" werden alle Konten, die per Knopf "Konten wählen"
- gewählt wurden, einzeln durchsucht. Dies bedeutet, dass jeder Treffer aus einem der
- gewählten Konten eingeblendet (bei Einstellung "entspricht irgendeinem Konto") bzw.
- ausgeblendet (bei Einstellung "entspricht keinem Konto") wird.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Bei der Suche mit der Einstellung "All Accounts (Alle Konten)" werden Treffer aus Konten, die per
- Knopf "Konten wählen" gewählt wurden, nur dann eingeblendet, wenn sie in allen
- gewählten Konten ein Treffer sind.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Im Bereich "Suchtyp" gibt es vier Auswahlmöglichkeiten. Wenn Sie eine neue Suche starten, ist nur
- die erste Option verfügbar. Die anderen Optionen werden erst verfügbar, sobald das
- Fenster "Suchergebnisse" sichtbar ist. [Hinweis: Die Suche muss dann aus dem Fenster
- "Suchergebnisse" heraus aufgerufen werden.]
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Neue Suche: Führt eine neue Suche nach Geschäftsvorgängen durch.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Verfeinern der aktuellen Suche: Damit wird innerhalb der letzten Suchergebnisse gesucht.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Ergebnisse zur aktuellen Suche hinzufügen: Für die neue Suche müssen entweder die letzten
- Kriterien oder die neu angegebenen Kriterien erfüllt sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Ergebnisse von der aktuellen Suche löschen: Alle Ergebnisse, die auch Ergebnisse der letzten Suche
- waren, werden aus den neuen Suchergebnissen entfernt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="help-win">
- <title>Hilfefenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das GnuCash-Hilfefenster zeigt die Hilfedokumente, die mit GnuCash geliefert werden (zum Beispiel
- dieses), als Web-Seite an. Es besitzt darüber hinaus mittels einer Datenbank die
- Möglichkeit, in der Hilfe nach Begriffen zu suchen, und kann Web-Seiten direkt aus dem
- Internet laden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um das Hilfefenster aufzurufen, wählen Sie aus dem Menü "Hilfe" einen der Menüpunkte
- "GnuCash-Kurs und Konzepte" oder "Inhalt".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Hilfefenster besitzt eine Werkzeugleiste für die Navigation. Die Werkzeugleiste wird im
- folgenden beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Zurück: Kehrt zu einer zuvor betrachteten Seite zurück.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Vorwärts: Kehrt zu einer zuvor betrachteten Seite zurück.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Erneut laden: Lädt die aktuelle Seite neu.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Öffnen: Öffnet eine Web-Seite von einer anderen Adresse, welche nicht Bestandteil der
- Standard-Hilfe sein muss.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Abbrechen: Stoppt das Laden einer Web-Seite.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Drucken: Druckt die aktuelle Seite.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Schließen: Schließt das Hilfefenster.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die aktuell geöffnete Web-Seite wird im rechten Bereich des Hilfefensters angezeigt. Der linke
- Bereich enthält die Karteiseiten "Themen" und "Suchen". Wenn Sie auf der Karteiseite
- "Themen" ein Hilfethema auswählen, wird die entsprechende Web-Seite im rechten Bereich
- geladen. Die Liste der Hilfethemen enthält außerdem einen Link auf die
- GnuCash-Fehlerberichtsseite (&url-bug-start;).
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Karteiseite "Suchen" ermöglicht es, die Hilfe nach Dokumenten zu durchsuchen, welche die von
- Ihnen angegebenen Begriffe enthalten. Geben Sie den zu suchenden Begriff im Feld
- "Suchausdruck" ein und betätigen Sie den Knopf "Suchen". Sie erhalten eine Liste der
- Seiten, welche diesen Begriff enthalten. Wenn Sie einen der gefundenen Verweise in der
- Liste "Suchergebnisse" anklicken, wird die entsprechende Web-Seite geladen.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="setup-accounts">
- <title>Konten erstellen und bearbeiten</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In diesem Abschnitt wird die Vorgehensweise für die Anlage von Konten in GnuCash beschrieben. Ein
- Konto dient in GnuCash als grundlegendes Mittel, um die Aufzeichnung, von wo nach wo
- Geldflüsse stattfinden, zu organisieren. GnuCash erweitert dabei den allgemein
- geläufigen Kontobegriff (z.B. Bankkonto, Kreditkonto) auf gruppierbare Ertrags- und
- Aufwandskonten. Auf diese Weise können Sie leicht feststellen, wohin Ihr Geld fließt und
- was Ihre größten Einkünfte und Aufwendungen sind. GnuCash definiert die im nächsten
- Abschnitt beschriebenen Kontoarten, um die Systematisierung und Gruppierung der Konten zu
- unterstützen. Mittels dieser Kontoarten ist es möglich, einen Kontenplan
- (Kontenhierarchie) zu erstellen.
- </para>
-
- <sect3 id="acct-types">
- <title>Arten von GnuCash Konten</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>GnuCash unterstützt eine Anzahl verschiedener Kontoarten. Es wird empfohlen, dass Sie aus der
- folgenden Liste der Kontoarten jeweils die passende Kontoart auswählen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 30: Arten von GnuCash-Konten
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table23">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kontoart
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Beschreibung
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktiva
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Aktivkonten dienen zur Erfassung von Gegenständen oder anderem Vermögen, das einen Wert hat, und
- stellen die Vermögenswerte eines Unternehmens auf der linken Seite der Bilanz
- dar. (Normalerweise ein Platzhalterkonto)
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aufwendungen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Aufwendungen jeder Art, z.B. Lebensmittel, Kleidung, Steuern usw. Wird in Quicken als "Kategorie"
- bezeichnet.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bank
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Die Kontoart "Bank" bezeichnet Spar- und Girokonten bei einer Bank oder einem anderen
- Finanzinstitut. Einige dieser Konten können Zinsen tragen. Diese Kontoart
- eignet sich auch für Scheckkarten (Bankkarten), mit denen Zahlungen direkt
- einem Girokonto belastet werden.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bargeld
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Die Kontoart "Bargeld" bezeichnet das Bargeld, welches Sie z.B. in der Brieftasche, einem
- Schuhkarton, einer Sparbüchse oder unter Ihrer Matraze aufbewahren.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Aktienkonto
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Aktien oder Anteile an einer Gesellschaft, die den Eigentümer an all ihren Gewinnen und Risiken
- beteiligen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Eigenkapital
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Eigenkapitalkonten werden verwendet, um die Eröffnungsbestände beim ersten Start von GnuCash oder
- zu Beginn einer neuen Buchungsperiode zu erfassen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Erträge jeder Art, die Sie z.B. durch Gehaltseinkünfte, Zinsen, Dividenden usw. haben. Wird in
- Quicken als "Kategorie" bezeichnet.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Forderungen
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Forderungskonten (Debitoren) werden von einem Unternehmen verwendet, um Verkaufsvorgänge zu
- erfassen, für die Sie nicht sofort eine Zahlung erhalten haben.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Investmentfonds
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Ein professionell verwaltetes Portfolio aus Aktien, Anleihen oder anderen Geldanlagen, die sich in
- Anteile teilen lassen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kreditkarte
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Die Kontoart "Kreditkarte" bezeichnet Kreditkartenkonten, z.B. VISA, MasterCard oder American
- Express.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Passiva
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Passivkonten bezeichnen Schulden oder Verbindlichkeiten und stellen das auf der rechten Bilanzseite
- verzeichnete Eigen- und Fremdkapital eines Unternehmens dar. (Normalerweise
- ein Platzhalterkonto)
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Verbindlichkeiten
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Verbindlichkeitskonten (Kreditoren) erfassen Rechnungen, die ein Unternehmen erhalten hat, aber
- möglicherweise erst später bezahlen wird.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Währung
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Währungskonten finden Verwendung für den Handel mit Devisen.
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Wizarde "Neuen Kontenplan erstellen" bietet eine bequeme Methode, eine Anzahl von Konten zu
- erstellen, welche ein Grundgerüst aus den verschiedenen Kontoarten bilden. Er ist im
- ersten Anschnitt dieser Hife beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Bei der Erstellung neuer Konten sind die verfügbaren Möglichkeit für die Kontoart eingeschränkt,
- je nachdem, welche Kontoart das übergeordnete Konto (Hauptkonto) hat. Nachfolgend sind
- die einzelnen Auswahlmöglichkeiten dargestellt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Verbindlichkeiten: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten
- sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Forderungen: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aktiva: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bank: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bargeld: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Kreditkarte: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Währung: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Eigenkapital: Unterkonto können nur Eigenkapitalkonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aufwendungen: Unterkonto können nur Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Erträge: Unterkonto können nur Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Passiva: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Investmentfonds: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten
- sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aktienkonto: Unterkonto können alle Konten außer Eigenkapital-, Aufwands- und Ertragskonten sein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="chart-create">
- <title>Neue Kontenhierarchie erstellen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Ein Kontenplan (Kontenhierarchie) ist eine Art Inhaltsverzeichnis für Ihre Finanzen. Am besten
- denkt man sich einen Kontenplan als Baum: Die Äste stehen für ganze Kategorien oder
- Gruppen, während die Blätter einzelne Bankkonten oder Aufwandsarten bezeichnen. Wenn
- Sie einen zusammenfassenden Bericht aufrufen, werden typischerweise nur die Hauptäste
- im Bericht dargestellt und nicht die Einzelkonten. Eine Kontenhierarchie könnte
- beispielsweise wie folgt aussehen: [FIXME: Abbildung übersetzen]
- <xi:include href="Help_chtacctseg.xml" />
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Beachten Sie, jedes Konto nicht nur einen Namen besitzt, sondern auch eine Nummer, um die Konten zu
- ordnen. Wenn Sie einen Bericht erstellen, wird die Sortierreihenfolge nach der Nummer
- bestimmt. Es ist üblich, dass die Nummern der "Blatt"-Konten nicht mit Null enden,
- während die Nummern der höheren Hierarchieebenen jeweils mehr Nullen am Ende haben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>GnuCash verbietet nicht die doppelte Vergabe von Nummern, jedoch wird empfohlen, dass Sie dies
- vermeiden. Kontonummern werden als Zahlen im 36er Basissystem behandelt, d.h., Sie
- können neben Ziffern auch die Buchstaben "a" bis "z" verwenden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Nachfolgend ist eine Beispielkontenhierarchie dargestellt. Jedes Konto besitzt eine vorgegebene
- Kontoart. Dieses Beispiel kombiniert einige typische geschäftliche und private Konten.
- [FIXME: Abbildung übersetzen]
- <xi:include href="Help_chartofaccts.xml" />
- </para>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="acct-create">
- <title>Neues Konto erstellen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Dialogfenster "Neues Konto" besitzt zwei Karteiseiten: "Allgemeines" und "Anfangsbestand". Sie
- können dieses Dialogfenster aufrufen, indem Sie "Datei" -> "Neues Konto..." wählen
- oder im Fenster "Konten" auf das Symbol "Neu" in der Werkzeugleiste klicken.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um ein neues Konto zu erstellen, müssen Sie sich im voraus einige Einzelheiten überlegen, die im
- Dialogfenster "Neues Konto" benötigt werden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Welche Kontoart wird benötigt?
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wo lässt sich das Konto in der Kontenhierarchie einordnen?
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Gibt es einen Anfangsbestand?
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Gehört zum Konto eine bestimmte Währung oder Aktie?
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wird eine Online-Aktualisierung des Währungs- oder Aktienkurses gewünscht?
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Im folgenden werden diese Einzelheiten beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <sect4 id="gen-info">
- <title>Allgemeine Information</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Karteiseite "Allgemeines" dient zur Pflege der grundlegenden Angaben zum Konto. Hier steht auch
- die Möglichkeit zur Verfügung, das Konto mit einer Börsenkursquelle zu verknüpfen,
- falls es sich um ein Währungs-, Investmentfonds- oder Aktienkonto handelt. Weiterhin
- kann das Konto als steuerrelevant und als Platzhalterkonto gekennzeichnet werden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Karteiseite besitzt fünf Eingabebereiche. Darunter befinden sich Kontrollkästchen, um ein
- Konto als steuerrelevant oder als Platzhalterkonto zu kennzeichnen. Die Option
- "steuerrelevant" bedeutet, dass dieses Konto für die Aufnahme in die Steuerberichte
- und -exporte markiert ist. Diese Option sollten Sie nur für Ertrags- und
- Aufwandskonten aktivieren. Die Option "Platzhalter" bedeutet, dass dieses Konto nicht
- für Buchungsdaten verwendet wird. Dies wird gebraucht, um eine Kontohierarchie
- anlegen zu können.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der obere Eingabebereich enthält Informationen zum Konto.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Kontobezeichnung: Geben Sie einen Namen für das Konto ein, z.B. "Mein Girokonto".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Beschreibung: Eine optionale Beschreibung des Kontos.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Währung/Aktie: Für die meisten Konten ist dies die Standardwährung, d.h. Ihre Landeswährung,
- z.B. "EUR (Euro)". Falls das Konto für eine Fremdwährung vorgesehen ist,
- benutzen Sie den Knopf "Auswählen..." und wählen Sie im folgenden Auswahldialog
- eine andere Währung. Falls es sich um ein Investmentfonds- oder Aktienkonto
- handelt, benutzen Sie den Knopf "Auswählen", um ein Wertpapier auszuwählen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Auswahl der Währung oder Aktie: Um eine andere Währung auszuwählen, klicken Sie die
- Dropdown-Liste "Währung/Aktie" an und wählen Sie das gewünschte
- Währungskürzel. Um ein Wertpapier für Investmentfonds- oder Aktienkonten
- anzulegen, wählen Sie den Knopf "Neu...", um das Dialogfenster "Neue
- Währung/Aktie" zu öffnen. Nachdem ein Wertpapier angelegt worden ist, können
- Sie zuerst den Typ in der Dropdown-Liste "Typ" (normalerweise die Börse, an der
- das Papier gehandelt wird) und dann den Namen des Wertpapiers in der
- Dropdown-Liste "Währung/Aktie" auswählen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Neue Währung/Aktie: Die hier verfügbaren Optionen sind im Abschnitt "Währungs-/Aktieneditor"
- detailliert beschrieben. Geben Sie den Namen, das Symbol und den Typ an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Kontonummer: Hier können Sie optional eine Kontonummer angeben. Weitere Einzelheiten zu
- Kontonummern finden Sie im Abschnitt "Neue Kontenhierarchie erstellen".
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der nächste Eingabebereich enthält eine Liste der Kontoarten. Wählen Sie hier eine Kontoart aus.
- Eine Beschreibung der einzelnen Kontoarten finden Sie im Abschnitt "Arten von GnuCash
- Konten".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der nächste Eingabebereich besitzt einen Kontenbaum, aus dem Sie das übergeordnete Konto
- (Hauptkonto) wählen. Um einen neuen Hauptkontenast zu erstellen, wählen Sie "Neues
- Top-Level-Konto". Wenn Sie ein Hauptkonto einer bestimmten Kontoart auswählen, so
- werden die Auswahlmöglichkeiten im Bereich "Kontoart" eingeschränkt. Hat das
- Hauptkonto beispielsweise die Kontoart "Aktiva", so werden die Kontoarten
- "Eigenkapital", "Aufwendungen" und "Erträge" ausgegraut. Dies dient dazu, eine
- plausible Struktur der Kontenhierarchie zu bewahren.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der nächste Eingabebereich betrifft die Börsenkursquelle.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Börsenkurse online abrufen: Diese Option steht nur dann zur Verfügung, wenn die Kontoart
- "Währung", "Investmentfonds" oder "Aktienkonto" ist. Sie bewirkt, dass für
- dieses Konto die Kurse von einer Online-Datenquelle herauntergeladen werden
- können.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Quelle der Börsenkurse: Wählen Sie eine Datenquelle für die Kurse aus der Menüliste. Derzeit
- werden u.a. folgende Kursdatenquellen unterstützt: Yahoo, Yahoo Europe, Fidelity
- Investments, T. Rowe Price, the Vanguard Group, the Australian Stock Exchange
- (ASX) und TIAA-CREF.
- </para>
-
- <para>Die Kursdatenquelle "Yahoo" liefert dabei auch die Kurse für die übrigen genannten Unternehmen
- (z.B. Fidelity Investments, T.Rowe Price und The Vanguard Group) und gibt den Kurs
- normalerweise identisch zur Original-Datenquelle an. Beachten Sie allerdings, daß
- Sie bei "Yahoo Europe" zusätzlich das Börsenplatzkürzel des Wertpapiers
- anfügen sollten, z.B. "PA" für Paris, "BE" für Berlin usw. Beispiel: 12150.PA
- (ein Peugeot-Papier am Pariser Markt). In den nachfolgenden Tabellen 31 und 32
- sind die Kürzel für einige Börsenplätze aufgelistet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zeitzone dieser Kurse: Wählen Sie die Zeitzone für die Quelle der von Ihnen empfangenen
- Online-Börsenkurse. Beispielsweise verwendet Yahoo gewöhnlich die
- US-Eastern-Zeitzone, somit würden Sie "America/New York" wählen, falls Sie diese
- Börsenkursquelle verwenden.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Hinweis: Um die korrekte Online-Aktualisierung der Kurse einzurichten, müssen Sie die folgenden
- Schritte ausführen:
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Legen Sie den Fonds bzw. die Aktie an. Verwenden Sie entweder den Währungs-/Aktien-Editor oder die
- oben beschriebene Methode über das Dialogfenster "Neue Währung/Aktie".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Legen Sie das Konto für den Fonds bzw. die Aktie an und stellen Sie sicher, dass das gewünschte
- Papier im Feld "Währung/Aktie" erscheint.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie die Option "Börsenkurse online abrufen", die Quelle der Börsenkurse und die Zeitzone.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Führen Sie das Perl-Skript "update-finance-quote" als Benutzer "root" aus, um das Modul
- "Finance::Quote" zu installieren. [Hinweis: muss u.U. bereits einmalig vor dem
- GnuCash-Start ausgeführt werden, damit die Börsenkursoptionen verfügbar werden]
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Fügen Sie ein Wertpapier zum Preis-Editor hinzu. Einzelheiten finden Sie im Abschnitt
- "Preis-Editor".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie "Kurse abrufen" im Preis-Editor.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Wenn Sie die Kurse per Kommandozeile abrufen wollen, können Sie dazu den folgenden Befehl benutzen:
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>gnucash --add-price-quotes <gnucash-dateiname>
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 31 Liste der Kürzel für europäische Börsenplätze
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table24">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Kürzel
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Markt
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>BC
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Barcelona
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>BE
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Berlin
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>BI
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Bilbao
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>BR
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Bremen
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>CO
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Kopenhagen
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>D
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Düsseldorf
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>F
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Frankfurt
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>FX
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Xetra
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>H
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Hamburg
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>HA
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Hannover
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>L
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>London
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>MA
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Madrid
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>MC
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Madrid (MC)
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>MI
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Milan
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>MU
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>München
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>O
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Oslo
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>PA
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Paris
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>ST
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Stockholm
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>SG
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Stuttgart
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>VA
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Valencia
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Tabelle 32: Für TIAA-CREF-Kurse benutzbare Pseudo-Symbole
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="Table25">
- <title />
-
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Name
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>Pseudo-symbol
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Bond Market
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFbond
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Equity Index
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFequi
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Global Equities
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFglob
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Growth
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFgrow
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Inflation-Linked Bond
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFinfb
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Money Market
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFmony
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Social Choice
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFsoci
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Stock
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>CREFstok
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Teachers PA Select Stock
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>TIAAsele
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>Teachers PA Stock Index
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>TIAAsndx
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry>
- <para>TIAA Real Estate
- </para>
- </entry>
-
- <entry>
- <para>TIAAreal
- </para>
- </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der letzte Eingabebereich ist der Bereich "Bemerkungen". Er steht für jede Art von zusätzlichen
- Notizen zum Konto zur Verfügung.
- </para>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="open-balance">
- <title>Anfangsbestand</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Karteiseite "Anfangsbestand" ist nur beim Erstellen eines neuen Kontos verfügbar. Sie können
- hier den Eröffnungssaldo für das Konto angeben. Hierfür gibt es zwei verschiedene
- Anwendungsfälle: Wenn Sie zum ersten Mal Geschäftsvorgänge mit GnuCash erfassen,
- ist dies der Anfangsbestand des Kontos. Wenn Sie bereits bestehende Konten zum Ende
- einer Buchungsperiode abschließen und anschließend Konten neu eröffnen, können Sie
- hier den Abschlusssaldo in die neue Periode übertragen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Karteiseite besitzt drei Bereiche. Der erste Eingabebereich enthält die Informationen zum
- Saldo.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Saldo: Geben Sie hier den Saldo an, mit dem das Konto eröffnet werden soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Datum: Wählen Sie hier das Datum, zu welchem der Eröffnungssaldo erfasst werden soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der nächste Bereich betrift die Buchungsart.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Benutze Ausgleichskonto für Anfangsbestand: Hiermit wird der Eröffnungssaldo des Kontos von einem
- speziellen Eigenkapital-Konto namens "Anfangsbestand" abgebucht.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Herkunftskonto auswählen: Hiermit wird der nächste Eingabebereich freigegeben, mit dem ein anderes
- Herkunftskonto für die Abbuchung des Eröffnungssaldos angegeben kann.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der letzte Eingabebereich dient zur Auswahl des Herkunftskontos. Wählen Sie das Konto, das für den
- Anfangsbestand verwendet werden soll, aus dem Kontenbaum aus.
- </para>
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="acct-edit">
- <title>Konto bearbeiten</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Dialogfenster "Konto bearbeiten" besteht nur aus der Karteiseite "Allgemeines". Diese
- Karteiseite enthält dieselben Informationen wie im zuvor beschriebenen Dialogfenster
- "Neues Konto". Um das Dialogfenster "Konto bearbeiten" zu öffnen, wählen Sie
- "Bearbeiten" -> "Konto bearbeiten" (Menütastenkürzel: STRG-E), oder klicken Sie das
- Symbol "Bearbeiten" in der Werkzeugleiste des Fensters "Konten" an.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="chart-edit">
- <title>Kontenhierarchie bearbeiten</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Kontenhierarchie können Sie mithilfe des Eingabebereichs "Hauptkonto" im Dialogfenster "Konto
- bearbeiten" verändern. Dort ist es möglich, ein Konto an eine beliebige Stelle in der
- Kontenhierarchie zu bewegen. Es wird empfohlen, Konten generell als Unterkonten eines
- Hauptkontos mit verwandter Kontoart zu führen. Einzelheiten hierzu sind im Abschnitt
- "Arten von GnuCash Konten" beschrieben. Dies dient dazu, die Struktur der
- Kontenhierarchie konsistent zu halten.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um das ausgewählte Konto unter ein bestimmtes Hauptkonto zu bewegen, wählen Sie das gewünschte
- Hauptkonto im Eingabebereich "Hauptkonto" aus. Wenn Sie "Neues Top-Level-Konto"
- auswählen, so wird das Konto auf die oberste Ebene der Kontenhierarchie bewegt.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="acct-delete">
- <title>Konto löschen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Löschen eines Kontos bewirkt, dass alle Buchungsinformationen und alle kontenbezogenen
- Informationen zum Konto aus der Datei gelöscht werden. Diese Aktion kann nicht
- rückgängig gemacht werden. Sie werden aufgefordert zu bestätigen, dass dass Sie das
- Konto tatsächlich entfernen wollen. Wenn das Konto noch Buchungsdaten enthält,
- erhalten Sie eine Warnung, dass dieses Konto Buchungen enthält.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Ein Seiteneffekt beim Löschen eines Kontos, welches noch Buchungen enthält, besteht darin, dass
- anschließend bei einigen Konten der Saldo nicht ausgeglichen ist. Dies wird im
- jeweiligen Konto durch graue Kästchen neben den Soll- und Haben-Spalten gekennzeichnet.
- Sie können diese unausgeglichenen Konten automatisch korrigieren lassen, indem Sie das
- Menü "Aktionen" -> "Überprüfen" verwenden. Dies weist die Fehlbeträge automatisch
- einem neuen Konto namens "Ausgleichskonto" zu.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="acct-jump">
- <title>Zu anderen Konten wechseln</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Wenn Sie das Fenster "Kontobuch" verwenden, ist es häufig wünschenswert, gleichzeitig ein Konto
- und das zugehörige Gegenkonto einsehen zu können. Hierfür ermöglicht GnuCash das
- rasche "Springen" zum Gegenkonto. Sie können dazu im Fenster "Kontobuch" entweder das
- Symbol "Gegen" in der Werkzeugleiste oder den Menübefehl "Aktionen" ->
- "Gegenbuchung" verwenden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Wählen Sie den gewünschten Geschäftsvorgang im Fenster "Kontobuch" und dann den Befehl "Gegen"
- bzw. "Gegenbuchung". Wenn der Geschäftsvorgang mehrteilig ist, müssen Sie ihn zuerst
- aufklappen und die Zeile mit dem gewünschten Gegenkonto auswählen.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="acct-reconcile">
- <title>Konto mit einem Kontoauszug abgleichen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Abgleich von Konten in GnuCash mit Kontoauszügen von einer Bank oder einem anderen Institut
- stellt eine zusätzliche Saldenüberprüfung Ihrer Konten dar. Dies ist auch nützlich,
- um zu verfolgen, welche Schecks noch nicht eingelöst sind und welche sonstigen
- Buchungen noch ausstehen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Zusammenfassungs-Leiste im oberen Bereich des Fensters "Kontobuch" weist den Betrag der
- bestätigten und der abgeglichenen Buchungen aus. Es ist möglich, über eine
- Online-Abfrage der Kontodaten (oder auch manuell) die Kennzeichnung vorzunehmen, welche
- Buchungen die Bank bereits verarbeitet hat. In diesem Fall wird in der Spalte "J" (für
- "Abgeglichen: Ja") des Kontobuchs der Eintrag "n" (neu) zu "b" (bestätigt).
- Anschließend wird im Fenster "Abgleichen" der Kontoauszug verwendet, um das Konto
- abzugleichen, wodurch sich das Feld "J" in "j" ("abgeglichen: Ja") ändert.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um das Fenster "Abgleichen" zu öffnen, wählen Sie im Fenster "Konten" den Menübefehl "Aktionen"
- -> "Abgleichen..." (Menütastenkürzel: STRG-R), im Fenster "Kontobuch" ebenfalls den
- Menübefehl "Aktionen" -> "Abgleichen...".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="rec-info">
- <title>Informationen zum Kontenabgleich</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Dialogfenster "Informationen zum Kontenabgleich" dient zur Angabe des Enddatums des Kontoauszugs
- sowie des Anfangs- und Schlußsaldos auf dem Kontoauszug. Die Option "Unterkonten mit
- einbeziehen" wird benötigt, wenn zwei oder mehr GnuCash-Konten verwendet werden, um
- ein einzelnes Bankkonto abzubilden. Die Schaltfläche "Zahlung Habenzins eingeben..."
- (bei Aktivakonten) bzw. "Zahlung Sollzins eingeben..." (bei Passivkonten) kann benutzt
- werden, um die Buchung einer Zinszahlung für das Konto hinzuzufügen. Wenn Sie diesen
- Knopf betätigen, erscheint ein weiteres Dialogfenster, mit dem Sie die Zinszahlung
- anlegen können.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Dialogfenster für die Zinszahlung besitzt drei Bereiche. Ganz unten befindet sich ein Knopf
- "Keine automatischen Habenzins(Sollzins)-Zahlungen für dieses Konto", welcher den
- Dialog abbricht. Der obere Bereich enthält die Zahlungsinformationen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Geben Sie hier den Betrag für die Zinszahlung ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Datum: Wählen Sie ein Datum für die Zinszahlung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Nummer: Geben Sie eine Nummer für den Geschäftsvorgang an (optional).
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Beschreibung: Geben Sie eine informative Beschreibung für den Geschäftsvorgang ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Buchungstext: Geben Sie hier Bemerkungen zum Geschäftsvorgang ein. (optional).
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Ein weiterer Bereich enthält eine Liste der Konten, aus denen das "Zahlung von"-Konto (bei Aktiva)
- bzw. das "Zahlung an"-Konto (bei Passiva) auszuwählen ist. Falls es sich um eine
- Zinszahlung für ein Kredit- oder Darlehenskonto (Passiva) handelt, erfolgt die
- Zahlung normalerweise auf ein Aufwandskonto. Falls es sich um eine Zinszahlung für
- ein Giro- oder Sparkonto (Aktiva) handelt, erfolgt die Zahlung normalerweise von einem
- Ertragskonto. Mit der Option "Erträge/Aufwendungen anzeigen" können Sie die
- Aufwands- und Ertragskonten ein- oder ausblenden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Ein dritter Bereich zeigt das abzugleichende Konto. Hier ist das Konto gekennzeichnet, auf dem der
- Zinsbetrag zu- bzw. abgeht.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="rec-win">
- <title>Abgleichen-Fenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Bestandteile des Fensters "Abgleichen" sind im Unterabschnitt "Weitere Werkzeuge" des Abschnitts
- "GnuCash-Fenster" beschrieben. Benutzen Sie dieses Fenster, um das Konto zu öffnen
- und die benötigten Buchungsinformationen hinzuzufügen, um das Konto mit dem
- Bankauszug abzugleichen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgänge in den Listen "Haben" und "Soll" können geändert
- werden, indem Sie mittels der Menübefehle oder der Werkzeugleiste auf das Konto und
- die Buchungsinformationen zugreifen. Wenn Sie den Abgleich bis zu einem späteren
- Zeitpunkt unterbrechen wollen, wählen Sie den Menüpunkt "Abgleichen" ->
- "Unterbrechen". (Menütastenkürzel: STRG-P).
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Wählen Sie jeden nicht abgeglichenen Geschäftsvorgang, der sich auf dem Kontoauszug wiederfindet,
- an, so dass in der Spalte "J" ein grünes Häkchen erscheint. Die im unteren
- Fensterbereich ausgewiesenen Salden verändern sich entsprechend den gewählten
- Geschäftsvorgängen, bis zum Schluss der Schlußsaldo gleich dem abgestimmten Saldo
- ist und die Differenz Null beträgt. Sobald dies erreicht ist, wählen Sie den Knopf
- "Fertig" oder den Befehl "Fertig" im Menü "Abgleichen" (Menütastenkürzel: STRG-F),
- um den Abgleich fertigzustellen.
- </para>
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="stock-split">
- <title>Aktienteilung durchführen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Aktienteilungen (Splits) finden gewöhnlich dann statt, wenn eine Gesellschaft der Meinung ist, dass
- ihr Aktienkurs zu hoch ist, damit ein einzelner Investor die Aktie kaufen würde.
- Aktienteilungen bewirken, dass sich der Preis einer einzelnen Aktie verringert, während
- der Wert der bereits an Investoren ausgegebenen Aktien gleich bleibt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="stock-split-druid">
- <title>Aktienteilungs-Wizard</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um Aktienteilungen zu erfassen, verwendet GnuCash den Aktienteilungs-Wizard. Dieser stellt
- Funktionen für die Eingabe der Detailinformationen zur Aktienteilung, wie auch für
- Änderungen an Aktienkursen und Ausgleichsbetrag infolge der Aktienteilung bereit.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um den Aktienteilungs-Wizard zu starten, wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Aktienteilung...".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Aktienteilungs-Druide begrüßt Sie mit einer Seite, welche kurz seine Funktion beschreibt. Die
- drei Knöpfe am unteren Rand bleiben während der Benutzung des Wizard unverändert.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Schaltfläche "Abbrechen" dient zum Verlassen des Wizard und zum Abbruch der Eingaben zur
- Aktienteilung. Jede Auswahl, die Sie im Wizard bis zu dieser Stelle getroffen
- haben, geht verloren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Zurück" gelangen Sie zur vorhergehenden Seite zurück und können eine dort
- getroffene Auswahl ändern.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Weiter" gelangen Sie zur nächsten Seite, um mit dem Wizard fortzufahren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Auf der nächsten Seite können Sie ein Aktienkonto auswählen. Wählen Sie das Konto aus der Liste
- aus, für welches Sie eine Aktienteilung oder einen Aktienzusammenschluss erfassen
- wollen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Konto: Der Name des GnuCash-Kontos für die Aktie.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Symbol: Das Wertpapierkürzel der Aktie, die mit diesem Konto verbunden ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Anteile: Die Stückzahl der Aktien bzw. Anteile, deren Erwerb auf dieses Konto gebucht wurde.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Auf der nächsten Seite können Sie die Detailangaben zur Aktienteilung eingeben. Der obere
- Fensterbereich enthält die Details zur Erstellung des Geschäftsvorgangs für die
- Aktienteilung.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Datum: Wählen Sie das Datum der Aktienteilung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aktien Verteilung: Geben Sie die Stückzahl der Aktien an, die Sie infolge der Aktienteilung
- zusätzlich bekommen haben. Bei einem Aktienzusammenschluss geben Sie eine
- negative Zahl ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Beschreibung: Geben Sie eine Beschreibung ein, oder übernehmen Sie die Voreinstellung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der untere Bildschirmbereich enthält Deteils zur Erfassung des Kurses für die Aktienteilung
- (optional).
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Neuer Preis: Geben Sie den Kurs der Aktien am Tag der Aktienteilung an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Währung: Wählen Sie die Währung der Aktien.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite ermöglich die Eingabe eines Geschäftsvorgangs für den Ausgleichsbetrag (Cash
- In Lieu) infolge der Aktienteilung (optional).
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Geldbetrag: Geben Sie den Betrag für die Ausgleichszahlung ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Buchungstext: Geben Sie einen Buchungstext ein, oder übernehmen Sie die Voreinstellung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Ertragskonto: Wählen Sie ein Ertragskonto für die Ausgleichszahlung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aktiva-Konto: Wählen Sie ein Aktivkonto für den Zugang der Ausgleichszahlung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Auf der letzten Seite haben Sie drei Möglichkeiten, den Wizard zu beenden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Schaltfläche "Abbrechen" dient zum Verlassen des Wizard und zum Abbruch der Erstellung von
- Geschäftsvorgangen für die Aktienteilung. Jede Auswahl, die Sie im Wizard bis zu
- dieser Stelle getroffen haben, geht verloren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Zurück" gelangen Sie zur vorhergehenden Seite zurück und können eine dort
- getroffene Auswahl ändern.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Fertig" werden die Geschäftsvorgänge für die Aktienteilung erstellt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Damit haben Sie die Aktienteilung bzw. den Aktienzusammenschluss fertig erfasst.
- </para>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="transactions">
- <title>Geschäftsvorgänge im Kontobuch eingeben</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>GnuCash verwendet Konten, um Geschäftsvorfälle zu gruppieren und ihre Aufzeichnung zu
- organisieren. Die Geschäftsvorgänge werden im Fenster "Kontobuch" eingegeben. In diesem
- Abschnitt werden die Hilfsmittel von GnuCash beschrieben, welche eine schnelle Eingabe von
- Geschäftsvorgängen in das Kontobuch ermöglichen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Jeder Geschäftsvorgang (engl. <emphasis>transaction</emphasis>) entspricht einer Geldbewegung von
- einem Konto auf ein anderes. Jedesmal, wenn Sie Geld einnehmen, ausgeben oder zwischen
- Konten buchen, entspricht dies einem Geschäftsvorgang. In GnuCash sind an jedem
- Geschäftsvorgang mindestens zwei Konten beteiligt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect3 id="reg-views">
- <title>Ansicht des Kontobuchs ändern</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In GnuCash stehen mehrere Stil-Optionen zur Verfügung, um das Erscheinungsbild des Kontobuchs zu
- verändern, so dass die Geschäftsvorgänge möglichst übersichtlich dargestellt
- werden. Vorgabestil ist "Vereinfachtes Hauptbuch". Dieses zeigt die Geschäftsvorgänge
- als einzelne Zeilen an und ermöglicht somit umfassendsten Überblick, einschließlich
- aller relevanten Details.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Sie können den Stil mittels "Ansicht" -> "Stil" verändern. Nach Schließen des Fensters wird
- jedoch der Stil "Vereinfachtes Hauptbuch" wiederhergestellt. Für eine dauerhafte
- Änderung können Sie den Vorgabestil in den Einstellungen, Abschnitt "Kontobuch",
- einstellen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Hauptbuch: Vorgabestil mit einer Zeile je Geschäftsvorgang. Mehrteilige Geschäftsvorgänge werden
- in Summenform dargestellt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Auto-Mehrteiliges Hauptbuch: In diesem Stil wird der jeweils ausgewählte Geschäftsvorgang
- automatisch aufgeklappt, so dass die einzelnen Buchungen (engl.
- <emphasis>splits</emphasis>) sichtbar werden.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Amerikanisches Journal: In diesem Stil werden alle Geschäftsvorgänge aufgeklappt, so dass jeder
- Geschäftsvorgang komplett sichtbar ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zwei Zeilen: Diese Option wirkt sich auf alle beschriebenen Stile aus; hiermit wird jeweils eine
- zusätzliche Zeile für Notizen zum Geschäftsvorgang hinzugefügt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Zwei weitere Optionen für die Ansicht des Kontobuchs ermöglichen es, den Datumsbereich
- einzuschränken und die Sortierreihenfolge zu ändern. Beide sind über das Menü
- "Ansicht" erreichbar.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-enter">
- <title>Geschäftsvorgang eingeben</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Nach dem Öffnen des Fensters "Kontobuch" für ein Konto wird die Liste der Geschäftsvorgänge für
- dieses Konto angezeigt. Der Name des Kontos erscheint in der Titelleiste des Fensters.
- Die Menüs enthalten verschiedene Funktionen, um die Anzeige der Geschäftsvorgänge zu
- verändern. Auch die Werkzeugleiste enthält verschiedene Funktionen, die bei der
- Eingabe von Geschäftsvorgängen häufig benötigt werden. Eine Beschreibung finden Sie
- im Abschnitt "Kontobuch-Fenster" in dieser Hilfe.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>GnuCash kennt zwei Methoden, um Geschäftsvorgänge einzugeben. Der gängigste Weg ist die direkte
- Eingabe im Kontobuch; die andere Möglichkeit ist das Fenster "Buchen".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="trans-reg-enter">
- <title>Direkt im Kontobuch eingeben</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Fenster "Kontobuch" kann etwas unterschiedlich aussehen, je nachdem, welche Stil-Einstellungen
- Sie gewählt haben. Im Folgenden wird die Eingabe von Geschäftsvorgängen unter
- Verwendung des Stils "Vereinfachtes Hauptbuch" beschrieben. Der Cursor befindet sich
- standardmäßig im Feld "Datum", nachdem das Fenster geöffnet wurde.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Ein Mausklick auf das Pfeil-Symbol rechts im Feld "Datum" öffnet einen Datumsauswahldialog. Wählen
- Sie mit den Pfeilen den Monat und das Jahr und anschließend das Datum für den
- Geschäftsvorgang. Ein weiterer Mausklick auf das Pfeil-Symbol schließt den
- Datumsauswahldialog. Sie können auch das Datum direkt eingeben oder einen Teil
- eintippen, in diesem Fall ergänzt GnuCash automatisch den Rest.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bewegen Sie den Cursor mit der Tabulatortaste weiter oder klicken Sie das Feld "Nr" an. Hier können
- Sie eine Scheck- bzw. Buchungsnummer eingeben. Mit der Taste "+" wird automatisch
- die Nummer des letzten Geschäftsvorgangs, der eine Nummer hatte, um eins erhöht
- und hier eingefügt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bewegen Sie den Cursor mit der Tabulatortaste weiter oder klicken Sie das Feld "Beschreibung" an.
- Hier geben Sie entweder einen Zahlungsempfänger oder eine andere Beschreibung
- für den Geschäftsvorgang ein. Während des Eintippens versucht GnuCash
- automatisch, den Namen des Zahlungsempfängers zu ergänzen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wenn Sie an dieser Stelle die Tabulatortaste drücken, passieren zwei Dinge: Falls GnuCash eine
- Übereinstimmung mit einem bereits bestehenden Geschäftsvorgang findet, springt
- der Cursor auf eines der Betragsfelder, und das Feld "Buchen" wird automatisch
- gefüllt. Falls noch kein entsprechender Geschäftsvorgang existiert, bewegt
- GnuCash den Cursor auf das Feld "Buchen". Wenn Sie das Feld "Buchen" direkt mit
- der Maus anklicken (ohne Tabulatortaste), wird es nicht automatisch gefüllt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wenn Sie etwas in das Feld "Buchen" eintippen, versucht GnuCash ebenfalls, das passende Konto
- automatisch zu ergänzen. Dies geschieht alphabetisch, d.h. wenn Sie "Au"
- eintippen, springt GnuCash i.d.R. zum Abschnitt "Ausgaben" der Kontenliste. Sobald
- der richtige Abschnitt gefunden ist, können Sie durch Eintippen des Doppelpunktes
- (":") zu den Unterkonten springen. Wenn Sie also nach "Au" anschließend ":"
- tippen, springt der Cursor zum ersten Unterkonto von "Ausgaben" in der Liste.
- Indem Sie Kombinationen aus Buchstaben und ":" eintippen, können Sie sich somit
- schnell im Kontenbaum bewegen. Alternativ können Sie das Pfeil-Symbol rechts im
- Feld "Buchen" mit der Maus anklicken, um ein Konto auszuwählen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Das nächste Feld dient zum Abgleichen von Konten. Eine Beschreibung hierzu finden Sie im Abschnitt
- "Konto mit einem Kontoauszug abgleichen" weiter oben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bewegen Sie den Cursor mit der Tabulatortaste zum ersten Betragsfeld. Die Bezeichnungen der beiden
- Betragsspalten sind je nach Kontoart unterschiedlich. So heißen sie bei
- Bankkonten "Einzahlung" und "Abhebung", bei Kreditkartenkonten "Zahlung" und
- "Belastung", und bei Aktienkonten gibt es die Spalten "Anteile", "Preis", "Kauf"
- und "Verkauf".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Geben Sie den Betrag für den Geschäftsvorgang in das korrekte Feld ein. Durch Drücken der
- Eingabetaste, durch Anklicken des Symbols "Eingeben" oder mit dem Menübefehl
- "Aktionen" -> "Übernehmen" schließen Sie die Eingabe des Geschäftsvorgangs
- ab. Durch Anklicken des Symbols "Abbrechen" oder mit dem Menübefehl "Aktionen"
- -> "Abbrechen" wird der Geschäftsvorgang gelöscht.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bei Geschäftsvorgängen mit nur einem Gegenkonto wird der Name dieses Kontos nach Abschluss der
- Eingabe im Feld "Buchen" angezeigt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Um zum leeren Geschäftsvorgang am Ende des Kontobuchs zu wechseln, klicken Sie in der
- Werkzeugleiste das Symbol "Neu" an oder wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Neue
- Buchung".
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="trans-win-enter">
- <title>Im Buchen-Fenster eingeben</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die hier beschriebene Methode verwendet das Fenster "Buchen", um einen einzelnen Geschäftsvorgang
- einzugeben. Dies ist hauptsächlich dann sinnvoll, wenn Sie schnell einen einzelnen
- Geschäftsvorgang erfassen wollen, ohne Kontobücher zu öffnen. Zur Erfassung
- mehrerer Geschäftsvorgänge wird empfohlen, direkt das Kontobuch zu verwenden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Geben Sie im Bereich "Buchungsinformation" den Betrag, das Datum und die Beschreibung ein. Die
- Felder "Nummer" und "Buchungstext" sind optional.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie das Herkunftskonto. Wenn es sich dabei um ein Ertrags- oder Aufwandskonto handelt,
- müssen Sie die Option "Erträge/Aufwendungen anzeigen" aktivieren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie das Konto, nach dem gebucht werden soll. Wenn es sich dabei um ein Ertrags- oder
- Aufwandskonto handelt, müssen Sie die Option "Erträge/Aufwendungen anzeigen"
- aktivieren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Falls eines der beiden Konten eine andere Währung hat als das andere, wird der Bereich
- "Währungs-Buchung" aktiviert, so dass Sie entweder einen Wechselkurs oder einen
- Betrag angeben können.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie "OK", um den Geschäftsvorgang zu bestätigen, oder "Abbrechen", um den Dialog ohne
- Erfassung eines Geschäftsvorgangs zu schließen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-multi-enter">
- <title>Mehrteiligen Geschäftsvorgang eingeben</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Fenster "Kontobuch" kann etwas unterschiedlich aussehen, je nachdem, welche Stil-Einstellungen
- Sie gewählt haben. Im Folgenden wird die Eingabe von mehrteiligen Geschäftsvorgängen
- unter Verwendung des Stils "Vereinfachtes Hauptbuch" beschrieben. GnuCash betrachtet die
- Konten, die im aktuell geöffneten Geschäftsvorgang von der Geldbewegung berührt
- werden, als Teile eines "Mehrteiligen Vorgangs". Der Cursor befindet sich
- standardmäßig im Feld "Datum", nachdem das Fenster geöffnet wurde.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Ein Mausklick auf das Pfeil-Symbol rechts im Feld "Datum" öffnet einen Datumsauswahldialog. Wählen
- Sie mit den Pfeilen den Monat und das Jahr und anschließend das Datum für den
- Geschäftsvorgang. Ein weiterer Mausklick auf das Pfeil-Symbol schließt den
- Datumsauswahldialog. Sie können auch das Datum direkt eingeben oder einen Teil
- eintippen, in diesem Fall ergänzt GnuCash automatisch den Rest.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bewegen Sie den Cursor mit der Tabulatortaste weiter oder klicken Sie das Feld "Nr" an. Hier können
- Sie eine Scheck- bzw. Buchungsnummer eingeben. Mit der Taste "+" wird automatisch
- die Nummer des letzten Geschäftsvorgangs, der eine Nummer hatte, um eins erhöht
- und hier eingefügt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bewegen Sie den Cursor mit der Tabulatortaste weiter oder klicken Sie das Feld "Beschreibung" an.
- Hier geben Sie entweder einen Zahlungsempfänger oder eine andere Beschreibung für
- den Geschäftsvorgang ein. Während des Eintippens versucht GnuCash automatisch, den
- Namen des Zahlungsempfängers zu ergänzen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wenn Sie an dieser Stelle die Tabulatortaste drücken, passieren zwei Dinge: Falls GnuCash eine
- Übereinstimmung mit einem bereits bestehenden Geschäftsvorgang findet, springt der
- Cursor auf eines der Betragsfelder, und das Feld "Buchen" wird automatisch gefüllt.
- Falls noch kein entsprechender Geschäftsvorgang existiert, bewegt GnuCash den
- Cursor auf das Feld "Buchen". Wenn Sie das Feld "Buchen" direkt mit der Maus
- anklicken (ohne Tabulatortaste), wird es nicht automatisch gefüllt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wenn Sie etwas in das Feld "Buchen" eintippen, versucht GnuCash ebenfalls, das passende Konto
- automatisch zu ergänzen. Dies geschieht alphabetisch, d.h. wenn Sie "Au" eintippen,
- springt GnuCash i.d.R. zum Abschnitt "Ausgaben" der Kontenliste. Sobald der richtige
- Abschnitt gefunden ist, können Sie durch Eintippen des Doppelpunktes (":") zu den
- Unterkonten springen. Wenn Sie also nach "Au" anschließend ":" tippen, springt der
- Cursor zum ersten Unterkonto von "Ausgaben" in der Liste. Indem Sie Kombinationen
- aus Buchstaben und ":" eintippen, können Sie sich somit schnell im Kontenbaum
- bewegen. Alternativ können Sie das Pfeil-Symbol rechts im Feld "Buchen" mit der
- Maus anklicken, um ein Konto auszuwählen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Das nächste Feld dient zum Abgleichen von Konten. Eine Beschreibung hierzu finden Sie im Abschnitt
- "Konto mit einem Kontoauszug abgleichen" weiter oben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bewegen Sie den Cursor mit der Tabulatortaste zum ersten Betragsfeld. Die Bezeichnungen der beiden
- Betragsspalten sind je nach Kontoart unterschiedlich. So heißen sie bei Bankkonten
- "Einzahlung" und "Abhebung", bei Kreditkartenkonten "Zahlung" und "Belastung", und
- bei Aktienkonten gibt es die Spalten "Anteile", "Preis", "Kauf" und "Verkauf".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Geben Sie den Gesamtbetrag des Geschäftsvorgangs in das korrekte Feld ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Um die zusätzlichen Buchungsteile zu erfassen, klicken Sie das Symbol "Mehrteilig" in der
- Werkzeugleiste an oder wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Mehrteiliger Vorgang".
- Geschäftsvorgänge mit mehreren Teilen tragen den Hinweis "--Mehrteiliger
- Vorgang--", und zur Anzeige der Details wird die Funktion "Mehrteilig" benötigt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Anzeige wird nun aufgeklappt, dabei verändern sich die Bezeichnungen der Betragsspalten, und
- die Bezeichnung der Spalte "Buchen" verschwindet. Die erste Zeile enthält die
- Beschreibung und den Betrag des Geschäftsvorgangs. Die zweite Zeile enthält den
- Namen des aktuell geöffneten Kontos im Feld "Konto" sowie den Betrag. Die dritte
- Zeile enthält den Namen des Gegenkontos im Feld "Konto". Wenn der Betrag nicht
- ausgeglichen ist, deutet GnuCash dies durch graue Kästchen in den Betragsspalten an
- und weist den Fehlbetrag in einer vierten, leeren Zeile aus.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wenn Sie eine der kürzeren Zeilen auswählen, verändern sich die Spaltenbezeichnungen. Die
- Bezeichnungen der ersten und der letzten Spalte (Datum und Saldo) verschwinden, "Nr"
- wird zu "Aktion", "Beschreibung" zu "Buchungstext", und die zuvor unbezeichneten
- Spalte "Buchen" ändert sich zu "Konto". Die restlichen beiden Spalten tragen eine
- Bezeichnung, wie sie in Schritt 7 beschrieben ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Eingaben in den Spalten "Aktion" und "Buchungstext" sind an dieser Stelle optional. Mit "Aktion"
- wird beschrieben, welche Art von Buchung stattfindet. "Buchungstext" ist eine
- zusätzliche Beschreibung der Buchung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bewegen Sie den Cursor zum noch fehlenden Betragsfeld in der dritten Zeile und ergänzen Sie den
- Betrag. Durch Drücken der Eingabetaste, Anklicken des Symbols "Eingeben" oder mit
- "Aktionen" -> "Übernehmen" wird nunmehr der Cursor zur nächsten Zeile bewegt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Spalte "Konto" enthält die Liste der berührten Konten. Dies ist die Spalte, mit der Sie
- Buchungsteile hinzufügen können. Wie in Schritt 5 beschrieben, können Sie hier in
- der leeren Zeile ein weiteres Konto hinzufügen. Fügen Sie soviele Buchungsteile
- hinzu wie benötigt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Sobald der Geschäftsvorgang ausgeglichen ist, verschwinden die grauen Kästchen, und in der
- letzten, leeren Zeile erscheint kein Betrag mehr.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wenn Sie, wie oben beschrieben, die Eingabetaste drücken, bis sich der Cursor hinter der Leerzeile
- befindet, so springt der Cursor zum nächsten Geschäftsvorgang. Dadurch wird der
- mehrteilige Vorgang geschlossen; er kann jedoch auch manuell geschlossen werden,
- indem Sie das Symbol "Mehrteilig" anklicken oder "Aktionen" -> "Mehrteiliger
- Vorgang" wählen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-currency-enter">
- <title>Geschäftsvorgang mit mehreren Währungen eingeben</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Derzeit sind Bewegungen zwischen verschiedenen Währungen nur mithilfe des Fensters "Buchen"
- möglich. In diesem Fenster wird dazu bei Bedarf der Bereich "Währungs-Buchung"
- aktiviert. In diesem Dialogfenster können Sie einen passenden Wechselkurs anzugeben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um ein Konto mit einer anderen Währung anzulegen, bearbeiten Sie die Kontoeigenschaften und ändern
- Sie das Feld "Währung/Aktie" auf die gewünschte Fremdwährung. Wenn Sie ein solches
- Konto verwenden, so ist der Bereich "Währungs-Buchung" im Fenster "Buchen" aktiviert.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-edit">
- <title>Geschäftsvorgang bearbeiten</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Zur Änderung eines Geschäftsvorgangs müssen Sie nur den zu ändernden Teil des Geschäftsvorgangs
- auswählen. Sobald Sie die Änderungen vorgenommen haben, drücken Sie entweder die
- Eingabetaste, wählen das Symbol "Eingeben" oder den Menübefehl "Aktionen" ->
- "Übernehmen", und der Cursor springt automatisch zur nächsten Zeile bzw. zum nächsten
- Geschäftsvorgang.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um für die Bearbeitung eine detailliertere Ansicht des Geschäftsvorgangs zu erhalten, wählen Sie
- den Knopf "Mehrteilig" in der Werkzeugleiste, oder wählen Sie "Aktionen" ->
- "Mehrteiliger Vorgang".
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-delete">
- <title>Geschäftsvorgang löschen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um einen Geschäftsvorgang aus dem Kontobuch zu entfernen, wählen Sie den betreffenden
- Geschäftsvorgang aus und benutzen Sie entweder den Knopf "Löschen" in der
- Werkzeugleiste oder den Menübefehl "Aktionen" -> "Löschen". Auch Teile des
- Geschäftsvorgangs können entfernt werden, indem Sie den Knopf "Mehrteilig" in der
- Werkzeugleiste oder den Menübefehl "Aktionen" -> "Mehrteiliger Vorgang" aktivieren.
- Danach kann der zu löschende Teil des Geschäftsvorgangs ausgewählt und gelöscht
- werden.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-split-remove">
- <title>Gegenbuchungen entfernen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Beim Entfernen von Gegenbuchungen werden alle Buchungszeilen (engl. <emphasis>splits</emphasis>)
- entfernt mit Ausnahme derjenigen, die das aktuell geöffnete Konto berührt. Dies ist
- nützlich, um einen früheren mehrteiligen Geschäftsvorgang wiederzuverwenden, dessen
- Bestandteile geändert werden müssen. (Beachten Sie, dass hierfür nicht unbedingt der
- mehrteilige Vorgang geöffnet werden muss. Jedoch wird so die Wirkung besser erkennbar.)
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie den Knopf "Mehrteilig" in der Werkzeugleiste oder den Menübefehl "Aktionen" ->
- "Mehrteiliger Vorgang", um den Geschäftsvorgang zu öffnen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Gegenbuchungen entfernen".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Alle berührten Konten mit ihren Buchungsdaten werden entfernt, mit Ausnahme des aktuell geöffneten
- Kontos.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Der Buchungsbetrag ist nun nicht ausgeglichen. GnuCash weist darauf mit grauen Kästchen in den
- Betragsspalten hin und zeigt den Fehlbetrag in der letzten, leeren Zeile an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bearbeiten Sie den Geschäftsvorgang, indem Sie die neuen Buchungsdaten eingeben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-copy">
- <title>Geschäftsvorgang kopieren</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um Geschäftsvorgänge zu kopieren, können Sie das Menü "Bearbeiten" oder das Menü "Aktionen"
- verwenden. Im Menü "Bearbeiten" gibt es die Befehle "Geschäftsvorgang ausschneiden",
- "Geschäftsvorgang kopieren" und "Geschäftsvorgang einfügen", mit denen ein kompletter
- Geschäftsvorgang ausgeschnitten oder kopiert und anschließend in einer neuen Zeile
- eingefügt werden kann. Bei dieser Methode wird als Datum das benutzt, welches in der
- leeren Zeile für neue Geschäftsvorgänge steht.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Im Menü "Aktionen" gibt es weiterhin den Befehl "Buchung duplizieren..." welches darüber hinaus
- die Auswahl eines anderen Datums gestattet.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie den zu duplizierenden Geschäftsvorgang aus.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Buchung duplizieren..."
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Ein Dialogfenster mit dem Titel "Buchung duplizieren" (früher: "Doppelte Buchung") verlangt die
- Eingabe eines neuen Datums und einer Nummer für den Geschäftsvorgang.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie "OK", um den Geschäftsvorgang zum Kontobuch hinzuzufügen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="trans-sched">
- <title>Buchungen terminieren</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Terminierte Buchungen ermöglichen es, Geschäftsvorgänge automatisch zu einem bestimmten Zeitpunkt
- in das Kontobuch einzugeben. Mit dem Editor für terminierte Buchungen lassen sich
- Geschäftsvorgänge erstellen und bearbeiten, die automatisch in das Kontobuch
- eingefügt werden sollen. Dies erfolgt in Kombination mit dem Wizard "Seit letztem
- Aufruf", mit dem die Geschäftsvorgänge überprüft und eingegeben werden können. Der
- Druide "Hypothek & Darlehen" dient zum Anlegen einer terminierten Buchung für die
- Rückzahlung eines Darlehens mit Zinseszins.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die einfachste Art, eine terminierte Buchung anzulegen, ist die Verwendung eines bestehenden
- Geschäftsvorgangs aus dem Kontobuch als Vorlage. Wählen Sie den Geschäftsvorgang,
- welchen Sie als Vorlage verwenden wollen, und anschließend entweder das Symbol
- "Terminiert" in der Werkzeugleiste oder den Menübefehl "Aktionen" ->
- "Terminiert...". Anschließend öffnet sich das Dialogfenster "Terminierte Buchung
- erstellen".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Name: Geben Sie hier einen Namen für die terminierte Buchung an. Dieser wird dann im Feld
- "Beschreibung" des Geschäftsvorgangs verwendet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Häufigkeit: Wählen Sie die gewünschte Zeitspanne zwischen den regelmäßigen Erfassungsterminen.
- Die Daten, zu denen die Geschäftsvorgänge dementsprechend erfasst würden,
- erscheinen im Kalenderbereich auf der rechten Seite.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Anfangsdatum: Wählen Sie ein Datum, zu dem die terminierte Buchung beginnen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Endet nicht: Diese terminierte Buchung hat kein Enddatum.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Enddatum: Wählen Sie ein Datum, an dem die terminierte Buchung enden soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Anzahl des Auftretens: Geben Sie an, wie oft die terminierte Buchung in das Kontobuch eingegeben
- werden soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Schaltfläche "Erweitert..." öffnet den Editor für terminierte Buchungen, mit dem die
- terminierten Buchungen bearbeitet werden können. Dieser Editor wird im nächsten
- Abschnitt beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="trans-sched-editor">
- <title>Terminierte Buchungen Editor</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Editor für terminierte Buchungen bietet eine Liste aller terminierten Buchungen und ermöglicht
- es, diese zu bearbeiten oder zu löschen. Es besitzt außerdem einen Kalender, welcher
- die bevorstehenden terminierten Buchungen auflistet. Wenn Sie den Kalenderbereich
- anklicken und den Mauszeiger über jedes einzelne Datum bewegen, so erscheint ein
- kleines Dialogfenster, welches die Geschäftsvorgänge anzeigt, die für den
- jeweiligen Tag terminiert sind. Die gelbe Hervorhebung im Kalender zeigt an, welche
- Tage terminierte Buchungen haben. Um das Mini-Dialogfenster auszuschalten, klicken Sie
- den Kalenderbereich nochmals an.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Den Editor für terminierte Buchungen erreichen Sie mittels "Aktionen" -> "Terminierte Buchungen"
- -> "Terminierte Buchungen Editor". Wenn Sie einen Geschäftsvorgang aus der Liste
- auswählen und "Bearbeiten" wählen, oder wenn Sie "Neu" wählen, öffnet sich das
- Dialogfenster "Terminierte Buchungen bearbeiten".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Dialogfenster "Terminierte Buchungen bearbeiten" ist im Abschnitt "GnuCash Fenster/Weitere
- Werkzeuge" in dieser Hilfe beschrieben. Nachfolgend wird beschrieben, wie Sie neue
- Geschäftsvorgänge manuell hinzufügen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Geben Sie einen Namen für die terminierte Buchung an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie die gewünschte Regelmäßigkeit im Bereich "Häufigkeit".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie die Details im unteren Teil des Bereichs "Häufigkeit". Ihre Änderungen werden im
- Kalenderbereich hervorgehoben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie im Bereich "Optionen", ob der Geschäftsvorgang automatisch erstellt werden soll, und
- wieviel Tage im voraus er erstellt werden soll. Hier können Sie auch einstellen,
- ob GnuCash Sie im voraus bzw. bei automatischer Erstellung benachrichtigen soll.
- Bei automatischer Erstellung können in den Buchungsbestandteilen keine Variablen
- benutzt werden.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Wählen Sie die Ende-Optionen. Zur Auswahl stehen "Ohne Enddatum", ein festgelegtes Enddatum oder
- eine bestimmte Anzahl von Buchungen [?].
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Geben Sie den Geschäftsvorgang in der Buchungsvorlage ein. Dies geschieht recht ähnlich wie die
- Eingabe eines Geschäftsvorgangs im Kontobuch. [FIXME: Hier ist noch die
- Erklärung von Formeln und Variablen notwendig. Teilweise liegen hier auch noch
- Programmfehler vor, so daß kryptische Zeichen in den Betragsfeldern erscheinen.]
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="trans-sched-slr">
- <title>Seit-letztem-Aufruf Fenster</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Druide "Seit letztem Aufruf" wird automatisch ausgeführt, wenn GnuCash gestartet wird. Er dient
- dazu, alle Geschäftsvorgänge, die zur automatischen Erstellung anstehen, im
- Kontobuch zu erfassen. Die automatische Ausführung beim Starten von GnuCash kann in
- den Einstellungen ein- und ausgeschaltet werden. Um den Wizard manuell zu starten,
- wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Terminierte Buchungen" -> "Seit letztem Aufruf...".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Druide "Seit letztem Aufruf..." überspringt alle automatisch alle Bildschirmseiten, die keine
- Geschäftsvorgänge enthalten. Im folgenden werden alle möglichen Seiten beschrieben,
- die der Druide anzeigen könnte. Die drei Knöpfe am unteren Rand bleiben während der
- Benutzung des Wizard unverändert.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Schaltfläche "Abbrechen" dient zum Verlassen des Wizard und zum Abbruch der Eingabe von
- Geschäftsvorgängen. Jede Auswahl, die Sie im Wizard bis zu dieser Stelle
- getroffen haben, geht verloren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Zurück" gelangen Sie zur vorhergehenden Seite zurück und können eine dort
- getroffene Auswahl ändern.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Weiter" gelangen Sie zur nächsten Seite, um mit dem Wizard fortzufahren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die erste Seite heißt "Buchungserinnerungen". Hier sind diejenigen terminierten Buchungen
- aufgelistet, bei denen eine bestimmte Anzahl von Tagen im voraus eine Erinnerung
- erfolgen soll. Die Liste hat drei Spalten. Die erste Spalte enthält den Namen der
- terminierten Buchung und das Fälligkeitsdatum. Die zweite Spalte enthält die
- Wiederholungshäufigkeit der terminierten Buchung. In der dritten Spalte steht die
- Anzahl der Tage bis zu dem Datum, an dem die Eingabe fällig ist. Um nicht nur
- erinnert zu werden, sondern Geschäftsvorgänge aus dieser Liste auch gleich zu
- erstellen, wählen Sie die Zeile(n) mit dem jeweiligen Datum. Damit werden die
- Geschäftsvorgänge zu Liste auf der Seite "Vorbereitung der zu erstellenden
- Buchungen" hinzugefügt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite heißt "Benachrichtigung über automatisch erstellte Buchungen". Hier sind
- diejenigen terminierten Buchungen aufgelistet, bei denen eine automatische Erstellung
- mit Benachrichtigung erfolgen soll. Jeder Geschäftsvorgang wird in einer
- Kontobuchsansicht dargestellt, welche die Buchungsdaten aller Bestandteile des
- Geschäftsvorgangs anzeigt.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite heißt "Vorbereitung der zu erstellenden Buchungen". Hier sind diejenigen
- terminierten Buchungen aufgelistet, deren Erfassung im Kontobuch fällig ist. Die
- Seite ist in drei Bereiche unterteilt. Oben links befindet sich eine Liste der
- Geschäftsvorgänge, deren automatische Erstellung fällig ist. Oben rechts können
- Sie die Buchung umdisponieren, weiterhin werden hier die Variablen angezeigt, mit
- denen der Geschäftsvorgang erstellt wird (schreibgeschützt). Im unteren Bereich
- befindet sich eine schreibgeschützte Detailansicht der zu erfassenden
- Geschäftsvorgänge.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite heißt "Buchungsübersicht erstellt". Diese Seite zeigt eine Liste aller
- Geschäftsvorgänge an, die nun erstellt würden, und gestattet es Ihnen,
- abschließende Änderungen vorzunehmen. Die Liste wird in einer Kontobuchsansicht
- dargestellt, welche die Buchungsdaten aller Bestandteile des Geschäftsvorgangs
- anzeigt. Sie können diese Liste genauso bearbeiten, wie Sie Geschäftsvorgänge im
- Kontobuch bearbeiten.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die letzte Seite heißt "Terminierte Buchung löschen". Hier wird eine Liste veralteteter
- terminierter Buchungen angezeigt, die gelöscht werden können, da die Termine
- erledigt sind. Wählen Sie die Buchungen aus, die gelöscht werden sollen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Abbrechen" verlassen Sie den Wizard und brechen die Erstellung terminierter Buchungen
- ab. Jede Auswahl, die Sie im Wizard bis zu dieser Stelle getroffen haben, geht
- verloren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Zurück" gelangen Sie zur vorhergehenden Seite zurück und können eine dort
- getroffene Auswahl ändern.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Schaltfläche "Fertig" erstellt die ausgewählten Geschäftsvorgänge.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Anschließend hat der Druide "Seit letztem Aufruf" die terminierten Buchungen zum Kontobuch
- hinzugefügt.
- </para>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="trans-sched-loans">
- <title>Hypothek & Darlehen Druide</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Dieser Druide erstellt eine terminierte Buchung für die Rückzahlung eines Darlehens. Wenn Sie ihn
- verwenden, erhalten Sie eine terminierte Buchung mit einer Variablen-Formel, so dass
- der Zins einschließlich Zinseszins korrekt berechnet wird. Um den Wizard manuell zu
- starten, wählen Sie "Aktionen" -> "Terminierte Buchungen" -> "Hypothek &
- Darlehen Druide...".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Der Druide begrüßt Sie mit einer Seite, welche kurz seine Funktion beschreibt. Die drei Knöpfe am
- unteren Rand bleiben während der Benutzung des Wizard unverändert.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Schaltfläche "Abbrechen" dient zum Verlassen des Wizard und zum Abbruch der Erstellung der
- terminierten Buchung. Jede Auswahl, die Sie im Wizard bis zu dieser Stelle
- getroffen haben, geht verloren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Zurück" gelangen Sie zur vorhergehenden Seite zurück und können eine dort
- getroffene Auswahl ändern.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Weiter" gelangen Sie zur nächsten Seite, um mit dem Wizard fortzufahren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Auf der nächsten Seite können Sie die grundlegenden Informationen zum Darlehen eingeben. Diese
- erhalten Sie gewöhnlich von der Bank, wenn die Dokumente für das Darlehen an Sie als
- Darlehensnehmer übergeben werden. Weiterhin können Sie hier das Konto angeben,
- welches in der terminierten Buchung für den Geschäftsvorgang der Zahlung verwendet
- werden soll.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Darlehenskonto: Wählen Sie ein Konto für die Geschäftsvorgänge im Zusammenhang mit
- Darlehenszahlungen [Darlehensschuld?-Passivkonto?], oder benutzen Sie "Neu...", um
- ein neues Konto für diese Geschäftsvorgänge anzulegen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Geben Sie die Darlehenssumme ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zinssatz: Geben Sie den Darlehenszinssatz ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Typ: Wählen Sie die Zinsart des Darlehens aus. Wird ein variabler Zinssatz verwendet, so können
- Sie Angaben im Bereich "Änderungshäufigkeit des Zinssatzes" machen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Änderungshäufigkeit des Zinssatzes: Wählen Sie die Regelmäßigkeit für die Zinsänderung sowie
- das Anfangsdatum der Zinsänderung.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Anfangsdatum: Wählen Sie das Datum, an dem das Darlehen beginnt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Länge: Wählen Sie die Dauer des Darlehens.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Restliche Monate: Dieses Feld wird normalerweise automatisch berechnet. Wählen Sie, wie viele
- Monate für das Darlehen verbleiben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite ermöglicht die Angabe von Treuhand-, Versicherungs- und Steueroptionen für das
- Darlehen. Dies ist hauptsächlich für Hypothekenzahlungen sinnvoll. Jede dieser
- Optionen hat zur Folge, dass der Druide, wenn aktiviert, weitere Seiten anbietet, um
- diese Zahlungsbestandteile einzurichten. Nachfolgend werden alle diese Seiten
- beschrieben, obwohl einige nicht erscheinen, wenn die jeweilige Option nicht aktiviert
- wurde.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>"... Treuhandkonto für Zahlungen verwenden?": Diese Einstellung ermöglicht die Benutzung eines
- Kontos zur Verfolgung von Treuhandzahlungen. Wenn für die Hypothek bzw. das
- Darlehen ein Treuhandkonto benutzt werden soll, um Steuern, Versicherungen usw. zu
- bezahlen, so können Sie hier ein Konto einrichten.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>"... 'Taxes' zahlen?": Zeigt eine weitere Seite an, auf der Sie eine terminierte Buchung für
- Steuerzahlungen einrichten können.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>"... 'Insurance' zahlen?": Zeigt eine weitere Seite an, auf der Sie eine terminierte Buchung für
- Versicherungszahlungen einrichten können.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>"... 'PMI' zahlen?": Zeigt eine weitere Seite an, auf der Sie eine terminierte Buchung für die
- Zahlung einer PMI (private mortgage insurance) einrichten können.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>"... 'Other Expense' zahlen?": Zeigt eine weitere Seite an, auf der Sie eine terminierte Buchung
- für die Zahlung sonstiger Auslagen einrichten können.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite dient zur Angabe der detaillierten Informationen für die terminierte Buchung der
- Darlehenstilgung.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Name: Der hier eingegebene Name wird sowohl für den Namen der terminierten Buchung als auch für
- Beschreibung und Buchungstext verwendet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Zeigt die zur Verwendung des Zahlbetrages verwendete Formel an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung von: Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, von dem der Zahlbetrag abgehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Endbetrag Kapital an (früher: bis): Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, dem der Kapitalanteil des
- Zahlbetrags zugehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zinsen nach: Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, dem der Zinsanteil des Zahlbetrags zugehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Restbetrag nach: Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, dem der Rest des Zahlbetrags zugehen soll. [FIXME: Feld
- nicht gefunden!]
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Tilgungshäufigkeit: Geben Sie die Regelmäßigkeit und das Anfangsdatum für die Tilgungszahlungen
- an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite dient zur Angabe der detaillierten Informationen für die terminierte Buchung der
- Steuerzahlung ("Taxes").
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Name: Der hier eingegebene Name wird sowohl für den Namen der terminierten Buchung als auch für
- Beschreibung und Buchungstext verwendet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Geben Sie hier den Zahlbetrag ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung von: Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, von dem der Steuerbetrag abgehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung an (früher: Zahlung bis): Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, dem der Steuerbetrag zugehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungshäufigkeit: Geben Sie die Regelmäßigkeit und das Anfangsdatum für die Steuerzahlungen
- an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite dient zur Angabe der detaillierten Informationen für die terminierte Buchung der
- Versicherungszahlung ("Insurance").
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Name: Der hier eingegebene Name wird sowohl für den Namen der terminierten Buchung als auch für
- Beschreibung und Buchungstext verwendet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Geben Sie hier den Zahlbetrag ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung von: Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, von dem der Versicherungsbetrag abgehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung an (früher: Zahlung bis): Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, dem der Versicherungsbetrag zugehen
- soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungshäufigkeit: Geben Sie die Regelmäßigkeit und das Anfangsdatum für die
- Versicherungszahlungen an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite dient zur Angabe der detaillierten Informationen für die terminierte Buchung der
- PMI-Zahlung (private mortgage insurance).
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Name: Der hier eingegebene Name wird sowohl für den Namen der terminierten Buchung als auch für
- Beschreibung und Buchungstext verwendet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Geben Sie hier den Zahlbetrag ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung von: Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, von dem der PMI-Betrag abgehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung an (früher: Zahlung bis): Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, dem der PMI-Betrag zugehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungshäufigkeit: Geben Sie die Regelmäßigkeit und das Anfangsdatum für die PMI-Zahlungen an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die nächste Seite dient zur Angabe der detaillierten Informationen für die terminierte Buchung der
- sonstigen Auslagen ("Other Expense").
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Name: Der hier eingegebene Name wird sowohl für den Namen der terminierten Buchung als auch für
- Beschreibung und Buchungstext verwendet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag: Geben Sie hier den Zahlbetrag ein.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung von: Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, von dem der Betrag für die sonstigen Auslagen abgehen
- soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlung an (früher: Zahlung bis): Wählen Sie hier ein Konto, dem der Betrag für die sonstigen
- Auslagen zugehen soll.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungshäufigkeit: Geben Sie die Regelmäßigkeit und das Anfangsdatum für die Zahlungen der
- sonstigen Auslagen an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Auf der letzten Seite haben Sie drei Möglichkeiten, den Wizard zu beenden.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Die Schaltfläche "Abbrechen" dient zum Verlassen des Wizard und zum Abbruch der Erstellung der
- terminierten Buchung für Darlehen. Jede Auswahl, die Sie im Wizard bis zu dieser
- Stelle getroffen haben, geht verloren.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Zurück" gelangen Sie zur vorhergehenden Seite zurück und können eine dort
- getroffene Auswahl ändern.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Mit dem Knopf "Fertig" wird die terminierte Buchung erstellt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Damit haben Sie die terminierte Buchung für die Hypothek oder das Darlehen fertig erfasst.
- </para>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="print-check">
- <title>Schecks drucken</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>In GnuCash können Sie Schecks aus dem Kontobuchfenster heraus bedrucken. GnuCash bietet die
- Möglichkeit, Schecks im Standard-Quicken-Format (US-Letter-Papierformat) oder in einem
- benutzerdefinierten Scheckformat zu bedrucken. Auch Scheckposition und Datumsformat sind
- benutzerdefinierbar.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Um die Scheckdruckfunktion in GnuCash zu benutzen, wählen Sie den Geschäftsvorgang aus, für die
- Sie einen Scheck bedrucken wollen, und wählen Sie "Datei" -> "Scheck drucken".
- Anschließend öffnet sich das Dialogfenster "Scheck drucken".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Das Dialogfenster "Scheck drucken" hat zwei Karteiseiten. Die erste Karteiseite "Optionen" dient der
- Einstellung der üblichsten Optionen, um einen Scheck zu bedrucken. Die zweite
- Karteiseite "Benutzerdefiniertes Format" ermöglicht es, die Position der verschiedenen
- Felder auf dem Scheck festzulegen. Es kann sinnvoll sein, zunächst einen Test-Scheck
- auf leerem Papier zu drucken und mit dessen Hilfe die benötigten Anpassungen
- vorzunehmen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Standardauswahl unter "Optionen" ist "Quicken/Quickbooks (tm) US-Letter".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Scheckformat: Versuchen Sie zuerst das Quicken-Format. Falls die Positionierung fehlerhaft ist,
- benutzen Sie "Custom" (benutzerdefiniert).
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Scheckposition: Legt fest, ob der obere, mittlere oder untere Scheck bedruckt werden soll. Benutzen
- Sie "Custom" (benutzerdefiniert), falls die Positionierung der Schecks auf der Seite
- fehlerhaft ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Datumsformat: Die Voreinstellung wird in den Einstellungen im Abschnitt "International" festgelegt.
- Wählen Sie hier ein Datumsformat aus. Sie können dieses auch mit den Optionen
- "Monate:" und "Jahre:" modifizieren. Die Einstellung "Custom" (benutzerdefiniert)
- ermöglicht es, das Datum im Feld "Format:" zu spezifizieren (%d bedeutet Tag, %m
- bedeutet Monat, %Y bedeutet Jahr). Eine Beispieldarstellung des gewählten Formats
- wird im unteren Fensterbereich angezeigt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Karteiseite "Benutzerdefiniertes Format" besitzt zwei Spalten, in die Sie die X/Y-Koordinaten
- der Position jedes Feldes auf dem Scheck eingeben können. Die Positionen werden im
- Eingabebereich "Benutzerdefiniertes Scheckformat" wie folgt angegeben: x ist Null an der
- linken Scheckkante und erhöht sich in Richtung nach rechts, y ist Null an der unteren
- Scheckkante und erhöht sich in Richtung nach oben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Zahlungsempfänger:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Datum:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag (in Worten):
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Betrag (in Zahlen):
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Buchungstext:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Scheckposition:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Datumsformat:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Maßeinheiten: Wählen Sie die Einheit für die Positionsangaben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Nachdem Sie im Dialogfenster "Scheck drucken" auf "OK" gedrückt haben, öffnet sich das
- Dialogfenster "GnuCash drucken". Wählen Sie "OK", um den Scheck zu bedrucken.
- </para>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="reports">
- <title>Berichte und Diagramme benutzen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Mit seinen Berichten und Diagrammen ist GnuCash in der Lage, Ihnen auf unterschiedlichste Art und
- Weise einen Überblick über Ihre Finanzdaten zu geben. Dies reicht beispielsweise von
- einer einfachen Zusammenfassung der Kontosalden bis hin zu einer erweiterten
- Portfolio-Ansicht. In diesem Abschnitt werden die wichtigsten GnuCash-Berichte erläutert
- sowie Hinweise zu deren Anpassung gegeben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect3 id="report-types">
- <title>Arten von Berichten und Diagrammen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>GnuCash definiert vier Hauptarten von Berichten. Alle sind über das Menü "Berichte" zu erreichen.
- Beachten Sie auch, dass Sie Balkendiagramme durch Ziehen mit der Maus verschieben
- können, und dass Sie in Tortendiagrammen einzelne Segmente herauslösen können.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="report-general">
- <title>Allgemeine Berichte</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die allgemeinen Berichte umfassen den Steuerbericht/TXF-Export, die Kontenübersicht und den
- Buchungsbericht, sowie die Berichte im Untermenü "Beispiel & Benutzerdefiniert".
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Kontenübersicht:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Steuerbericht & TXF Export: Mit dem Steuerbericht können alle steuerrelevanten Erträge und
- Aufwendungen in eine TXF-Datei (Tax eXchange Format) exportiert werden. Diese
- Funktion steht hier zusätzlich zum HTML-Format, welches alle Berichte
- unterstützen, zur Verfügung. Die TXF-Datei kann in steuerliche Programme wie
- TaxCut oder TurboTax importiert werden (siehe Bemerkung 1).
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Buchungsbericht:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Einführungs-Beispielbericht:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Benutzerdefiniert mehrspaltig: Dieser Bericht dient zur Einbettung mehrerer Berichte in ein einziges
- Berichtsfenster, so dass eine ganze Reihe finanzieller Daten auf einen Blick
- sichtbar wird.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Benutzerdefiniert Internet:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Beispielbericht:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Bemerkung 1: Damit dies funktioniert, müssen Sie steuerpflichtige und nicht steuerpflichtige
- Erträge sowie abzugsfähige und nicht abzugsfähige Aufwendungen voneinander trennen.
- Dies geschieht mit dem Dialogfenster "Steuerrelevante Information". Um den Dialog
- aufzurufen, wählen Sie "Bearbeiten" -> "Steuerrelevante Optionen". Das
- Dialogfenster "Steuerrelevante Information" ist im Abschnitt "Steuerrelevante Optionen
- ändern" beschrieben.
- </para>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="report-assets">
- <title>Aktiva & Passiva</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Aktiva- und Passiva-Berichte umfassen z.B. die Bilanz, Portfolio-Berichte und das
- Reinvermögen-Diagramm.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Erweitertes Portfolio:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aktiva Balkendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Passiva Balkendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Durchschnittlicher Kontostand:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bilanz: Dieser Bericht fasst die Aktiva, die Passiva (i.S. Verbindlichkeiten) sowie das Eigenkapital
- zusammen. Bei ordnungsmäßiger Buchführung müssen die Aktiva mit der Summe aus
- Passiva und Eigenkapital übereinstimmen. Falls dies nicht der Fall ist, deutet
- das auf eine interne Nichtausgeglichenheit der Konten hin.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Portfolio: Dieser Bericht fasst den Wert der Wertpapiere des aktuellen Portfolios zusammen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Passiva Balkendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Passiva Tortendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Reinvermögen Balkendiagramm: Das Reinvermögen entspricht der Differenz zwischen Aktiva und Passiva
- (i.S. Verbindlichkeiten).
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Preisdiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="report-income">
- <title>Erträge & Aufwendungen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Ertrags- und Aufwandsberichte umfassen u.a. den Cash-Flow sowie die Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Cash Flow:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aufwendungen Balkendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Aufwendungen Tortendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Erträge/Aufwendungen Diagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Erträge Balkendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Erträge Tortendiagramm:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung: Dieser Bericht fasst die Ertrags- und Aufwandsquellen zusammen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="report-biz">
- <title>Geschäftliche Berichte</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die geschäftlichen Berichte umfassen den Kunden- und den Zuliefererbericht, die druckbare Rechnung
- sowie die Entwicklung der Forderungen und Verbindlichkeiten.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Kundenbericht:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Entwicklung Verbindlichkeiten:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Druckbare Rechnung:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Entwicklung Forderungen:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Zuliefererbericht:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="report-create">
- <title>Berichte und Diagramme erstellen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Falls die vorhandenen Berichte nicht ausreichen, ist es möglich, eigene Berichte zu programmieren.
- Hierzu sollten Sie mit Scheme (einer LISP-ähnlichen Programmiersprache) vertraut sein
- und nach Möglichkeit den GnuCash-Quellcode vorliegen haben.
- </para>
-
- <para>Die Berichtsschnittstelle (reporting interface) ist im Quellcode in der Datei
- src/report/report-system/doc/report-html.txt dokumentiert. Die Datei
- src/scm/report/hello-world.scm in der GnuCash-Source-Distribution bietet ein gutes
- Beispiel für die Entwicklung von Berichten.
- </para>
-
- <para>Weiterhin ist es für eigene Berichte notwendig, auf Daten der GnuCash-Engine zuzugreifen. Dies
- geschieht mithilfe einiger Scheme-Wrapper-Funktionen, welche in der Datei
- src/g-wrap/gnc.html dokumentiert sind. Sie können einen Blick auf andere Berichte unter
- src/scm/report werfen, um zu erfahren, wie diese benutzt werden.
- </para>
-
- <para>Derzeit werden Berichte durch Aufruf einer HTML-Generierungs-API produziert, welche einen
- HTML-Dialekt ausgibt und die Ausgabe mittels einem HTML-Widget rendert. Dies ist mit
- Einschränkungen verbunden, insbesondere was die präzise Anordnung der Objekte
- betrifft, wie sie z.B. für das Bedrucken von Rechnungsformularen erforderlich wäre.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="report-custom">
- <title>Berichte und Diagramme anpassen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Die Berichte in GnuCash besitzen vielfältige Optionen für die individuelle Anpassung. Um auf die
- Berichtsoptionen zuzugreifen, benutzen Sie den Knopf "Optionen" in der Werkzeugleiste.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Viele Berichte haben eine Reihe ähnlicher Optionen. Einige allgemeine Optionen sind:
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Berichtsname: Legt den Titel des Berichts fest. Dieser wird auch zum Drucken des Berichts für
- spätere Zwecke verwendet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Datumsoptionen: Berichte verwenden typischerweise entweder ein Stichtagsdatum oder einen
- Datumszeitraum. Um ein Datum anzugeben, gibt es zwei Möglichkeiten: entweder direkt
- im Datumsfeld oder durch Auswahl eines relativen Datums aus dem Menü. Ein relatives
- Datum gestattet es, Daten wie "Anfang dieses Jahres" oder "Heute" anzugeben.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Schrittgröße: Diese Option wird in Balkendiagrammen benutzt, um das Intervall festzulegen, welches
- jeder Balken repräsentiert. Typische Werte sind "Tag", "Woche", "Monat" und "Jahr".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Konten: Wählen Sie die gewünschten Konten für den Bericht aus. Beachte Sie, dass in einigen
- Berichten nur bestimmte Kontoarten zulässig sind. Beispielsweise können in einem
- Aufwendungen-Tortendiagramm nur Aufwandskonten ausgewählt werden.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Lange Kontennamen anzeigen: Diese Option ermöglicht die Anzeige entweder kurzer Kontennamen (z.B.
- "Strom") oder langer Kontennamen (z.B. Wohnen:Nebenkosten:Strom).
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Unterkonten anzeigen: Zusammenfassende Berichte besitzen meistens eine Option "Unterkonten immer
- anzeigen", welche - falls aktiviert - sicherstellt, dass alle Unterkonten
- berücksichtigt werden, sofern das zugehörige Hauptkonto berücksichtigt ist.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Verschachtelungstiefe der Konten: Diese Option legt fest, bis zu welcher Ebene Unterkonten im
- Bericht ausgewiesen werden. Falls die Unterkonten tiefer als angegeben verschachtelt
- sind, wird ein Gesamtwert für alle Unterkonten errechnet und als Summe aufgenommen.
- Wenn Sie sicherstellen möchten, dass jedes gewählte Konto einzeln ausgewiesen
- wird, wählen Sie "Alle".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Stilvorlage: Wählen Sie eine Stilvorlage aus. Stilvorlagen legen fest, wie der Bericht optisch
- dargestellt wird. Momentan existieren zwei Stilvorlagen: "Voreinstellung" und
- "Bunt". Sie können beide individuell anpassen, indem Sie den Menübefehl
- "Bearbeiten" -> "Stilvorlagen..." verwenden. Einzelheiten hierzu finden Sie im
- Abschnitt "HTML-Stilvorlagen ändern".
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Diagrammbreite/-höhe: Diese Optionen sind für die meisten Diagramme verfügbar, sie legen die
- Ausgabedimensionen (in Pixeln) fest.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Berichtswährung: Wählen Sie hier die Berichtswährung. Im allgemeinen werden die Beträge zur
- Ausgabe in diese Währung umgerechnet.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Preisberechnungsquelle: Wählen Sie aus, wie Wertpapier- und Währungskurse im Bericht berechnet
- werden sollen. Zur Auswahl stehen: "Gewichteter Durchschnitt" der Kurse über die
- Gesamtheit der Geschäftsvorgänge, Bewertung zu aktuellen Werten ("Neuester") und
- Bewertung zum Berichtsdatum ("Zeitlich nächster").
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Beträge anzeigen: Wenn diese Option aktiviert ist, werden bei einem Diagramm die Gesamtsummen in
- der Legende angezeigt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Maximale Anzahl Segmente (bei Tortendiagrammen): Gibt die maximale Anzahl der Segmente in einem
- Tortendiagramm an. Weitere Konten werden in einem Segment namens "Weitere"
- angezeigt.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Maximale Anzahl Segmente (bei Balkendiagrammen): Gibt die maximale Anzahl von Balken in einem
- Balkendiagramm an.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Spalten anzeigen: Wählen Sie die Spalten aus, die angezeigt werden sollen.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="report-print">
- <title>Berichte und Diagramme drucken oder exportieren</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>GnuCash kann Berichte sowohl drucken als auch in eine HTML-Datei (Web-Page) exportieren. Sie öffnen
- das Dialogfenster "GnuCash drucken" mit dem Knopf "Drucken" in der Werkzeugleiste oder
- mit den Menübefehl "Datei" -> "Drucken". Um einen Bericht als Web-Page (HTML) zu
- exportieren, benutzen Sie den Knopf "Exportieren" in der Werkzeugleiste, und geben Sie
- einen Dateinamen ein.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Im Dialogfenster "GnuCash Drucken" wählen Sie den Drucker aus, an den der Druckauftrag gesendet
- werden soll, oder geben an, dass in eine Datei gedruckt werden soll. Weiterhin steht ein
- Knopf "Vorschau" zur Verfügung, um vor dem Drucken eine Druckvorschau zu öffnen.
- Wählen Sie "Drucken", um den Auftrag zum Drucker zu schicken, oder "Abbrechen", um den
- Dialog abzubrechen.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Wenn Sie aus einem geöffneten Kontobuchfenster heraus drucken, so wird der Kontenbericht gedruckt,
- welcher auch "Bericht zum Kontobuch" heißt. Dieser listet die Geschäftsvorgänge zu
- einem Konto einschließlich einer Gesamtsumme auf. Alle anderen Berichte werden so
- gedruckt, wie sie in der Berichtsansicht erscheinen.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
-
- <sect1 id="custom-gnucash">
- <title>GnuCash anpassen</title>
-
- <sect2 id="account-options">
- <title>Kontenoptionen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>The Account Options is used to set the view of the Account Tree Window. This dialog sets the view on
- each open window of the account tree. This means that when the New Account Tree is used
- several different views of the account tree can be created.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Name of the account view: Used to name the account in the Windows menu and the note tabs.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Double click expands parent accounts: Use double click instead of single click to expand accounts
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account types to display: Select which types of accounts to display in the account tree.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account fields to display: Select what fields to display in the account tree.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="set-prefs">
- <title>GnuCash Einstellungen anpassen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>The GnuCash Preferences dialog contains the following sections.
- </para>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-accounts">
- <title>Konto:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Account : This option is used to pick a different separator in the register for parent and child
- accounts.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Reversed-balance account types: This option is used to choose what type of account have their
- balances reversed. If the balance is normally negative, as in a loan or a credit
- card then this will make the balance positive.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Use accounting labels: This option is used to turn on accounting labels (debit and credit) instead
- of using terms such as withdrawal and deposit.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-biz">
- <title>Geschäft:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Number of Rows: This option is used to set the default number of register rows to display in
- invoices.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Invoice Tax Included?: This option is used to set if tax is included by default in entries on
- invoices.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Bill Tax Included?: This option is used to set if tax is included by default in entries on bills.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-general">
- <title>Allgemein:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Show Advanced Settings:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Toolbar Buttons:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Display "Tip of the Day":
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Display negative amounts in red:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Automatic Decimal Point:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Auto Decimal Places:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>No account list setup on new file:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Days to retain log files:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-inter">
- <title>International:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Date Format:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Default Currency:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Use 24-hour time format:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Enable EURO support:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-online">
- <title>Online Banking & Import:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>QIF Verbose documentation:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Enable REPLACE match action:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Enable SKIP transaction action:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Auto-CLEAR threshold:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Match display threshold:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Auto-ADD threshold:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-rec">
- <title>Abgleichen:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Automatic interest transfer:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Automatic credit card payments:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Check off cleared transactions:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-reg">
- <title>Kontobuch:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Default Register Style:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Double Line Mode:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>'Enter' moves to blank transaction:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Confirm before changing reconciled:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Register font:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Register hint font:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-reg-color">
- <title>Kontobuch Farben:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Header color:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Primary color:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Secondary color:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Primary active color:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Secondary active color:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Split color:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Split active color:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Double mode colors alternate with transactions:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-sched">
- <title>Terminierte Buchungen:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Run on GnuCash start:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Auto-Create new Scheduled Transactions by default:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Notify on new, auto-created Scheduled Transactions:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Default number of days in advance to create:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Default number of days in advance to remind:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Template Register Lines:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-user">
- <title>Benutzerinformationen:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences;
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>User Name:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>User Address:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="prefs-advanced">
- <title>Erweitert:</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>This section contains the following preferences (this screen is hidden by default);
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Save Window Geometry:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Application MDI mode:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Show Vertical Borders:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Show Horizontal Borders:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Auto-Raise Lists:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Show All Transactions:
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Number of Rows:
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="change-style">
- <title>HTML-Stilvorlagen ändern</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>GnuCash has two default stylesheets for webpage reports. These stylesheets can be altered by using
- the HTML Style Sheets editor. To access the editor go to Edit -> Style Sheets...
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>To add a new Style Sheet select the New... button in the Style Sheet pane. The New Style Sheet
- dialog will appear. Fill in the Name: of the new Style Sheet and choose a template. To
- remove a Style Sheet select the Style Sheet from the list and click Delete.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect3 id="style-default">
- <title>Voreinstellung</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>The Default Style Sheet has two tabs to alter the appearance of reports, General and Tables.
- </para>
-
- <sect4 id="style-def-general">
- <title>Allgemein</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Background Color: Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Background Pixmap: Use the Browse button to select a picture to use as the background in reports.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Enable Links: Select this to enable blue hyperlinks in reports.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="style-def-tables">
- <title>Tabellen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Table cell spacing: Sets the space between table cells
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Table cell padding: Sets the padding between table cells
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Table border width: Sets the width of the borders on tables.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="style-technicolor">
- <title>Bunt</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>The Technicolor Style Sheet has four tabs to alter the appearance of reports, Colors, General,
- Images and Tables.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect4 id="style-tech-colors">
- <title>Farben</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Background Color: Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Text Color: Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Table Cell Color: Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Link Color: Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Alternate Table Cell Color: Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Subheading/Subtotal Cell Color: Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Sub-subheading/total Cell Color:Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Grand Total Cell Color:Opens the color picker to choose a new color.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="style-tech-general">
- <title>Allgemein</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Preparer: Name of the person preparing the report.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Prepared for: Name of Organization or Company the report is prepared for.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Show preparer info: Show the Preparer information in the report.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Enable Links: Select this to enable blue hyperlinks in reports.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="style-tech-images">
- <title>Bilder</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Background Tile: Use the Browse button to select a picture to use as the background in reports.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Heading Banner: Use the Browse button to select a picture to use as the heading in reports.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Logo: Use the Browse button to select a picture to use as the logo in reports.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
-
- <sect4 id="style-tech-tables">
- <title>Tabellen</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Table cell spacing: Sets the space between table cells
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Table cell padding: Sets the padding between table cells
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Table border width: Sets the width of the borders on tables.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
- </sect4>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="set-tax-options">
- <title>Steuerrelevante Optionen ändern</title>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>The Tax Information dialog is used to set Tax Options. The settings on accounts in this dialog are
- used by the TXF Export function in reports to select the accounts for export. To access
- this dialog go to Edit -> Tax Options.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>IMPORTANT: Most TXF codes should only appear on a single account! The exceptions are codes for which
- the "Payer Name Source" is not grayed, each of which can appear many times. Of course,
- each duplicate should have a unique payer name. These are typically interest accounts or
- stocks or mutual funds that pay dividends.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Accounts: This pane contains the list of accounts. Select an account to set a TXF category. If no
- account is selected nothing is changed. If multiple accounts are selected, all of the
- accounts will be set to the selected item.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Tax Related: Select this checkbox to add tax information to an account then select the TXF Category
- below.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>TXF Categories: Select the desired one. A detailed description appears just below.
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Payer Name Source: A text description that is exported along with the value of the account. This is
- usually the name of a bank, stock, or mutual fund that pays dividends or interest.
- Occasionally, it is a description of a deduction.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <sect3 id="txf-probs">
- <title>TXF Export - Bekannte Probleme</title>
-
- <para>Ein TXF Export exportiert die Daten für eine Steuererklärung in den USA.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>TaxCut 1999
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Code: N488 "^ Sched B \ Div. income, cap gain distrib."
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Code: N286 "^ Sched B \ Dividend income"
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>These two codes, from the same payer, are not correlated. The user will have to adjust for this
- after import.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>TaxCut 1999, 2000
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Code: N521 " F1040 \ Federal estimated tax, quarterly"
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Does not accept the date field and does not import the individual payment amounts, only the total.
- The date and individual payment amounts, only matter if you have to compute the penalty.
- (this may be a TurboTax enhancement)
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Code: N460 " W-2 \ Salary or wages, self"
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Code: N506 " W-2 \ Salary or wages, spouse"
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>and other related codes.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Information from only one job may be imported.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>TurboTax 1999, 2000
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Code: N521 " F1040 \ Federal estimated tax, quarterly"
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Does not accept the dates outside of the tax year. This is a problem for the last payment that is
- due Jan 15. GnuCash changes the the date of the last payment to Dec 31. The user will
- have to adjust for this after import. The date only matters if you have to compute the
- penalty.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>TXF Tax eXport Format
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Duplicate Codes
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Most codes are not supposed to appear more than once. GnuCash issues an error message if it detects
- this, but will still export the data. These are not handled the same by TaxCut and
- TurboTax.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>TurboTax
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Sums the duplicate codes. i.e., job one and job two are added together.
- </para>
-
- <para />
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>TaxCut
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para />
-
- <para>Keeps only the LAST of the duplicate codes. i.e., job one is ignored and job two is kept.
- </para>
-
- <para />
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="txf-defs">
- <title>Ausführliche Beschreibung der US-amerikanischen TXF Kategorien</title>
+ <xi:include href="Help_ch_Transactions.xml" />
- <para />
+ <xi:include href="Help_ch_Business.xml" />
- <para>Table 32. Detailed TXF Category Descriptions
- </para>
+ <xi:include href="Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml" />
- <para />
+ <xi:include href="Help_ch_Reports.xml" />
- <xi:include href="Help_txf-categories.xml" />
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
- </chapter>
+ <xi:include href="Help_ch_Customize.xml" />
<xi:include href="Help_tips-appendix.xml" />
Summary of changes:
help/de/CMakeLists.txt | 7 +
help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml | 53 +-
help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Business.xml | 3 +
help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Customize.xml | 3 +
help/{C => de}/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml | 5 +-
help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Reports.xml | 104 +-
help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml | 9 +-
help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Transactions.xml | 22 +-
help/de/Makefile.am | 7 +
help/de/gnucash-help.xml | 10704 +-------------------------
10 files changed, 80 insertions(+), 10837 deletions(-)
copy help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Account-Actions.xml (98%)
copy help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Business.xml (99%)
copy help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Customize.xml (99%)
copy help/{C => de}/Help_ch_GUIMenus.xml (99%)
copy help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Reports.xml (99%)
copy help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Tools_Assistants.xml (99%)
copy help/{C => de}/Help_ch_Transactions.xml (99%)
More information about the gnucash-changes
mailing list